Terramodel TML List

TML List of Terramodel commands available from Geocomp Systems

As of 28 March 2022, commands on this list are available from Geocomp Systems. Most are TMLs that are included in our Geocomp Update P for
Terramodel 10.61. Some are also available from other sources.

Geocomp Update P installs documents including manuals and this page. Open these documents through DOCUMENTS command. Open the local TML List through TMLLIST command. The local list has links to some local documents which cannot be opened from the current TML List on the Internet.

Select commands in Terramodel by menu, command line, toolbar, toolbox, macro or function key.

Most commands require a Terramodel licence with relevant modules and a corresponding hardware security key.

The colours on this list show whether each command has any significant changes since Geocomp Update N was released and whether supplied with every Terramodel, with the HDMS module, new with Geocomp Updates, improved with Geocomp Updates, or separately. Click on a command name to go to more Details below.
To get new or revised commands, Geocomp Update P or the whole of Terramodel, please check for updates or contact Geocomp Systems.

To find anything in this list, use Ctrl F.

COMMAND NAME SUMMARY CATEGORY
 2DCON Modify elevations of 2D contours data prep
 3D Create a 3D set offset from horizontal and vertical alignments alignment | set
 3DFILTER Filter superfluous points from DTM dtm
 3DMCOUT Export to Topcon 3D-MC MCA file export
 3DPIPE Report 3D lengths and angles for sets pipe general
 3DROAD Create a 3D set offset from roadjob alignments alignment | set
 3DPL Modify elevations of individual contours data prep
 3DPT Create 3D points data prep
 3DVIEW 3D Visualiser dtm
 3DVISUALISER 3D Visualiser dtm
 3DVISUALIZER 3D Visualizer dtm
 ABBREVSET Set prefix abbreviations for labelling and display set | config | view
 ABOUT Report Terramodel version number and modules report | config
 ACADCONV Convert .DWG or .DXF files to R2000 .DWG or R10 .DXF files convert
 ACTIVE Set active alignment alignment
 ACTIVE​CHAINAGE Set the active chainage alignment
 ACTIVE​STATION Set the active station alignment
 ADD2NAME Add a prefix or suffix to names of points, plines and sets name
 ADD2PLIN Add a new vertex into a pline pline
 ADD2PTNO Add a prefix or suffix to point numbers point
 ADD2SET Add a new point into a set point | set
 ADD2TXT Add a prefix or suffix to text text
 ADDIMAGE Add an image located by pline boxes image
 ADDISO Add an isopach depths to DTM points dtm
 ADDMAPSY Add coordinate mapping systems transform
 ADDTIDES Add tide heights to depths hdms
 ADDWACS Replaced by ADDMAPSY transform
 ADJAREA Move a reference line to meet a target area pline | set
 AIRVALVE Label a pipe with airvalve blocks pipe general
 ALIAS Create, edit and delete aliases config
 ALIGNIMP Import an alignment from an ASCII file alignment
 ALIGNOFF Import alignment offsets from an ASCII file alignment
 ALIGNTXT Align text to HAL align | text
 ALL Display extents view
 ALT Enable menus for entry by keyboard menu
 ANG Report angle-right between points report
 ARC Draw pline arcs from any three parameters set
 ARC2P Create a pline arc using two points and a radius set
 ARC2PSET Create a set arc using two points and a radius set
 ARCBL Create breaklines along all arcs on a layer dtm | set
 ARCBREAK Replace set arcs with points and chords set
 ARCENTRE Toggle visibility of set arc centre points toggle
 ARCS Replaced by ARC set
 AREA Report the area of a closed figure report
 AREA2SET Replaced by TRACEBDY set
 ARRANGE Arrange icons of minimised views view
 ASAPIMAG Add mastersheet images to plotboxes image
 ASHIN Import an Ashtech points file import
 ASM01 Renumber points in chainage (or station) order point
 ASSETLAY Relayer objects to match Asset_ID feature attribute
 ASSIGNZ Modify elevation of contours by crossing pline data prep
 AUSGEOID Import an AUSGeoid .DAT or .TXT file import | transform
 AUTO​DRAFT Create line, block and text features from field codes survey
 AUTOSAVE Enable automatic saving of project files config
 AUTOSET Create a clockwise set from points set
 AVERPTS Compute average coordinates report
 AVGEND Compute volumes by average end-area report
 BARRIER Report on installation of pre-cast road barriers report | road
 BASIN Create, enter and edit basin parameters for a point hydrology
 BBEAR Create a point at the intersection of two bearings point
 BCPIPEIN Import a pipe survey from Business Center pipe survey
 BDIST Create a point at the intersection of a bearing and an arc point
 BDYRELAY Replaced by GCNEARLN set
 BEARTEXT Adds a datum angle to bearing text text
 BENCH Replaced by GCBENCH set
 BESTFITA Draw a curve or plane of best fit pline
 BESTFIT Replaced by BESTFITA pline
 BFITCURV Draw an arc of best fit pline
 BFITLINE Draw a line of best fit pline
 BGELEV Copy points into an elevation view view
 BHEXTEND Extend borehole DTMs road | dtm
 BHOLE01 Import boreholes from a CSV import
 BIGXMLIN Import points from .XML files with long lines import
 BIN2IMG Create a coloured image from depths hdms
 BL Create breaklines set
 BLDG Create plines with corners at right angles set
 BLFILTER Filter excess points from breaklines dtm | set
 BLINECHK Check for crossing breaklines set
 BLKPTS Place blocks at points relative to an alignment block
 BLKREAD Replace an internal block with an external block block
 BLOCK Create, place, list or purge blocks block
 BLOCKDIR Modify direction of blocks block
 BLOCKLST Create an array of blocks for a legend block
 BLUETOP Bluetop report report
 BMAP Replaced by BLKPTS block
 BOREHOLE Import boreholes import
 BOX Create a pline box by two corners pline
 BOXDYNA Create pline boxes from dynaview extents pline | plot
 BOXIMAGE Add images located by named pline boxes image
 BRACKETS Add parentheses to text text
 BREAK Break a pline or set into two parts pline | set
 BREAKVAL Break a pline within a vertical curve data prep
 BUILDDTM Modify elevation of contours by crossing pline data prep
 BUILDING Construct a building with perpendicular or angled sides pline
 CAGDRLX Report Compute-​A-​Grade ditch report
 CALLOUT Label objects with callout text text
 CAROUSEL Configure plotter pen carousels plot | config
 CASCADE Arrange all open views so that all the view names are visible view
 CASE Replaced by TEXTCASE text
 CAT Create a catenary curve in the profile view pline
 CDSPROF Create initial design profile for a cul-de-sac or kerb return alignment
 CENTREV Re-centre views based on active alignment view | alignment
 CENVIEW Re-centre views based on road alignment view | road
 CF2SUPER Create super­elevation slope alignment from existing crossfall alignment
 CHAINAGE Set the start chainage of a HAL alignment
 CHECKATT Check attributes feature attribute
 CHEKROAD Check and correct roadway alignment registration alignment
 CHKRDDTM Check road DTM and add breaklines across roads road | dtm
 CHNGATTR Replace selected attributes based on a dictionary attribute
 CHNGCOLR Change colour ByLayer to colour by colour number colour
 CHNGHEIG Change elevation by point name elevation
 CHNGNAME Replace selected characters in names based on a dictionary name
 CHNGTEXT Replace selected text based on a dictionary text
 CHOSDIFF Report chainage, offset and height difference from DTM report
 CHTXT Convert stationing text to chainage text text
 CIRCLE Create a circular pline pline
 CLEANSET Replaced by CLEANUP set
 CLEANUP Remove superfluous points and vertices set | pline
 CLEARMESS Clear text from the message scroll display display
 CLIP Clip plines or sets to closed boundaries. pline | set
 CLIPOUT Clip objects outside multiple boundaries. pline | set
 CLOSE Close the current project file
 CLOSEFIG Close selected lines set
 CLS See CLEARMESS display
 CMD Open Windows command prompt config
 COLOR Modify the color of selected objects colour
 COLOR​CODE Color points relative to a tunnel design colour
 COLORCON Colour contours by contour interval colour
 COLORPT Colour points between contour intervals colour
 COLOUR Modify the colour of selected objects colour
 COLOUR​CODE Colour points relative to a tunnel design colour
 COLOUR​CON See COLORCON colour
 COLRLINE Modify colours and linetypes by layer colour | linetype
 COMMAND Bring up a command line command
 Command​Toggle Toggle the visibility of the command line command
 COMPASS Place a compass rose block
 COMPGRID Compactor grid settings compactor
 CONFORM Report road thickness conformance report
 CONLABZ Modify elevation of contours by labels data prep
 CONNECT Connect two sets across a gap to form a single set set
 CONTENTS Help Table of Contents help
 CONTOUR Extract contour plines from a DTM dtm
 Contour​At​Elev Create plines at a specified contour elevation dtm
 CONTOUR​SET Configure contour interval dtm | config
 CONTOUR​VOL Compute volumes from contour plines dtm
 CONVDMS Convert DMS to decimal degrees or decimal to DMS transform
 CONVERT Convert sets to plines or plines to sets set | pline
 CONVSET Set slope convention set
 COORDCON Convert between USA or UTM geodetic coordinate systems transform
 COORDS Display the coordinate scroll display
 COPY Copy selected objects set | pline
 COPYROAD Copy a roadjob to a new roadjob road
 COPYRWAY Copy a roadway to a different roadjob road
 COPYTEMP Copy a roadway template to other templates with the same name road
 CORDSCRL Recover a lost coordinate scroll display
 COUNT Count the number of objects of each type in each view report
 CRDTABLE Replaced by GCTABLE text
 CREATELL Import layer lists and layers import | layer
 CROSSCHK Check for crossing sets or plines set
 CROWFOOT Toggle arrow heads on segment text leader lines toggle
 CSM Coordinate System Manager config
 CSTAKE Report construction staking report
 CSV2ADC Create AutoDraft Configuration file from .CSV config
 CSV2TAB Create table of text from .CSV file text
 CSVATTEX Report attributes to a .CSV file attribute
 CTAB Replaced by GCTABLE text
 CULDESAC Create and draw a Cul-de-Sac set
 CURRENT Select the current layer by object or list layer
 CURSOR Limit the direction and increment of cursor movement display
 CURVE Insert or edit a pline curve alignment
 CURVESOL Compute arc properties pline | set
 CUTFILL Balance cut or fill volumes dtm
 CUTFILLA Replaced by CUTFILL dtm
 CVD5EXPT Export to Civilcad 5 .AS5 export
 CVD5IMPT Import from Civilcad 5 .AS5 import
 CVDEXPT Export to Civilcad 4 .ASC export
 CVDIMPT Import from Civilcad 4 .ASC import
 CWISE Reverse the direction of closed anticlockwise sets drafting tools
 DATAMINE Import a Datamine binary file import
 DCEDIT Trimble DC File Editor import | export
 DDIST Create a point at the intersection of two arcs or distances point
 DEADSETS Show and create dead regions dtm | set
 DECURVE See CURVE pline
 DEFANG Display angle between two bearings report
 DELARCS Replaced by ARCBREAK set
 DELAYLST Delete layer lists layer
 DELCROSS Delete objects between two locations delete
 DELETE Delete records delete
 DELETE​SEGMENT Delete a segment delete
 DELNULTR Delete nul (dead) triangle sets delete
 DELTRIAN Replaced by REMTRIS set
 DEMIN An alias for an IMPORT script to import USGS .DEM files import
 DEPTHDTM Create a depth surface from plines representing depths dtm
 DEPTHSUR Depth surfaces dtm
 DESC Change numeric names to alphanumeric text
 DESCAD Change numeric names to alphanumeric with separator text
 DESIGN Project batters from a design DTM dtm
 DESIGNELEV Modify elevation to design roadway elevation road
 DESIGNSET Configure design settings config
 DESPIKE Remove spikes from a DTM dtm
 DESPLINE See SPLINE pline
 DFEDIT Data Format Editor config
 DIAG Trimble diagnostic report report
 DIM Dimension sets and plines text | report
 DISJOIN Break sets and plines into segments set | pline
 DISP12DA Display 12D model attributes attribute
 DISPFEAT Display feature attributes attribute
 DISPLAY​SET Configure object display display
 DISTANCE Report the distance between two locations report
 DIVIDE Divide a line into intervals point | set | pline
 DLGDOIN Import USGS DLG-O file import
 DLGDOOUT Export USGS DLG-O file export
 DLINE Dimension between two locations text
 DOCU​MENTS List Terramodel documents help
 DPAD Replaced by MOVEPAD set
 DRAFTSET Drafting settings config
 DRAG Toggle dragging on or off config
 DRAGHDIN Import Drag Head log file import
 DRAINRPT Drainage detail report report
 DRAPE Create sets where selected plines cross DTM links dtm
 DRILL01 Label a drill hole text
 DRNGRADE Label a set segment of a drain with grade pipe general
 DRNVOLMS Report volumes and areas of ponds in a DTM report | dtm
 DTED Import a DTED .DT1 file import
 DTM2LDBX Export a DTM as Leica 1200 DBX database export
 DTM2XML Export a DTM as LandXML export
 DTMALL Relink all DTM layers and refresh dtm
 DTMAREA Replaced by GC82 dtm | report
 DTMBYLL Replaced by GCCOPY dtm
 DTMCH Select the current DTM layer dtm
 DTMCONE Create a cone from a point to a DTM set
 DTMDRAIN Create sets around drainage areas hydrology
 DTMEDGE Create a set around a DTM edge dtm
 DTMGRID Interpolate a grid of points over a DTM dtm
 DTMINFO Report which layers are linked for DTMs dtm
 DTMMATCH Match overlapping DTMs dtm
 DTMMATH Create points by comparison with two DTMs dtm
 DTMPTS Interpolate elevations of points from a DTM dtm
 DTMSET Create sets of triangle sides on a DTM dtm
 DTMSHOT Create a point on a DTM at a grade and bearing dtm
 DTMSTATS Report the highest and lowest elevations of points in a layer report
 DTMUPDT Relink the current DTM layer and refresh dtm
 DTMVISTA Project sets onto a DTM dtm
 DUMPATT Report the attribute records stored for a selected object report
 DUPLTUS Remove duplicated segments from triangular sets set
 DUPLTRIS Remove duplicated segments from triangular sets set
 DWGIN An alias for an IMPORT script to import .DWG files import
 DWGOUT An alias for an EXPORT script to export .DWG files export
 DXF3D Import elevations from .DXF files import
 DXFCHANG Change the name of layers in a .DXF file export | import
 DXFIN An alias for an IMPORT script to import .DXF files import
 DXFOUT An alias for an EXPORT script to export .DXF files export
 DYNAVIEW Create a dynaview plot
 EARTHWORK Compute volume of cut and fill between two DTMs report
 EARTHWRK Report Roadway volumes by end-area report
 EDIT Edit object object
 EDITINI Edit initialisation file TMODWIN.INI config
 EFFICIEN Haul road efficiency calculator masshaul
 ELBLK Replaced by PTBLKS point
 ELE2NAME Change name of objects to match their elevations name
 ELEV​ALONG​SET Set the elevation of points along a set set
 ELEVATION Replaced by GCELEV elevation
 ELEVOBJS Interpolate elevation of points, text and blocks from DTM DTM
 ELEV​REF​PLANE Modify elevation of points by reference plane elevation
 ELEV​REF​PT Modify elevation of points to reference point elevation
 ELFS Elevation and grade from chainage profile
 ELLIPSE Create an ellipse pline
 ELTXT Replaced by TEXT2PNT point | text
 ELVPLINE Interpolate elevations onto contour plines plines |dtm
 EMXSALIGN Import a Geopak alignment from EMXS import
 ERRELIP Add error ellipse attributes attribute
 ESRIIN Import objects from ESRI shape files import
 ESRIOUT Export objects to ESRI shape files export
 EVALDTM Report problems with breakline formation dtm
 EXEC Execute an external program config
 EXIT Exit Terramodel save
 EXPLODE Explode blocks, text and complex linetypes block
 EXPLORE Open Windows Explorer exec
 EXPORT Export or upload data using scripts export
 EXPORTGC Export or report cross sections in Geocomp format export
 EXPORT​SMGR Export and upload script manager export
 EXPORTXS Export cross section data in Terramodel .XSC format export
 EXTEND Extend a pline or set to boundaries or a distance pline | set
 F1 Help help
 F2 Create, edit and delete layers layer
 F3 Refresh the display of the active window view
 F4 Move the display to a new location view
 F5 Zoom in by window view
 F6 Zoom out by 2X view
 F7 Toggle point number labels on|off point label | display
 F8 Toggle symbol labels on|off point label | display
 F9 Toggle elevation labels on|off point label | display
 F10 Enable menus for entry by keyboard menu
 F11 Toggle point name labels on|off point label | display
 F12 Zoom to extents view
 FACTZ Replaced by SCALEELV transform
 FAVORITES Favorite commands config
 FBLOCK Import ASCII point files by square regions import
 FCXOUT Export Trimble feature code library (.FCX) from AutoDraft (.ADC) export
 FIELDD Replaced by RDE survey
 FILLET Create a curve by radius at the intersection of two segments pline | set
 FILTER Filter vertices in plines pline
 FILT3DPT Filter duplicate points by 3D tolerance point
 FIXCURVE Move three-​point-​arc points onto tangents set
 FIXDTM Fix breaklines connected to points in other layers dtm
 FIXDYNA Replace dynaviewed plotboxes with new plotbox records plot
 FIXFONT Fix missing default Windows font config
 FIXGCSPELL Add dictionaries to GCSPELL config
 FIXLAYERS Fix layers that do not compute end-area volumes dtm
 FIXRDE Fix lost RDE window config
 FIX​SCROLL Recover a lost coordinate scroll display
 FIXTVLITE Fix lost TVLITE window config
 FLD2RDE Import a 12D Model .FLD file import​|​survey
 FLIP Part of LABELTABLE table
 FLIPDOWN Copy points and sets from an elevation view to a plan view view
 FLIPUP Copy points and sets from a plan view into an elevation view view
 FONTCHNG List or change fonts used by selected text text
 FORESTRD Apply horizontal design criteria to a road alignment road
 FORESTTB Report offsets for a forest road road
 FRGOUT Export Fastmap 700 Full Road Geometry file export
 FTCODEIN Replaced by FYATBIN attribute
 FYATBEDIT Edit feature attributes attribute
 FYATBEP Export feature attributes to CSV attribute
 FYATBIN Import feature attributes from a survey file attribute
 FYATBOUT Export feature attributes to Mapinfo attribute
 GARMININ Import Garmin GPS Waypoint (.wpt) File import
 GARMINOU Export Garmin GPS Waypoint (.wpt) File export
 GC01 Truncate the name of selected objects text
 GC02 Modify point name to include chainage & offset name | alignment
 GC03 Report chainage and offset from HAL and VAL report
 GC03A Report chainage and offset from master HAL report
 GC03DRN Report chainage (horizontal), offset and design offset from HAL and VAL report
 GC03DUAL Report chainage and offset from two HAL and VAL pairs report
 GC03RAKE Report chainage, offset and rake report
 GC03WALL Report chainage and offset for a wall report
 GC04 Create mid-points on short plines point
 GC05 Calculate the centre of mass between two DTMs report
 GC06 Round elevations in project file point
 GC07 Helmert transformation transform
 GC08 Part of RDXGC and XSHEETGC plot
 GC09 Place blocks and symbols by group block
 GC10 List and sum area, 2D length and 3D length for printing report
 GC10CSV Replaced by GC10 report
 GC100 Report thickness between two DTMs report
 GC12DIN Import 12D Model .12DA or .12DAZ archive file import
 GC12DOUT Export 12D Model .12DA archive file export
 GC14 Report chainage (along slope) and offset from HAL and VAL report
 GC14S Report sorted chainage (along slope) and offset from HAL and VAL report
 GC14SET Report chainage (along slope) and offset from set report
 GC14R Report chainage and offset in TMS ProFit XY format report | tunnel
 GC15 Delete selected lines with specified total length pline | set
 GC16 Change colours and linetypes by group, name or layer colour | name | group
 GC16ADC Modify line colours and linetypes to match AutoDraft colour | linetype
 GC17 Calculate intersection with DTM given bearing and slope from set point
 GC18 Report chainage and elevation along a VAL report
 GC20 Compute and check cut|fill volumes within boundaries report
 GC21 Change the default callout style text
 GC22 Check a DTM edge boundary sets
 GC23 Create a set where slopes from points intersect a DTM set
 GC24 Bowditch (compass rule) adjustment. survey
 GC25 Create a single isopach or cut|fill line between two DTMs dtm
 GC25MULT Create multiple isopachs between two DTMs dtm
 GC26 Test attribute records attribute
 GC26GIS Create an attribute record in MS Access for an object attribute
 GC27 Place chainage labels parallel to xlines text
 GC28 Create 3D points along HAL & VAL at 2D distances alignment
 GC283D Create 3D points along HAL & VAL at 3D distances alignment
 GC29 Compute distance & direction with 3D components report
 GC29UTM Compute ellipsoidal distance & direction report
 GC30 Replaced by GC30A report
 GC30A Report coordinates and elevation difference to DTM with alignment and labels report
 GC30PERP Report coordinates and elevation difference perpendicular to DTM report
 GC31 Remove duplicate points on a layer with tolerances point
 GC32 Report visible layers in each LayerList report
 GC33 Create a DTM from the upper or lower of two DTMs dtm
 GC33MULT Create a DTM from the upper or lower of multiple DTMs dtm
 GC34 Find and report a point by number mark
 GC35 Create points at centroids of a plines or sets point
 GC36 Move points onto a HAL or line point
 GC37 Report and label cross section from strings report
 GC37CSV Create cross sections as .CSV at strings intersecting xlines export
 GC38 Affine transformation transform
 GC383D Replaced by GC3DADJ point
 GC39 Move a HAL IP and update Xlines road
 GC3D Create a 3D set by vertical or perpendicular offsets set | alignment
 GC3DADJ 3D conformal transformation transform
 GC3DROT Rotate in 3D by steps transform
 GC3DSETS Find the closest or perpendicular 3D distance point | set | report
 GC3PTARC Create an arc set through three points set
 GC40 Compare points in two layers by coordinate report
 GC40A Compare points in two layers by coordinate using search ranges report
 GC40M Compare points in two layers by coordinate using alignment report
 GC40PILE Report pile differences report
 GC40RAKE Report pile rakes report
 GC40TEXT Label points in two layers with differences text
 GC41 Show obstructions with circles in profile view road
 GC42 Report elevation minus roadway elevation report
 GC42AB Compare as-built points within tolerance with roadway design report
 GC42ABS Select as-built points within tolerance of roadway design select
 GC42DTM Compare DTM with roadway design report
 GC42HAL Compare as-built points with HAL in selected Roadway report
 GC42KB Compare as-built points with HAL and design kerb set report
 GC42VAL Compare as-built points with VAL in selected Roadway report
 GC43 Report surface areas of shapes in a roadjob report
 GC43CSV Report surface areas of shapes in a roadjob to CSV report
 GC43MCSV Report multiple surface areas of shapes in a roadjob to CSV report
 GC43S Report surface areas of shapes in a roadjob within a material report
 GC43SCSV Report surface areas of shapes in a roadjob within a material to a CSV file report
 GC44 Report surface areas of a DTM by slope and chainage report
 GC44CSV Report surface areas of a DTM by slope and chainage to CSV report
 GC44S Report surface areas of a DTM by slope and chainage within a material report
 GC45 Create points along a HAL or VAL at incremental distances point
 GC46 Compute cut volumes between surfaces within boundaries report
 GC47 Create road resheet profiles road
 GC48 Extract profiles from roadway shapes road
 GC49 Create a point on a line given elevation point
 GC50 Grade a set from points with known elevations set
 GC51 Intersection design road
 GC52 Change group of selected objects group
 GC53 Modify, list or highlight non-​contourable points dtm
 GC54 Transform ellipsoidal height points to geoidal heights points transform
 GC55 Modify elevations by grade between two sets point
 GC55HAL Modify elevations by grade between two sets perpendicular to HAL point
 GC56 Swap in X, Y or Z or mirror in X or Y transform
 GC57 Create points from cross sections road
 GC58 Remove duplicate sets, plines and text from a layer or layers set | pline | text
 GC58S Remove duplicate sets, plines and text from selected objects set | pline | text
 GC59 Quality Assurance report from Geodimeter as-built survey report
 GC60 Radial setout report report
 GC61 Create a point at a distance between two points point
 GC62 Replaced by ELFS alignment
 GC63 Intersect batter defined by two sets with DTM road
 GC64 Intersect two slopes each defined by two sets road
 GC64BIT Fix initialisation to suit 64-bit or 32-bit Windows config
 GC65 Create point at chainage, offset and elevation along alignment alignment
 GC65FILE Import points by chainage, offset and elevation alignment
 GC66 Create breaklines at changes of grade, valleys or ridges set
 GC67 Move points onto perpendicular Xlines alignment
 GC67A Move points onto skewed Xlines alignment
 GC68 Replaced by GCDIVIDE point | set
 GC682SET Add points into sets with connecting breaklines set
 GC69 Change zero elevations to no elevation point
 GC70 Combine elevation of point and DTM dtm
 GC71 Solid hatch along lines hatch
 GC72 Report satellite horizon curtain report
 GC73 Interpolate elevation from VAL alignment
 GC74 Set the start chainage of multiple sets or plines alignment
 GC75 Report distance and slope between sets or plines report
 GC76 Report on Geodimeter job file report
 GC77 Change elevation of text to match elevation of subject text
 GC78 Replaced by GCCHRLIN profile
 GC79 Renumber points to match their point names point
 GC80 Report and compare areas of lots report | set
 GC81 Report horizontal alignment report
 GC82 Report DTM areas dtm | report
 GC83 Select objects less than or greater than specified length config
 GC84 Join consecutive plines or sets pline
 GC85 Replaced by CLEANUP set
 GC86 Move objects relative to alignment or point alignment | point | transform
 GC87 Create an elevation DTM from another elevation DTM and a difference DTM alignment
 GC88 Clip or extend a pline to a defined length pline
 GC89 Create a DTM at points offset from another DTM dtm
 GC90 Extend DTM to point dtm
 GC91 Extend DTM by distance dtm
 GC92 Report or move duplicate points dtm
 GC93 Mirror or rotate point label point label
 GC94 Report crossfall between two sets report
 GC95 Delete segments greater than a nominated length set
 GC96 Select points between two DTM layers dtm
 GC99 Create parallel strings at offsets from alignment set
 GC100 Report thickness between two DTMs report
 GCACTIVE Select active alignment from registered alignments alignment
 GCADDBLK Insert blocks graphically and interpolate elevations block
 GCADDLAY Prefix name with first 4 characters from layer name name
 GCADJANT Adjust points for a non-vertical antenna survey
 GCADJDES Adjust points for new vertical or slope alignment alignment
 GCANG Report and label angle-right between points text
 GCALONG Orient text to along a set or pline text
 GCARC Create arc pline or set by three parameters set
 GCARCARC Replaced by DDIST point
 GCARCBL Create off breaklines along all arcs on a layer dtm | set
 GCAREAS Report areas, lengths or volumes of plines by layer list report | pline
 GCBADEAT Delete or select text containing Bad Rec EAT codes text
 GCBENCH Create a bench set set
 GCBLKFIX Modify colours of block definitions block
 GCBLKPTS Create points at the insertion points of blocks block
 GCBOUND Match extents of boundaries dtm
 GCCHORD Create chords from arcs, spirals and plines set | pline
 GCCHRLIN Import a profile from a file of chainage and elevation profile
 GCCL Create PPS Tunnelling System CL file tunnel
 GCCLIP Create new DTM surfaces clipped to boundaries dtm
 GCCOLCON Modify colours of positive, zero, and negative contours pline
 GCCONCHK Modify elevations of 2D points in contours Point | set
 GCCONIN Import contours from Geocomp .CON file import
 GCCONOUT Export contours to Geocomp .CON file export
 GCCONSIM Export contours to simulator .TXT file export
 GCCONTXT Modify elevations of labelled contours pline
 GCCONVRT Convert plines to sets or sets to plines set | pline
 GCCOORD Convert between coordinate systems in Australia and New Zealand transform
 GCCOPY Copy objects onto a layer point | set | pline | block | text
 GCCSVIN Import ASCII coordinate files import
 GCDAMVOL Compute dam volumes with increments dtm
 GCDCOUT Export alignments to Trimble DC files alignment
 GCDELSET Delete sets and points in sets set
 GCDEMIN Replaced by GCESRIIN import
 GCDESC Replaced by F11 toggle
 GCDESCRL Replaced by F11 toggle
 GCDIM Label dimensions text
 GCDIMLOT Label lots with dimension text text
 GCDIVIDE Create points at minimum spacing along sets point | set
 GCDRAPE Create sets where selected plines cross DTM links dtm | set
 GCDREDGE Compute dredge volumes between boundaries dtm
 GCDTM Relayer objects into a DTM layer using a .dtp file dtm
 GCDTMALL Create arc breaklines, relink all DTM layers and refresh dtm
 GCDTMBDY Create boundaries from multiple DTMs dtm
 GCDTMDIF Report elevation differences between three DTMs at cursor dtm
 GCDTMEDG Remove triangles on a DTM edge dtm | set
 GCDTMGDE Create slope alignments from a DTM alignment
 GCDTMIN Import a Geocomp .DTM file import
 GCDTMOUT Export a layer as a Geocomp .DTM file export
 GCEARTH Roadway volume report in columns report
 GCEDT12A Edit 12DA model attributes attribute
 GCEDTABL Replaced by FYATBEDIT attribute
 GCEDTATB Replaced by FYATBEDIT attribute
 GCELEV Modify the elevation of selected objects elevation
 GCESRIIN Import ESRI ArcInfo ARC DEM grid files import
 GCEXTEND Extend or trim multiple sets or plines set | pline
 GCEXPLOD Explode blocks and text block, text
 GCEZGIN Import .EZIGRADE RTK Survey file import
 GCEZGOUT Export .EZIGRADE or .AGD Survey file export
 GCFALL Create paths flowing from locations on a DTM dtm | pline | hydrology
 GCFILLET Insert or expand arcs along sets and plines pline | set | arc
 GCFILTER Filter excess points from straights and arcs in sets set
 GCFIXXML Fix .XML files with long lines import
 GCFOLLOW Create a set that follows segments or links set | dtm
 GCGENGRD Create points on a grid pattern points
 GCGEOIN Import Leica .GEO coordinate file import
 GCGPXIN Import GPS data in .GPX format import
 GCGRDVOL Compute cut and fill volumes for regions in a grid or between Xlines report
 GCGSIOUT Export alignment in Leica RoadPlus GSI format export
 GCGT7IN Import alignment in Topcon Civilcad GT7|GTS format import
 GCGTSOUT Export alignment in Topcon Civilcad GC7|GTS format export
 GCHALADJ Adjust registered hal to use offsets alignment
 GCHALDEL Delete selected registered HALs alignment
 GCHALEDT Edit a registered horizontal alignment graphically alignment
 GCHALIN Import Geocomp Horizontal Alignment import
 GCHALOFF Create a pline from a registered HAL with offsets alignment
 GCHALOUT Export Geocomp Horizontal Alignment export
 GCHAULMN Add Masshaul Import and Export materials from a CSV file masshaul
 GCHELP Report key, version and path configuration help
 GCID Locate objects display | report
 GCIDCHN Display chainage and offset at cursor alignment | display
 GCIMPORT Import Geocomp data import
 GCIN2SET Insert points into sets set
 GCINCPT Create points with incrementing by point numbers point
 GCINCTXT Create number or letter text incrementing by multiples text
 GCINSBLK Replace circles with tree blocks block
 GCINSIDE Report areas and subtract internal areas report
 GCIRBOOM Design ramps for pivot irrigation pivot irrigation
 GCIRDESN Merge pivot irrigation ramps into DTM pivot irrigation
 GCIRINFO Check pivot irrigation boom pivot irrigation
 GCIRPROF Create pivot irrigation profile pivot irrigation
 GCJOINMP Join points with gaps survey
 GCJOINPT Join points based on feature-coded name survey
 GCKMLIN Import placemarks and paths from Google Earth (KML or KMZ) import
 GCKMLOUT Export to Google Earth, NearMap or Web Map Service export
 GCLABGRD Label and draw grids inside polygons draft
 GCLABIP Label intersection points text
 GCLABLOT Label closed sets with lot area and lot number text text
 GCLABPEG Label pipeline with peg labels pipe general
 GCLABPNT Label multiple points with EAT text, leaderline and border text
 GCLASIN Import lidar points from .LAS or .LAZ files import
 GCLAYCOL Relayer and recolour objects using name layer | colour
 GCLFAOUT Export linear features for Trimble Alignment Planning Export
 GCLINPTS List points with invalid coordinates point
 GCLLGRID Draw latitude and longitude grid pline | hdms
 GCLNGIN Import Geocomp long section import
 GCLOTCNR Label lot corners with two elevations or differences text
 GCLPOINTS Replaced by GCLPTS report
 GCLPTS List the coordinates of selected points report
 GCMAGNET Assign point properties by text from Topcon Magnet Field text | point | survey
 GCMAPIN Import a contour .MAP import
 GCMAPOUT Create a layer map file layer | export
 GCMARKER Display temporary vertex markers on plines pline
 GCMATCH Close gaps in contours pline
 GCMATIN Import road materials road
 GCMATOUT Export road materials road
 GCMERGE Merge multiple regions or DTMs dtm
 GCMFI Import multiple ASCII PTS or CSV files import
 GCMOSSIN Replaced by MOSSIN and MOSSTRI import
 GCMOSSOU Replaced by MOSSOUT export
 GCMULCON Assign contour elevations to multiple plines pline
 GCMULTDC Export multiple alignments to a Trimble DC file alignment
 GCMULTGD Export multiple alignments to Geodimeter .RLN files alignment
 GCMULVOL Compute volumes between pairs of dtm surfaces dtm
 GCMULXML Export multiple alignments to Leica 1200 LandXML files alignment
 GCNAME Rename objects to match an object name
 GCNAMEPT Name points sequentially along a set name
 GCNEARLN Select points near multiple selected sets or plines set | pline | point
 GCNEDIN Import Trimble Alignment Planning Grid (NED) files import
 GCNMEAIN Import NMEA strings from GPS receivers import
 GCNOELEV Select objects with no elevations (2D) point | pline | text
 GCOBJIN Import data from Wavefront .OBJ files import
 GCOBJOUT Export data to Wavefront .OBJ files export
 GCOFFELV Create plines or sets offset from a set sets
 GCOFLINE Select points of multiple selected sets set
 GCONECON Modify the elevation of a contour pline pline
 GCOUT Export data to Geocomp SDS (.PTS & .STR) export
 GCP39 Replaced by GCRLNOUT export
 GCPAD Place building pads at nominated height within a lot set
 GCPAN Pan by numeric keypad with 8 = north plot
 GCPANEL Create concrete roadway batter panel set out points roadway
 GCPAVSET Create a PaveSet paving machine setout file export
 GCPILE Create pile points using HAL & VAL alignment
 GCPLDICE Replaced by GC71 hatch
 GCPLFIN Import HP-GL/2 (.PLF, .HPG, .GL2, .PLT, .000) plot file import
 GCPLTIN Import Geocomp .PLT plot file import
 GCPRFEDT Edit profile IPs graphically profile
 GCPROFIL Create profiles from multiple HALs and DTMs profile
 GCPTAIN Import TPSetout|​TPStakeout .PTA points import
 GCPTDIST Check minimum distances between points on sets report
 GCPTRLDS Replaced by F11 toggle
 GCPTSIN Import point data from an ASCII file import
 GCPTSOUT Export points to various ASCII formats export
 GCPTSTXT Change elevation or name of points by nearest text point
 GCPURGE Purge all unused blocks block
 GCQA Report chainage, offset and elevation difference to DTM report
 GCQP Interactive quick profile or cross section profile | section
 GCQV Move an IP and recompute roadway volume report
 GCREDRAW Redraw all views and reset view scale for point labels view
 GCRELAY Replaced by GCCOPY layer
 GCREPORT Open P3Pad report editor report
 GCRENUM Renumber points in set order point
 GCREVIEW Move or copy objects from one view to another view
 GCRIVER Interpolate elevations onto a digitised river set
 GCRLNOUT Export Geodimeter Roadline alignments from strings export
 GCROTATE Rotate objects by angle or deflection. transform
 GCRUNWAY Report runway conformance export
 GCSCALE Multiply X, Y or Z by scale factors transform
 GCSCANIN Import lidar scan data and filter by many variables import
 GCSPOT Report the DTM elevation at the cursor report | dtm
 GCSDROUT Export Sokkia SDR alignment files export
 GCSKIPMN Replace skip ranges by CSV or pline boxes alignment
 GCSPELL Check spelling text
 GCSTLOUT Export DTMs to surface models in .STL format export | dtm
 GCSTRATA Create points at strata from table of depths dtm
 GCSTYLE Modify text by text style text
 GCSUBDTM Create a subgrade DTM from depth boundaries DTM
 GCSUBGDE Create plines to transition subgrade templates alignment
 GCSURFAR Replaced by XSURAREA report
 GCSZAOUT Export special zones for Trimble Alignment Planning export
 GCTABLE Create a coordinate table text
 GCTADPOL Label batter with block showing direction of slope block
 GCTMAIN Import Trimble Alignment Planning .DTM import
 GCTMAOUT Export Quantm DTM for Trimble Alignment Planning export
 GCTFWIN Locate TIF images by world files (.TFW) import | image
 GCTRACE Define regions by tracing inside plines or sets set | pline | hatch | report
 GCTSP Replaced by TMCUSTOM config
 GCTSTYLE Set the default text style at the command line text
 GCTTAOUT Export a set to Trimble .tta and .ttx export
 GCTURN Create the swept path of a vehicle road
 GCTXTFIT Adjust text aspect to align on right text
 GCTXTOUT Export or report text text
 GCUMC3D Export to Leica Universal Machine Control 3D export
 GCUNJOIN Break sets and plines into segments set
 GCUPDATE See UPDATE config
 GCUPJ See UPDATE config
 GCUPK See UPDATE config
 GCUPL See UPDATE config
 GCUPM See UPDATE config
 GCVALDEL Delete selected registered VALs alignment
 GCVALEDT Replaced by GCPRFEDT profile
 GCVALOFF Create a pline from a registered VAL with offsets profile
 GCVERIN Import Geocomp vertical alignment import | profile
 GCVEROUT Export Geocomp vertical alignment export | profile
 GCWRAP Change tunnel wrap status of a layer tunnel | dtm
 GCXLINES Create or replace labelled xlines for a roadway road
 GCXMLIN Import LandXML points and parcels import
 GCXMLOUT Export roadway strings to LandXML road
 GCXTIE Create a set at the intersection of slopes from two segments set
 GDACONV Replaced by GCCOORD transform
 GDMDIR List Geodimeter directory and delete files survey
 GEN2DN Replaced by P29 survey
 GEN2DO Replaced by P29 survey
 GEN2DP Replaced by P29 survey
 GEOCALC Transform ASCII coordinate files transform
 GEOCPAL Replaced by EDITINI config | hdms
 GEOMINQ Measure bearing, distance and vertical angle report
 GEOMRPTS Report Bearings and Distances report
 GEONAV Replaced by HDMS hdms
 GEOSYS Establish GPS geodetic system config
 GFE Geodimeter file editor survey
 GM1 Raise low points where slopes are steep point
 GNCSTEXP Export GeoNav detail hdms
 GNCSTIMP Import GeoNav detail hdms
 GNDWEED Replaced by HDMSDW hdms
 GNHLAB Replaced by HDMSLAB hdms
 GNIMPORT Import GeoNav .GPT file hdms
 GNSETUP Replaced by EDITINI hdms
 GOLFAREA Report golf course areas report
 GPSSYS Replaced by GEOSYS config
 GPXOUT Export Topografix GPX points for GPS export
 GRADESMT Export files to Leica GradeSmart 3D Machine Control for graders export
 GRDPTS Replaced by GRIDEXPT dtm | export
 GRIDELEV Create a grid of points and interpolates elevations dtm
 GRIDEXPT Export a grid of points interpolated from a DTM export
 GRIDMAKE Create points or plines using grid settings point
 GRIDPLAN Transform from grid to ground or ground to grid transform
 GRIDSET Set the current grid settings config
 GRIDVOL Replaced by GCGRDVOL dtm | report
 GRP2NAME Change the name of each object to match its group group
 GSIDTMOU Export a layer in Leica DTM Stakeout GSI format export
 GSSWP Geocomp Systems Support web page report
 GST Geodimeter Software Tools survey
 GT3PT Replaced by GFE survey
 GTACT Replaced by IMPORT survey
 GTAF Replaced by GFE survey
 GTAP Replaced by GFE survey
 GTCOMM Replaced by GMDIR survey
 GTCONV Replaced by GFE survey
 GTDIR Replaced by GDMDIR survey
 GTDXF Replaced by EXPORT survey
 GTFACT Replaced by RDE survey
 GTFD Replaced by IMPORT survey
 GT​File​Editor Replaced by GFE survey
 GTFL Replaced by EXPORT survey
 GTJR Replaced by JOB2AGA survey
 GTL1C Replaced by IMPORT survey
 GTL2 Replaced by IMPORT survey
 GTL1D Replaced by IMPORT survey
 GTLS Replaced by AUTODRAFT survey
 GTNR Replaced by GFE survey
 GTPCF Replaced by GFE survey
 GTPTA Replaced by GFE survey
 GTPS Replaced by GFE survey
 GTREC Replaced by IMPORT survey
 GTRN Replaced by GFE survey
 GTRPTS Replaced by GFE survey
 GTRT Replaced by PTS2TRV survey
 GTRXYZ Replaced by GFE survey
 GTSEND Replaced by EXPORT survey
 GTUDS Replaced by GFE survey
 GTXFER Replaced by EXPORT export
 HALDATA Create horizontal alignment by table entry alignment
 HAL​MANAGER Register horizontal alignments alignment
 HALVALRP Report horizontal and vertical alignments report
 HALXYZ Create a set by three offsets set
 HAREAB Conpute the area of a basin hydrology
 HATCH Hatch regions enclosed by boundaries hatch
 HATCHENC Replaced by GCTRACE hatch
 HATCH_IT Replaced by GCTRACE hatch
 HATCH​PAT Hatch regions with a selected hatch pattern hatch
 HATCH​USER Hatch regions with a user-​defined pattern hatch
 HBLIST List basin hydrograph hydrology
 HCCN Calculate coefficients and curve numbers for a basin hydrology
 HCOVER Hydrology cover sheet hydrology
 HDEFS Hydrology default settings hydrology
 HDMS Hydrographic Data Management System hdms
 HDMSABT About HDMS hdms
 HDMSBIN HDMS data binning hdms
 HDMSCOL HDMS colour by depth hdms
 HDMSCSL Compare sounding lines hdms
 HDMS​DCL​BLK Create hatching coloured by depth hdms
 HDMSDLAB Label depths hdms
 HDMSDW Label and clash depths hdms
 HDMSEVT Label survey events hdms
 HDMSNWSE Smooth a DTM surface hdms
 HDMSRLAB Label hydrographic runlines hdms
 HDMSRTR Round truncate or restore depths hdms
 HDMSTC Adjust sounding time hdms
 HDMSTLAB Label trackplots hdms
 HDRAW Draw hydrographs hydrology
 HEATMAP Show elevation differences with colours block | dtm | report
 HECIN Import a HEC-RAS Geometry file import
 HECOUT Replaced by HECOUTGC export
 HECOUTGC Export a HEC-RAS Geometry file export
 HECX Replaced by HECOUTGC export
 HELP See CONTENTS help
 HELP​GEO​CALC Help for GeoCalc help
 HELPGFE Help for Geodimeter file editor help
 HELPIE Help for Import-Export help
 HELPRDE Help for Raw data editor help
 HELPTM Help for Terramodel help
 HELPTOOLBOX Help for Toolbox help
 HELPTV Help for Visualizer help
 HELPTVL Help for 3D Visualizer help
 HGNIMP Import GeoNav .GPT file hdms
 HGEN Compute Basin hydrographs hydrology
 HIDE Hide or reveal a set segment toggle
 HILO Replaced by DTMSTATS report
 HLIST List hydrographs hydrology
 HNAVEDIT HYDROpro NavEdit hdms
 HORIZ​ALIGN Register one horizontal alignment road
 HRLIST List reach hydrograph hydrology
 HROUT Route hydrographs through a pond hydrology
 HROUTR Route hydrographs through a reach hydrology
 HYDROIMP Import HYDROpro .HPT depths hdms
 ID Identify object report
 IDANGLE Report the angle between two bearings or or three locations report
 IDCHAINAGE See IDSTATION alignment
 ID​STATION Identify station | chainage and offset alignment
 IGRP Display only objects in the same group group | display
 ILINE Create points at intersections of selected lines point
 ILL Make layer list visible drafting tools
 IMAGE Image manager image
 IMAGEPTH Change image file locations for Image manager image
 IMANAGER Island manager alignment
 IMPORT Download or import survey data using a script import
 IMPORTGC Import Geocomp .CES cross sections import
 IMPORT​SMGR Download and import script manager import
 IMPORTXS Import various cross section formats into a roadway import
 INCHOFRL Replaced by GC65FILE import
 INCRTEXT Create text incrementing by one text
 INSALT Import GeoNav Salt Harvester log files import
 INSERTZ Insert elevations from text into sets drafting tools
 INSET Report which sets use each point drafting tools
 INT3DSET Create sets with elevations interpolated from known points set
 INTCON Interpolate between contours data prep
 INTERP3D Update elevations interpolated using INT3DSET point
 INTOSET Insert points into a set set
 INVERSE Replaced by GEOMINQ report
 INVRPTS Replaced by GEOMRPTS report
 IRBAY Design flood irrigation bays flood irrigation
 IRBENT Enter irrigation bay grid point elevations flood irrigation
 IRBGRID Generate a grid of irrigation bay points flood irrigation
 IRBTAB Create an irrigation bay design results table flood irrigation
 IRCDTAB Report drain or channel grades and widths flood irrigation
 IRCHFLO Compute parameters for trapezoidal channel flow flood irrigation
 IRDTMS Generate a single DTM from multiple irrigation bays flood irrigation
 IRHAUL Compute truck haul distance for an irrigation bay design flood irrigation
 IRPUTAT Set or edit irrigation bay text attributes flood irrigation
 IRSTRUC Generate irrigation bay tables and reports flood irrigation
 IRSUMTX Recalculate totals in irrigation bay results table flood irrigation
 ISCLOSED Select closed or open sets or plines set | pline
 ISLAND Traffic island template editor alignment
 ITXT Replaced by INCRTEXT text
 JOB2AGA Convert a Geodimeter job file to Geodimeter raw data file survey
 JOBOUT Reverse-engineer Geodimeter .job data from points report
 JOIN Join plines or sets with common ends set
 JOINPL Close gaps in contours and join data prep
 JOINTEXT Join pairs of text objects together text
 KEAYSIN Import data from Keays import
 KEAYSOUT Export data to Keays TR1 export
 KORKDTM Export DTM layer to Kork format export
 LABBENDS Suffix point names with deflection angles set | point
 LABELANG Label the angle-right at each point of a set text
 LABELARC Label segment with radius as text along text
 LABELCH Label chainage using text leader lines text
 LABEL​CONTOURS Label contour plines with text text
 LABEL​GRID Label a closed pline with coordinates text
 LABELHAL Label horizontal alignment intersection points alignment
 LABELINE Label alignments with names in plotboxes alignment
 LABELLOT Change lot area labels to show alternative area set | text
 LABELOFF Label points with offset text point | text
 LABELPI Label Intersection Point Chainage alignment
 LABEL​POINT Label points with point labels and symbols point label
 LABEL​ROAD​HAL Label a registered horizontal alignment alignment
 LABEL​ROAD​VAL Label a registered vertical alignment alignment
 LABELSEG Label sets with bearings and distances text
 LABELSETS Label sets with lot numbers and areas text
 LABELSTA Label station using text leader lines text
 LABEL​TABLE Create table of dimensions of short set segments table
 LABELVAL Label a vertical alignment alignment
 LABGRADE Label the grade or distance between points text
 LABPT Label points with EAT text text
 LABPTQ Label points with number, elevation or name text
 LANDFILL Create a surface of troughs sets
 LAY2NAME Change the name of each object to match its layer layer
 LAYER Select or create the current layer from a toolbar layer
 LAYERCSV Replaced by LAYERNEW layer
 LAYERMAP Rename layers and update colours and linetypes layer | colour | linetype
 LAYERNEW Create a new layer layer
 LAYERNXT Change the current layer to the next layer in alphabetical order layer
 LAYERSET Create and edit layers and their visibility and selectability layer
 LAYERVIS Set the visibility of layers layer
 LAYINFO List summary information by layer about selected points layer | report
 LAYLIST Organize layer multiple lists data prep
 LAYLSET Make only layers in selected objects or layerlist visible or invisible layer
 LAYOUT Create parallel road sets for subdivisions sets
 LAYOUT3D Create 3D sets from plans data prep
 LAYUSTN Relayer and colour objects for MicroStation 7 export layer
 LBLANG Replaced by LABELANG text
 LC Report coordinates point
 LCN Modify layer, colour and name data prep
 LEVEL3W Add or edit three-​wire level (stadia) loop survey
 LEVELLST Report level loop points report
 LEVELS Add or edit single-wire level loop survey
 LFILL Replaced by LANDFILL sets
 LIDARGRD Import gridded ASCII lidar data import
 LIDARIN Import lidar ASCII data import
 LINEINT Evenly space points where X and Y is wrong hdms
 LINETYPE Modify the linetypes of selected sets and plines plot
 LINETYPE​SET Load or purge linetype definitions plot
 Linetype​Toggle Toggle on or off the linetype selector on the toolbar display
 LINETYPS Draw all loaded linetypes in the sheet view plot
 LINEZERO Modify linetype to By Layer linetype
 LINKSET Configure DTM links dtm
 Link​Toggle Toggle on and off DTM link display dtm
 LIST List information about selected types of objects report
 LISTARCS List plines and sets and their curves pline | set
 LISTFONT List and create a table of available fonts text
 LISTGRP List groups used by selected objects group
 LISTLOTS List geometry of lots report
 LISTPIPE List as-constructed pipe data pipe general
 LISTREF List reference files file | report
 LISTTEXT List text objects report
 LLAYER Report the number of objects on each layer layer
 LLGRID Replaced by GCLLGRID pline, hdms
 LLIST Modify the layer list of multiple dynaviews dynaview
 LLISTSET Layer list settings dynaview
 LLOTS Create a table showing block, lot, area and % area of lots plot
 LLRPT Layer and layer list report layer
 LLTABLE Create a linked coordinate table including latitude and longitude report
 LLTYPE Change the linetype of the current layer layer
 LOADATT Load or reload the specified attribute definition file attribute
 LOBJCOLOR Change the line colour of the current layer layer
 LOBJS List objects and details report
 LOTJOIN Create closed sets inside lines around text set
 LOTPTRLS Replaced by GCLOTCNR text
 LPI Replaced by LABELPI alignment
 LPLINES List alignment details of a pline report
 LPOINTS List the coordinates of selected points report
 LPTCOLOR Change the points colour of the current layer layer
 LPTSRAD List coordinates and radiations report
 LSEC1 Label long sections in Geocomp-style plot
 LSECUK Label long sections in United Kingdom-​style plot
 LSETS List names and point numbers of sets report
 LSTA Replaced by LABELSTA text
 LUNUSED List the unused point numbers report
 LVC Label one vertical curve alignment
 LYR Replaced by QUIKLSET layer
 LYRPFIX Add or delete layer name prefix drafting tools
 Macro​Play Play a macro command
 Macro​Record Record a keystroke macro command
 MACRO​SAVE See MACRORECORD command
 MAG600IN Import Magellan Explorist 600 GPS UPT file import
 MAGELLIN Import Magellan GPS UPT file import
 MAGELOUT Export Magellan GPS Waypoint UPT file export
 MAGNIFY Magnify view scale by a factor view
 MAPIIN Import MapInfo MIF data import
 MAPINFO​IN Replaced by MAPIIN import
 MAPINFO​OUT Replaced by MAPIOUT export
 MAPIOUT Export MapInfo MIF data export
 MAPPOINTS Create sets and plines from point names survey
 MASSDIAG Scale an exploded masshaul diagram masshaul
 MASSHAUL Create a masshaul diagram masshaul
 MASS​IMPORT Masshaul import and export locations masshaul
 MATCH Modify objects by matching properties of another object config
 MATCHOBJ Modify objects by matching properties of another object config
 MATERIALS Material manager road
 MATRIX Create a matrix of copied objects copy
 MDLIN Import MDL autoscanning laser system *.CDU data import
 MEASUNIT Configure measurement units config
 MENUCFG Configure the menus config
 MERGE Merge DTMs dtm
 Message​Scroll Toggle the visibility of the message scroll display
 MG1 Label and report slopes at triangle centroids point | report
 MHIMPORT Add a volume report for masshaul analysis masshaul
 MICROSS Install Microsoft Sans Serif Windows font config
 MINMAPIN Import a MineMap file import
 MIRROR Copy objects to a mirror image pline, set
 MIRRORDY Mirror dynaviews view
 MKBLK Create a 1, 2, or 3 point unit block block
 MKBLKINT Convert selected external blocks to internal blocks block
 MKV Display temporary vertex markers mark
 MOSSEXPT Replaced by MOSSOUT export
 MOSSIN Import Survey, Design and Triangles from Moss GENIO data import
 MOSSMIN Create a .MIN file from Moss GENIO features import
 MOSSOUT Export Moss GENIO data export
 MOSSTRI Import Moss GENIO triangle data import
 MOSSX Replaced by MOSSOUT export
 MOVE Move objects to another location move | transform
 MOVEPAD Move a pad DTM and report volumes dtm | report
 MSCAPEIN Import Mincom Minescape grid data import
 MTL Move text leader line text
 MULTCODE Insert multiple-code separators into names before field codes survey
 MULTICOPY Create multiple copies of selected objects copy
 Multilayer​DTM Create a DTM from multiple layers dtm
 MULTIOFF Create set, pline or segment at repeated offsets pline | set
 MULTIPIN Import MultiPlane RTK Survey or FieldLevel XML file import
 MVIEW Create multiple dynaviews view
 MXVALIN Import VAL from MX report import
 NAME Modify the names of selected objects name
 NAME2LAY Change layer to match object name layer
 NAMECASE Change the case of names name
 NAMELOTS Name lots by text name
 NAMEPTS Rename points in sets to match set names set | point
 NAMERP Name radius points drafting tools
 NAMESETS Rename unnamed sets to match point names set | point
 NAVEDIT HYDROpro NavEdit hdms
 NEW Start a new project file
 NEXTVIEW Change the current view to the next open view view
 NFS Replaced by GC02 name
 NODE Pipe node properties pipe design
 NPSCHART Draw a table of details of set or pline plot
 NS95 Nikon NS-95 Database Utility survey
 NSWSCIMS Import NSW SCIMS points survey
 NZGEOID Import NZGeoid .SID file import | transform
 OBJREG Group object to Dynaview or Sheet for ASAP asap
 OBJSNAP Enable running snap modes config
 OBSDIFF Report vertical differences between obstructions report
 OFF Turn off selected objects view
 OFFALL Turn off all objects in the current view view
 OFFELEV Create plines or sets offset from a set set
 OFFELEVM Create plines or sets offset from multiple sets set
 OFFMULT Create set offset from previous set drafting tools
 OFFPERP Create set at vertical perpendicular offset from a set set | tunnel
 OFFSEG Create pline or set at a horizontal offset from a segment set
 OFFSET​DIST Create pline or set at a horizontal offset set
 OFFSET​POINT Create pline or set at a horizontal offset and location set
 OFLINES Select points or radius points on selected sets data prep
 OLIST Replaced by COUNT report
 OLIST2 Count the number of objects of each type to P3Pad report
 ON Turn on selected objects view
 ONALL Turn on all objects in selected views view
 ONGRP Turn on all objects in a group plot
 OPEN Open an existing project file
 ORDER​FORM Email a report of the dongle help
 ORDER​PRINT Print a report of the dongle help
 OVALITY Create circle from average radius pline
 OVER​HANG Make non-contourable points under overhangs dtm
 OVER​WALL Create cross sections from points along Xlines plot
 P29 Roadline 2D export to Geodimeter export
 P39 Geodimeter Roadline 3D file export
 P3PAD See GCREPORT report
 PAD Create a rectangular set at an elevation set
 PAD2DTM Create DTM from lot lines and text data prep
 PADDOWN Lower all points in a pad by an increment set
 PADSHIFT Set the shift value used by PADDOWN and PADUP set
 PADUP Raise all points in a pad by an increment set
 PALETTE Select the palette and colourmap config
 PAN Move the view to a new location view
 PARABOLA Create a parabola set
 PARKING Create parking bays set
 PCHAINAGE See PSTATION Point
 PCOPY Copy from a reference project file
 PENZDIN An alias for an IMPORT script to import ASCII files file
 PENZDOUT An alias for an EXPORT script to export ASCII files file
 PHASE Phase editor road
 PHASEMAN Phase manager road
 PHASE​NAME Edit phase names road
 PHOTOCSV Import photo coordinates import
 PINSET Insert point at intersection of two lines point
 PIPE Pipe properties pipe design
 PIPEAIN Import pipe survey attributes pipe survey
 PIPEBREK Break pipe segment with Asset_ID pipe survey
 PIPEBYCR Edit pipe and node elevations pipe design
 PIPECALQ Compute pipe flow rate pipe design
 PIPECHRT Create a pipe chart pipe design
 PIPEDALL Draw all pipes pipe design
 PIPEDEF Edit default pipe and node settings pipe design
 PIPEDELS Delete pipe segment with Asset_ID pipe survey
 PIPEDRAW Draw a pipe branch pipe design
 PIPEDSGN Design pipe branch pipe design
 PIPEDUMP List pipe attributes pipe design
 PIPEINFO Report pipe dimensions and cover pipe general
 PIPELBR List pipe branches pipe design
 PIPEJOIN Join pipes with Asset_ID pipe survey
 PIPELBR List pipe branches pipe design
 PIPELL Pipe and node label settings pipe design
 PIPEMAXV List large velocity pipes pipe design
 PIPEMINV List small velocity pipes pipe design
 PIPEOBST Label pipes at obstructions pipe general
 PIPEQ Enter the flow rate for a pipe pipe design
 PIPEREPT Report pipe attributes on selected sets pipe survey
 PIPERSLT Report results for pipe or node pipe design
 PIPESCLQ Scale pipe flow rate pipe design
 PIPESOLV Solve the pipe branch design pipe design
 PIPESUM Pipe summary report pipe design
 PIPESWAP Swap pipe Asset_ID attribute with String_No pipe survey
 PIPEV Modify pipe velocities pipe design
 PIPEWSP List pipe water surface profile pipe design
 PIPEWELD Create points at pipe welds pipe survey
 PIPEXING Draw pipes crossing the alignment pipe design
 PLAN2DBX Export sets to Leica 1200 series DBX database export
 PLANPROF Display the plan and profile views display | view
 PLANSET Plan settings for Automatic Sheet Assembly and Production asap
 PLANSHEET Display the plan and sheet views display | view
 PLATFORM Balance cut and fill volumes of multiple layers dtm
 PLAY Replaced by PTLAYCOL layer | colour
 PLINE Create a pline pline
 PLINFILT Filter excess vertices from straights in plines pline
 PLNNONAM Display only plines with no names pline | display
 PLOT Plot a plan to a printer plot
 PLOTBOX Create a pline box using sheet units plot | pline
 PLOTSET Plot parameter settings plot | smooth
 PLOTTER​SET Plotter configuration settings plot
 PLTO3D Modify elevation of single contour pline pline
 PNEZDIN An alias for an IMPORT script to import ASCII files file
 PNEZDOUT An alias for an EXPORT script to export ASCII files file
 POINT Create a point point
 POINTSET Configure point numbering point
 POLY Replaced by POLYGON set
 POLYGON Create n-sided polygon set
 PONDDEF Define pond outlet devices hydrology
 PONDLIST List pond data hydrology
 PONDOUT Define pond outlet devices hydrology
 PONDSUM Pond summary report hydrology
 PONDVOL Enter pond volume hydrology
 PORTSC1 List points showing heights as depths hdms
 POWERGDE Export to Leica PowerGrade 3D export
 PPS Display the Plan, Profile and Sheet views display | view
 PPSX Display the Plan, Profile, Super and Xsect views display | view
 PPX Display the Plan, Profile and Xsect views display | view
 PPXS Display the Plan, Profile Xsect and Super views display | view
 PREDAREA Divide a closed set into lots by area set
 PREVIOUS Display the previous view view
 PRJCLNT ASAP Project Data Management - Client plot
 PRJINFO ASAP Project Data Management - General Information plot
 PRJLOC ASAP Project Data Management - Location plot
 PRJLTEXT ASAP Project Data Management - Link text to data plot
 PRJSTAFF ASAP Project Data Management - Staff plot
 PRODUCTS Report the serial number and modules help
 PROFILE Create profile alignment
 PROJDATA ASAP Project Data Management - Data plot
 PROJECTV List and edit all project variables config
 PROJINFO Enter and report user information about a project file config
 PROJVARS Enter and report survey information about a project file config
 PSBOX Edit PLANSET plot boxes asap
 PSINDEX Plan Set index asap
 PSMAN Plan Set Manager asap
 PSSET Configure Plan Set settings asap
 PSSHEET Plan Set sheet assembly asap
 PSTATION Create survey points perpendicular to a HAL point
 PSTYPE Plan Set sheet type asap
 PTBLKS Create points at the insertion point of 3D blocks point
 PTCASE Change the case of alpha point numbers point
 PTDRAIN Create a catchment boundary around a point hydrology
 PTJOIN Join points by sequential point number sets
 PTLAB Edit point label blocks block
 PTLAYCOL Relayer and recolour points using name layer | colour
 PTS2ADC Create points for testing AutoDraft point | survey | config
 PTS2BDY Create a boundary around points point | set | pline
 PTS2NAME Rename points to match their point numbers point
 PTS2PROF Copy points to profile view alignment
 PTS2TEXT Export a coordinate list export
 PTS2TRV Export a .TRV file from the selected points export
 PTSIN Import point data from various ASCII file formats import
 PTSITE Modify elevation by elevation or vertical angle point
 PTSITE2 Change elevation by slope and distance point
 PTSOUT Output point data to various ASCII formats export
 PXPS Display the Plan, Xsect, Profile and Super views display | view
 QISOLATE Isolate or unisolate current layer display
 QPROFILE Display profiles or cross sections between two locations profile
 QSET Create a set by bearing and distance set
 QSGRIDIN Import Qsurv grid file import
 QSGRIDOU Export to Qsurv grid file format export
 QSURVOUT Export to Qsurv alignments and cross sections export
 QUIKLSET Quickly control the visibility of layers layer
 QUICK​PHASE Part of PHASE road
 QV Quick volumes by changing roadway HAL IP report
 RAILCANT Compute elevations by railway cant alignment
 RAILTAMS Report railway tracks at monument points alignment | report
 RAILWAY Create railway alignments with cant alignment
 RAIN List rain database hydrology
 RAINT List rainfall report totals hydrology
 RANGE Report elevation range within a boundary or along a set report
 RAWTOAREA Replaced by GFE survey
 RCLTABLE Create a table of arc properties report
 RD​DESIGN​CRIT Select road design criteria alignment
 RD​DESIGN​SET Road design settings road | config
 RDE Raw data editor survey
 RDGUIDE Road job workflow guide road
 RDSALIGN Same as RDSGPALIGN import
 RDSCACALN Import a Caice alignment import
 RDSDTMSET Road DTM settings road
 RDSECHO Report roadjob data report
 RDSGP​ALIGN Import a Geopak alignment from RDS import
 RD​VALDES​CRT Select vertical alignment design criteria alignment
 RDVALEDIT Edit a vertical alignment by design criteria alignment
 RDX Create Cross Section plots from a roadjob plot
 RDXGC Create cross section plots with labels in a table plot
 RDXLINES Create xlines on a road alignment road
 REACH Define reach parameters hydrology
 READATTB Add ATTRIB values from a Trimble DC file and add to point names survey
 REARLOTL Replace segments in a set with a single segment set
 RECENTER Pick a new location for the centre of the view view
 RECOVER​SCROLL Recover a lost coordinate scroll display
 REDO Restore the most recent changes made by Undo edit
 REDRAW Refresh the display of the current view view
 REFER Refer selected objects to a reference object alignment
 REFERENCE Same as REFER alignment
 REFERADD Add reference files file
 REFERPTH Change the path of reference files file
 REFFILE Reference file manager file
 REGALIGN Register multiple alignments alignment
 REGROUP Change groups to match layer names layer | group
 RELAYER Relayer selected objects layer
 RELAYER​SETS Replaced by GCCOPY layer
 RELAYFIG Relayer selected figures if they are closed layer
 Remove​Links Remove DTM links from a project dtm
 REMTRIS Remove triangle segments joining a square grid of points. set
 RENUM Renumber individual points point
 RENUMBER Renumber selected points point
 RENUMLOT Renumber lots by adding an increment set
 RENUMREC Renumber records to display over other records record | display
 REPORT​NEW Replaced by GCREPORT report
 REPORTLT Report bearings and distances of set segments report
 REPORTS User-defined reports report
 RESECT Solve a 3-point resection problem point
 RESONIN Import Reson ASCII depths hdms
 RETTABLE Create a table of arc properties report
 RETURNS Create a kerb return elevation table report
 REVERSE Reverse the direction of selected objects sets
 REVIEW Move objects from one view to another view
 RG Reference Guide help
 RGRAPH Create rainfall database graph hydrology
 RMGC Link points to photos and text config
 RNDCORN Round vertices of pines drafting tools
 ROADDESC Import road job descriptions from a file road | import
 ROADDTM Create a DTM from a Road cross section surface road
 ROADGRID Road design editor display grid road
 ROADJOB Road Job Manager road
 ROADLIST List road jobs road | report
 ROADMAT Road Job Materials road
 ROADPROF Create profiles from road job surfaces profile
 ROADREG Create roadjobs from registered HALs road
 ROADRPT Print a Road report report
 ROADRUN Export alignment and sets to Leica RoadRunner or iCON export
 ROADSETS String points created from road cross sections road
 ROAD​SIG​POINT Define significant points in a roadjob masshaul
 ROADSPOT Report roadway details at a location report
 ROADWAY Roadway manager road
 ROTATE Rotate objects about a location transform
 ROT3D Rotate points in 3D using 3 pairs of points transform
 RPAN Replaced by RECENTER view
 RTSCALE Rotate, translate and scale objects transform
 RUN Execute an external file config
 RUNLINE Label hydrographic runlines hdms
 SAVE Save the current project save
 SAVEAS Save the current project with another name save
 SCALE Multiply easting and northing by scale factors transform
 SCALEELV Multiply elevations by a scale factor transform
 SCALEGRID Mass haul diagram grid settings masshaul
 SCLBLKS Scale blocks by a factor block
 SCLPLOTB Scale closed plines by a factor dynaview
 SCS900IN Import Trimble SCS900 record.txt or .csv file import
 SCS900OUT Export roadway to Trimble SCS900 export
 SCURVE Create or edit a set curve set
 SEARCH Search settings config
 SECURITY​PASS Replaced by ABOUT Products config
 SEGEDIT Segment editor set
 SELECTAT Select by feature attribute value attribute
 SELECTGP Select by group number group
 SELECTPT Select points not in sets point
 SENTINEL Install Sentinel System Driver config
 SENTINEL​CLEANUP Remove all Sentinel System Drivers config
 SENTINEL​MEDIC Check Sentinel System Drivers and keys config
 SET Create a set set
 SET2BL Add points and elevations to breaklines data prep
 SET2PROF Create a profile from a set set
 SET2PRFL Create profiles representing a pipe pipe general
 SET2ROAD Create road jobs from sets alignment
 SET2TRAV Re-engineer Geodimeter .job data from sets set
 SET2TRV Export a .TRV traverse file from the selected set set
 SETAREA Draw a set enclosing two sets set
 SETCH Set the chainage | station to any location on an alignment alignment
 SETCURL Set the current layer by picking an object layer
 SETDISTS Report distances between sets at an interval report
 SETFILT Filter excess points from straights in 2D sets set
 SETGRP Set the group to the next group group
 SETLABEL Label sets with name text
 SETNONAM Display only sets with no names set | display
 SETOFF Create 3D sets at multiple offsets data prep
 SETSMOOTH Modify contour smoothness and define dead regions dtm | set
 SETSTA Set the chainage | station to any location on an alignment alignment
 SEWBC Compute sewer block controls sewer
 SFLOOR Create a DTM surface in-between two DTMs dtm
 SGRP Set the group for selected objects group
 SHADEDTM Shade DTM triangles by elevation ranges dtm
 SHADEPTS Colour points by elevation ranges dtm | point
 SHADEISO Shade two DTMs or an isopach surface by isopach ranges dtm
 SHADESLP Shade triangles by slope ranges dtm
 SHADETRI Replaced by SHADESLP dtm
 SHADOW Compute the limit of shadows survey
 SHAPE Shape Editor road
 SHAPECLASS Shape class manager road
 SHAPEMAN Shape library manager road
 SHAPESET Create sets from roadway shapes road
 SHEET2XS Relayer digitized cross sections into XSect view data prep
 SHOWDIR Show direction of pline or set report
 SHOWDIRN Show direction of pline or set and reverse report
 SHOWDYNA Show objects on dynaview layers dynaview
 SIDESLOPE Project side slopes from alignment dtm
 SIDEVIEW Replaced by FLIPUP view
 SIGHTDST Create vehicular sight lines alignment
 SITEWORKIN Import Paydirt SiteWork data import
 SITEWORKOUT Export Paydirt SiteWork data export
 SKIP Skip manager alignment
 SLICE Interpolate batter points from HAL, VAL and side slope point | alignment
 SLL Create splined plines pline
 SLOPE Create a boundary around a slope range dtm
 SLOPE​MANAGER Register slope alignments road
 SMANAGER Subgrade manager road
 SMOKEDUC Create smoke duct mounting points tunnel
 SMPROAD Create simple one-template roads or channels road
 SMPTMPL Create simple road or channel template road
 SNAPLYR Toggle the snapability of a layer toggle
 SNAPSET Configure the cursor snap interval and direction config
 SNR Find and replace text | name
 SNRFILE Find and replace text in an external file file
 SOILNAIL Create soil nail sets set
 SORPT Replaced by GC60 survey
 SORTSET Sort sets by name drafting tools
 SPELL Spell checker drafting tools
 SPLAY Cuts splay corners into lots sets
 SPLINE Spline plines pline
 SPLITSET Split lots into smaller lots sets
 SPOT Report the DTM elevation at a location dtm | report
 STAKE Report angles, distances and coordinates for setout report
 SSERIFE Install MS Sans Serif Windows font config
 STAKED Compare staked (as-built) points to design report
 STAKING Report roadway staking report
 STARNET Import a STAR*NET .TER file config
 STAORCHN Configure station or chainage notation alignment | config
 STATION Set the beginning station of a HAL alignment
 STATUSBAR Status bar toggle display
 STEXT Create single line text text
 STOREXS Copy cross sections to road layer data prep
 STREAM Create plines or sets from a stream of locations pline | set
 STRIPNUL Strip null characters from a file import | export
 STYLESET Text style settings text
 SUBGRADE Subgrade editor road
 SUNSTAR Create an azimuth based on star or sun shots survey
 SUPERELV Super­elevation editor alignment
 SUPERPLOT Super­elevation diagram alignment
 SUPERVIS Display your GPS location survey
 SURFACE Surface manager road
 SURFAREA Report the cut|fill surface area using average end area report
 SURPEXPT Export a Surpac string file export
 SURPIMPT Import a Surpac string file import
 SURVCEXP Export roadway to Carlson SurvCE CL, PRO and SCT files export
 SURVCONT Export Moss GENIO to Trimble Survey Controller export
 SVIEW Open or change the state of a view view
 SW1 Modify colour of points where slopes are steep dtm
 SYM2BLK Replace symbols with blocks block | symbol
 SYSTEM Configure Terramodel system variables config
 TABLET Configure a digitizer tablet config
 TAILING Create a tailings beach set
 TAKEOFF Replaced by INT3DSET sets
 TANCIRCLE Create a set tangent to one or two circles set
 TC* Drill hole and blast pattern layout drill and blast
 TD* Tile drainage tile drainage
 TDIR Replaced by TEXTDIR text
 TDS Tripod Data Systems Survey Link DC survey
 TDTU Trimble Data Transfer Utility survey | import | export
 TEMPLATE Template editor road
 TEXT Create text objects text
 TEXT2PNT Create points at multiple insertion points of text or blocks point | text
 TEXT2PT Create a point at the insertion point of text point | text
 TEXT​ALIGN Align text objects in X or Y text
 TEXT​ALONG Create a text object along a selected line. text
 TEXTARRO Draw an arrow with text inside text
 TEXTBACK Hatch text background text | hatch
 TEXTCASE Change the case of selected text text
 TEXTDIR Modify text direction text
 TEXTFIT Adjust the aspect ratio of text text
 TEXT​METRICS Change the font, rotation, orientation, height, justification, slant and aspect ratio of text text
 TEXTRND Round selected bearings and distances for cadastral plans text
 TEXT​ROTATE Change the rotation angle of text text
 TEXTSCALE Replaced by TXTSCALE text
 TEXTSTYLE Change current text style text
 TEXTSWAP Replaced by TXTSWAP text
 TEXTWRAP Modify multi-line text to fit width text
 THREEPC Replaced by GC3PTARC set
 TILE​CENTRED Tile views centred by chainage view
 TILE​HORIZ Tile views horizontally view
 TILE​VERT Tile views vertically view
 TLYR Replaced by VISLYR layer
 TMANAGER Template manager road
 TMCUSTOM Add C:\TMCUSTOM\GEOCOMP to TSP config
 TMGIS Link Terramodel with a Microsoft Access database report, import
 TMLINK Replaced by EXPORT and IMPORT survey
 TMLLIST Open the installed TML list report
 TMRUN See RUN alias
 TMXIN Import objects and layers from a Terramodel exchange file (.TMX) import
 TMXLAYER Export layers only to a Terramodel exchange file (.TMX) export
 TMXOUT Export objects to a Terramodel exchange file (.TMX) export
 TOGLINKS Toggle DTM display of links dtm | display
 TOGQUICK Toggle display of quick contours dtm | display
 TOGSLOPE Toggle display of triangle slope dtm | display
 TOOLBOX Create or edit toolboxes config
 TOWER Replaced by DTMCONE set
 TP01 Pipeline project variables pipe optimisation
 TP02 Create HAL and VAL sets from HAL and VAL plines pipe optimisation
 TP03 Create 3D pipes using HAL and VAL sets pipe optimisation
 TP10 Generate 3D reports on pipes pipe optimisation
 TP40 Place airvalve and scour blocks pipe optimisation
 TP41 Create obstructions in profile view pipe optimisation
 TP99 Display and edit pipe node design information pipe optimisation
 TP99 Recentre plan and profile view by chainage pipe optimisation
 TPLSEC Create long section plot for pipeline pipe optimisation
 TPSETOUT Export to TPSetout export
 TPSTKOUT Export to TPStakeout export
 TRACE Create a set bounded by selected lines set
 TRACEBDY Create a set bounded by selected lines set
 TRACKPLOT Label trackplots hdms
 TRAV2D Enter points by 2D traverse or radiation set
 TRAVERSE Enter points by 3D traverse or radiation set
 TRAVPLIN Enter a pline by traverse or radiation set
 TRAVUTM Enter points by ellisoidal traverse or radiation set
 TRIM Trim a line or arc pline | set
 TRISOL Triangle solutions report
 TRISWAP Swap links in adjacent triangles dtm
 TRMBGRID Export a Trimble gridded DTM (.DTX) file. dtm
 TRMBROAD Export a roadway to Trimble .tta or .ttx export
 TRMBTIN Replaced by EXPORT Trimble DTM (TTM) export
 TRMBUTIL Part of TRMBGRID dtm
 TRUEDIST Report a segment length with an applied scale factor report
 TSP Terramodel Search Path Browser setup
 TTMIN Replaced by IMPORT Trimble DTM (TTM) import
 TTXOUT Replaced by EXPORT Trimble Roading DC export
 TUNNEL​DTM Unwrap a tunnel tunnel | dtm
 TV Terramodel Visualizer visualizer
 TVL 3D Visualiser dtm
 TVLITE 3D Visualiser dtm
 TWOPL Create a curve from two points and a line set
 TXTFIT Replaced by TEXTFIT text
 TXTHTDIF Modify text to show changed differences between segment points text
 TXTIN Import text from a file text
 TXTOUT Replaced by GCTXTOUT text
 TXTREFEL Match elevation of text to point text
 TXTSCALE Modify the size of selected text text
 TXTSW Replaced by TXTSWAP text
 TXTSWAP Swap the text of two records with control of location, rotation and subject text
 UG User Guide help
 UNDER Create a profile of a pipe conduit under a road profile
 UNDO Undo changes edit
 UNHIDE Reveal all segments of selected sets set
 UNITBLK Insert blocks graphically using 1, 2 or 3 locations block
 UNITSSET Configure dimension mode, precision and labelling config
 USTN2MOS Modify objects from MicroStation 7 to look like objects from GENIO import
 UPDATE Download software updates config
 UPGRADE Enter an upgrade code to enable new Terramodel modules config
 UPTAKE Replaced by INTERP3D point
 USER See REPORTS report
 VALDATA Enter a vertical alignment by a curve table alignment
 VALEDIT Shift intersection points in a vertical alignment road
 VAL​MANAGER Register vertical alignments alignment
 VARIOFF Insert points of constantly varying offset from a selected alignment road
 VCLOSE Close the active view view
 VERT​ALIGN Register one vertical alignment road
 VICRDSEC Create cross sections from cross section plots road
 VIEW​PORT Turn on or off objects outside the field of view view
 VIEW​ROTATE Rotate the display of the plan view view
 VIEWSCAL Specify the plan view scale view
 VCLOSE Configure the view settings view
 VISLYR Toggle the visibility of a layer toggle
 VISUALIZER Visualizer visualizer
 VMAX Maximize the active view view
 VMIN Minimize the active view view
 VNEW Open a new view view
 VOLUME Replaced by EARTHWORK report
 VPAN Pan by numeric keypad with 1 = North plot
 VRECALL Recall a saved view view
 VRESTORE Restore a view view
 VRMLIN Import Virtual Reality Markup Language (VRML) data import
 VRMLOUT Export Virtual Reality Markup Language (VRML) data export
 VSAVE Save a view view
 WALK Create a pline given a DTM, a slope and a starting location road
 WESCOMIN Import data from Wescom import
 WORDPAD Open the Wordpad Editor exec
 WORDWRAP Adjust the right margin of text drafting tools
 XLINEBDY Create a boundary around Xlines road
 XLINES Create Xlines along plines road
 XLINPTS Create Xlines of points near HAL road
 XSECTION Export cross section from DTM DTM
 XSECTION​DIGI Digitize cross sections road
 XSECTION​EDT Edit cross sections road
 XSECTION​MAN Manage cross sections road
 XSECTPTS Turn on only points at active chainage point | alignment
 XSECTRPT Report 3D length of cross sections report
 XSHEET Create cross section plots in sheet view plot
 XSHEETGC Create cross section plots in Geocomp-style plot
 XSHILO Create sets at top and bottom of road data prep
 XSLABEL Label obstructions on cross section plots plot
 XSOUT Export cross sections from points export
 XSURAREA Report volume of road job surface areas to a spreadsheet report
 XTIE Replaced by GCXTIE set
 XTOCL Create walls for use in Visualizer visualizer
 XVOLUMES Report volume of all road job materials to a spreadsheet report
 XYZTOAREA Replaced by GFE survey
 ZI Zoom in 2x view
 ZO Zoom out 2x view
 ZOOM Zoom in by window view
 ZOOMSCAL Zoom active view to a scale view

Detailed Description

The table below describes the operation and scope of each command summarised in the summary table above.

These details refer to Terramodel 10.61 with British English language and Geocomp Update P on 64-bit Windows, and subsequent minor updates, so the terminology and operation may vary from your release. Click on the command name to return to the summary table.

At the end of each description, a short table shows the following information where available:

Command, TML, alias or executable dateGuideMenuSourceGC
The approximate date of the last released revision, in dd/mm/yy format.A reference which may include a page number or a link to a file installed with Geocomp Update.Where to find the command in menus in various menu files supplied with Terramodel or the Geocomp Update.Where to obtain the command (More info…The most similar command in GEOCOMP 10.2; often also an alias to the command.
NAME DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF EACH COMMAND
 2DCON

Modify elevations of 2D contours.

Launch 3DPL, ASSIGNZ, CONLABZ or INTCON command.

      Source  
      Hamilton  
 3D

Create a 3D set joining points offset from horizontal and vertical alignments.

Create a set in the current layer connecting points at offsets from selected alignments.

Options

Plan view:
Select a horizontal alignment pline or set. The default is the active HAL.
Profile view:
Select a vertical alignment pline or set. The default is a profile with the same name as the HAL, or a profile which refers to the HAL, if existing. If no record is selected, or the VAL is out of the HAL range, the the new points have no elevations.
Settings
Chainage
Begin:
Enter beginning chainage
End
Enter ending chainage
Incr:
Enter chainage increment
Use Xlines
Also create points at Xlines
Offset distance
Enter the horizontal offset
Delta elevation
Enter the elevation difference
Name
Enter the name of the new points and set or leave blank to name points with chainages
OK
Accept the new settings
Cancel
Retain the old settings
OK
Create points and set
Cancel
Cancel without creating new points or set

See also

GC3D
Create a 3D set offset from horizontal and vertical alignments, with the elevation offset vertical or perpendicular to the VAL
3DROAD
Create a 3D set offset from the main alignments in a roadjob
GC28
Create points along horizontal and vertical alignments
GC283D
Create points along horizontal and vertical alignments at 3D distances
TML date MenuSourceGC
08/02/22   Cogo|​Streets|​3D Geocomp Update or $200 77
 3DFILTER

Filter superfluous points from a DTM.

Filter large point DTMs generated by laser scanners, hydrographic surveys and photogrametry where much of the data is not significant.

Filter points on spikes, on similar grade and where removal would make insignificant changes to the volume.

Select a DTM layer and a boundary

Settings

Max Triangle Grade %
Filter out spikes and troughs by removing points where all surrounding triangles exceed the grade and all are either sloping away (a peak) or sloping toward the point (a trough).
Max Common Side Grade Diff %
Filter large triangles of similar grade by removing points where surrounding triangles have a small difference in Common Side Grade.
Max Volume Difference m³
Filter small triangles by removing points where the resultant local difference in volume is small.
Max Effective Area
Filter points where the total area of surrounding triangles is small.
Max Number of iterations
Reform the DTM and repeat the filter for the number of iterations or, if 0.00, until less than 10% is removed by the last iteration.
Colour of Removed Points
Modify the colour of the filtered points for deletion by colour.
Move Filtered Points to layer zero
Move filtered points layer 0 or make them non-​contourable.
Only Filter point if same colour
Protect points where colours vary
Keep Points on Breaklines
Protect points that lie on a breakline.
Keep Points on DTM Edge
Protect points on the DTM Edge.
Keep Points > 1 Standard Deviations.
Protect points with an elevation difference of more than 1 standard deviation from the new DTM.
Compute Volume Difference
Report the difference in volume between the start and final surfaces.
Generate Report.
Report the results to P3Pad.

Points inside dead regions defined by SETSMOOTH are not modified.

See also FILTER to filter plines, BLFILTER to filter along sets and GC31 to remove duplicate points and GC53 to change and identify non-​contourable points.

TML dateGuide Source 
08/02/22 Help button   POA  
 3DMCOUT

Export MCA file for Topcon 3D-MC Machine Control.

Compute cross sections where xlines intersect selected 3D sets, then export hal, val and sections to a single MCA file and report to P3Pad.

MCA files are the input files for the now-obsolete Topcon 3D-MC machine control system. They are not usable by current Topcon 3D machine control systems which import .DWG and other files. Check with your Topcon dealer.

TML date  Source 
08/02/22     POA  
 3DPIPE

Report 3D lengths and angles of sets.

Report the record number and name of selected sets, then the following values for each point:

  • Back, Intersection and Forward Point Numbers
  • Xline chainages and coordinates (if selected)
  • True 3D Angle
  • 3D and 2D Chainage of Intersection Point
  • Horizontal Deflection Angle and Direction
  • Vertical Deflection Angle
  • Bearing In and Out
  • 3D Distance In and Out
  • Zenith Angle In and Out
  • Slope In and Out.

This information is especially useful for designing and laying out long pipe networks.

Options:

  • Create Xlines labelled with chainages at an interval
  • Append the horizontal deflection angle and direction to each point name
  • Write the report to a CSV file.

See also PIPEINFO and TP10.

TML date MenuSource 
08/02/22   Reports|​More...|​Pipe lengths Geocomp Update or $200  
 3DROAD

Create a 3D set joining points offset from a roadway.

Create a set in the current layer connecting points at offsets from the main horizontal and vertical alignments on a roadjob.

Options

Road:
Select a roadjob.
Settings
Chainage
Begin:
Enter beginning chainage
End
Enter ending chainage
Incr:
Enter chainage increment
Use Xlines
Also create points at Xlines
Offset distance
Enter the horizontal offset
Delta elevation
Enter the elevation difference
Name
Enter the name of the new points and set or leave blank to name points with chainages
OK
Accept the new settings
Cancel
Retain the old settings
OK
Create points and set
Cancel
Cancel without creating new points or set

See also

3D
Create a 3D set offset from horizontal and vertical alignment plines
GC3D
Create a 3D set offset from horizontal and vertical alignment plines, with the elevation offset either vertical or perpendicular to the VAL
GC28
Create points along horizontal and vertical alignments
GC283D
Create points along horizontal and vertical alignments at 3D distances

TML date  SourceGC
08/02/22     Geocomp Update or $200 77
 3DPL

Modify elevations of individual contours.

Modify elevations of individual contours.

See also GCONECON.

      Source  
      Hamilton  
 3DPT

Create 3D points.

Create 3D points.

See also POINT.

      Source  
      Hamilton  
 3DVISUALISER

3D visualiser toolbar button

3D Visualiser.

Project a DTM surface in a perspective, orthographic or plan view.

Functions

  • Display a single DTM surface with points, links, coloured bands, grids, shadows and elevation ranges.
  • Each surface is displayed in a new window; display multiple surfaces.
  • The elevation colour ranges can be configured, saved and imported.
  • Shadows can be controlled using configurable light sources.
  • Navigate using the mouse in flying or rotating modes.
  • View the data in perspective, orthographic or plan views.
  • Export the image in .bmp, .jpg, .psd, .gif, .tif or .tga format; or as a stereo pair.

Recover lost windows

The 3D Visualiser window can be maximised, minimised and restored. If that location is not visible, perhaps because a display has since been disconnected or turned off, the window is not visible and 3D Visualiser appears to lock up. Recovery is often as simple as re-attaching a removed external display or turning on a laptop display. FIXTVLITE is an alias command that resets the default position of the window to the primary Windows display by updating the Windows Registry.

White display

If 3D Visualiser displays a white display for a very long time before rendering the image, this could be a problem with the video drivers. This could also be due to many sets having Hard or Sharp smoothness. To fix this in the current project, modify the smoothness of all sets in the DTM to Soft with SETSMOOTH. To avoid this for new projects, use DESIGNSET to confirm that the default smoothness is also Soft.

Example: create a colour-coded orthographic image and add to Image manager

  1. Open a project with a DTM surface such as C:\TMCustom\​Geocomp\​Docs\​twin lakes.pro.
  2. Select 3D Visualizer option from the DTM menu or toolbar.
  3. Select a DTM layer.
  4. Select some points on the DTM layer by Window, or don't select any to select all points on the whole layer.
  5. Click OK to display the selected points in a new 3D Visualiser view.
  6. In the Navigation menu, enable Orthographic Mode.
  7. In the Navigation menu, enable Plan View.
  8. In the Draw menu, enable Colour-coded and disable Fence and Grid.
  9. From the File menu, select Export Image...
  10. Enter the full path and filename of the image file to be saved.
  11. Enable Geo-reference to also create a registration file to locate the image.
  12. Enable Snap with white background.
  13. Select 256 colors.
  14. Click Save.
  15. Close the 3D Visualizer window or leave it open.
  16. From the Terramodel File menu, select Image manager.
  17. Click Add
  18. Browse to select the image file.
  19. The coordinates of the corners are computed from the registration file.
  20. Click OK and Done to see the image behind your Terramodel project.

This project is a great example to practice on. Try different modes under the Navigation, Draw and Settings menus. Try the toolbar buttons for the same functions.

Help

3D Visualiser Help is available from the Help menu in 3D Visualizer, from the Index submenu in the Help menu and by the HELPTVL command.

Other names

3D Visualiser is also known as 3D Visualizer, TVLITE, Terravista Lite, TVL and 3D Views.

TV

3D Visualiser is included with the Field data module. Terramodel Visualizer (TV) is a separate application that also displays Terramodel project files in perspective and in movies with points, sets, multiple surfaces, textured regions, trees and draped orthophotos. Visualizer is separately installed. Try Visualizer with the supplied demonstration projects, which still work even if you don't have any TV modules on your key.

Command dateGuideMenuSourceGC
12/03/09 ADD 9.7 51 DTM|​3D Visualiser
DTM|​3D Visualizer
Tunnels|​3D Visualiser
Tunnels|​3D Visualizer
Toolbar button
Field Data Module MM 8
 ABBREVSET

Set prefix abbreviations for labelling and display.

Abbreviations are used in display, reports, and labelling. They apply to both attribute text and text objects created while labeling. Once you have made changes to the abbreviations, attribute text will be updated when the display is redrawn, but text objects created by labeling must be re-labeled to be updated.

Curve
Abbreviations for circular curves. Each label can have a maximum of eight characters. Use any ASCII character in a prefix label by entering "\" and the number of the character. For example, enter \131 for the delta symbol in TMODELF.FNT.
Spiral
Abbreviations for spiral curve labels created by LABELHAL. Each curve prefix label can have a maximum of eight characters.
Vertical
Abbreviations for vertical curve labels created by LABELVAL. Each curve prefix label can have a maximum of eight characters.
Table
Line and curve table headings for LABELTABLE. Each label can have a maximum of 16 characters.
Point
Abbreviations for point names. Each prefix label can have a maximum of eight characters. These abbreviations are only used by commands that create points along an alignment at positions where IP or curve information are listed.
Command dateGuideMenuSource 
12/03/09HELPTM Settings|​Abbreviations Secured  
 ABOUT

Report about Terramodel version number and modules.

Report the Terramodel software version, copyright and modules.

Dialog

About
Report the Terramodel software version number, Toolpak version and copyright details.
Modules
Report all current software modules. Field Data Module, which includes the basic functions, is always listed. If a Terramodel security is attached and functional, any other modules on the key are listed.

Products...

If a functional Trimble security key that can enable Terramodel modules is detected, the Products... button is made visible. If there is no Products button, the Terramodel key cannot be found and Field data is the only module. For the key to be detected, it must be a valid key, attached before you start Terramodel, and the Sentinel System Driver must have been installed (SENTINEL).

If you have attached a Terramodel key but Products... button is not visible, see www.geocomp.com.au/​support/​dongles. If you suspect the key is faulty, or not programmed with your modules, contact Geocomp Systems.

Products on Key
Family
List modules for families of Trimble modules that can be secured by the same key. Families can include Terramodel, Terramodel DOS, Paydirt, Trimble Business Center and SpectraPrecision.
Serial Number
The serial number is also the licence number which is usually printed on the key. The - extension indicates the number of times the key has been updated with different modules.
Lock version
0
Enable Terramodel for Windows versions to 9.7.
1
Enable Terramodel for Windows versions 9.8.
2
Enable Terramodel for Windows versions from 10.
Days of trial
The number of days remaining on any trial period.
Currently-owned or time limited trial licences.
List all possible modules on the key for the selected family. Permanent modules are shown by blue crosses. Timed modules are shown by blue clocks. The remaining grey squares show possible additional modules. Not all modules listed are still available for sale.
Order form
To enable you to add modules or prove your current modules, your Terramodel dealer may ask you to generate a Purchase Code report for your attached key. This report is not an "order form" as such, but instead a report showing the serial number, current modules, any additional modules you request and the purchase code.
Your Name, Company Name & Address, E-Mail address, Fax Number and Phone Number
Enter indentifying information.
Additional modules
Request additional modules by Left click for permanent modules or Right click for timed modules.
Print
Report to the default Windows printer. To report to a PDF, first change the default printer.
E-mail
Report to a new email. Change the To: address to that of your Terramodel dealer, and the CC: address to your own. If a new email cannot be generated in a minute or so, an error message appears, in which case use the Print option to generate a PDF.
Upgrade
To add modules, enter the Upgrade code supplied by a Terramodel dealer.
Close
Close Products on Key
OK
Close About Terramodel

See also GCHELP.

Command dateGuideMenuSource 
12/03/09HELPTM Help|​About Field Data Module  
 ACADCONV

Convert .DWG and .DXF files to R2000 .DWG or R10 .DXF files.

ACADCONV is a simple interface in Terramodel to use ODA File Converter to convert all .DWG or .DXF files in a specified folder to R2000 .DWG or .R10 DXF files in another specified folder.

ODA

ODA File Converter and ODA Drawings Explorer are free to use applications from Open Design Alliance that import and export most variations of .DWG and .DXF files of any version from R9 to R2018. ODA file converter can convert files in bulk. ODA Drawings Explorer can display them.

Versions

R2000 is earliest .DWG version that supports spaces in file names. R10 is the earliest version that supports 3D coordinates. R10 is the last version that does not use vports. .DWG files take up less space. .DXF files can be viewed in text editors.

To use ACADCONV

  1. Download and install ODA File Converter or ODA Drawings Explorer.
  2. Create a dedicated folder for .DWG and .DXF files to be converted.
  3. Create a dedicated folder in which to place to the converted .DWG or .DXF files.
  4. Place all the .DWG or .DXF files that you want to convert into the Input folder.
  5. Start Terramodel.
  6. Run ACADCONV.
  7. In Settings,
    • Browse to select the ODA File Converter .EXE, for example C:\Program Files\​ODA\​ODAFileConverter_title 19.8.0\​ODAFileConverter.exe
    • Enter the path for input files, for example, X:\TMData\Project1\In
    • Enter the path for output files, for example, X:\TMData\Project1\Out
    • Select R2000 .DWG or R10 .DXF for the output format
  8. Click "Convert DWG and DXF Files".
  9. Close ACADCONV.
  10. IMPORT .DWG or .DXF files from the Output folder.
  11. Tidy away the data files in the folders before your next conversion to avoid converting them again or getting confused.

TML dateGuide Source 
10/02/21 built-in   Geocomp Update or $200  
 ACTIVE

Set, clear or list the current active alignment.

Active alignment
Select the set or pline to be the active alignment
Set
Make the set or pline the active alignment
Clear
Clear the active alignment

Active alignments are used to select alignments quickly when prompted and control the display visibility of referenced objects.

Objects that refer to alignments derive their chainage properties from those alignments and can be replaced by alignment labelling commands.

See also GCACTIVE which selects the active alignment from alignments registered in HALMANAGER.

See also REFER which refers objects to an alignment.

PROFILE refers the profile it creates to the selected alignment. Objects in the profile are invisible if they refer to alignments other than the active alignment. If the selected alignment refers to another alignment, PROFILE will use the chainages of that other alignment.

Command dateGuideMenuSourceGC
12/03/09UG 125 Settings|​Active alignment Field Data Module 415
 ACTIVE​STATION

Set the active station.

Set, clear or list the current active alignment and station.

ACTIVE​CHAINAGE is an alias to ACTIVE​STATION.

The active chainage, or active station, is the chainage of a specified xline on the active alignment. In the XSect view, set the active alignment and active chainage to view only one cross section at a time. Clear the active alignment to see all cross sections of that alignment drawn on top of each other.

In the XSect view, X value is horizontal offset, Y value is vertical offset and Z value is chainage. Each pline, text and block drawn in the Xsect view is given the Z value equal to active chainage at the time. The Z value can be modified using commands such as ELEVATION that modify elevation in the Plan view.

Cross sections are drawn as plines and text in the XSect view using RDX, RDXGC, XSHEET or XSHEETGC. Each pline and text object created by these commands has a Z value, from the chainage of its xline, and refers to the active alignment, or to another pline that refers to that alignment.

Plines, text and blocks in the Xsect view that refer to other chainages or alignments are hidden in the XSect view. Each cross section dynaview in the Sheet view only shows objects for one chainage and alignment.

Other visible objects are displayed including points, sets, and those objects with no chainage (Z value = *). Objects which are off, such as the plotboxes for the sheets, and objects on layers that are off, are also hidden in the normal way.

These rules enable you to control which cross sections is visible and to draw, edit, measure and so on.

Options

Alignment
Select the set or pline to be the active alignment
Chainage|Station
Select the chainage along the alignment to be the current active chainage
Next
Make the next xline with a greater chainage, along the current active alignment, the active chainage
Previous
Make the previous xline with a lesser chainage, along the current active alignment, the active chainage
Set
Set the selected set or pline to the active alignment and make the specified chainage the active chainage
Clear
Clear the active alignment and active chainage

When first installed with the US English language, Terramodel dialogs and menus refer to Station or with British English, the dialogs refer to Chainage. This TML List refers to Station, Chainage or Station | Chainage.

Command dateGuideMenuSourceGC
12/03/09HELPTM Settings|​Active chainage
Settings|​Active station
Field Data Module 410
 ADD2NAME

Add prefix or suffix to names of selected points, sets or plines.

Change the names of selected points to add a common prefix or suffix.

TML date  Source 
08/02/22     Geocomp Update or $200  
 ADD2PLIN

Add a new vertex into a pline.

Create a vertex at a location and insert into a pline.

The segment nearest to the new vertex is replaced by two straight segments.

If the new vertex is at a similar chainage to the previous vertex, the previous vertex is moved to the new location.

Select Cancel to finish editing the pline.

See also ADD2SET, DIVIDE, GCIN2SET and GC61.

TML date  Source 
08/02/22     Geocomp Update or $200  
 ADD2PTNO

Add prefix or suffix to selected point numbers.

Change the point numbers of selected points to add a common prefix or suffix.

If you are adding alpha characters, or any modified point number will exceed the "Max integer pn" in POINTSET, ensure that SYSTEM has sufficient "Max Alpha pts".

TML date  Source 
08/02/22     Trimble or Geocomp Update  
 ADD2SET

Add a new point into a set.

Create a point at a location and insert into a set.

The segment nearest to the new point is replaced by two straight segments.

The elevation of the new point is interpolated from the connecting points.

If the new point is at a similar chainage to the previous point, the previous point is moved to the new location.

Select Cancel to finish editing the set.

See also ADD2PLIN, DIVIDE, GCIN2SET and GC61.

TML date  Source 
08/02/22     Geocomp Update or $200  
 ADD2TXT

Add a prefix and suffix to selected text.

Add a prefix and suffix to selected text.

To add a pair of parentheses only, use BRACKETS.

Extended text objects with more than 255 characters are not supported.

TML date MenuSource 
08/02/22   Modify|​Text|​Prefix or suffix Geocomp Update or $200  
 ADDIMAGE

Add an image located by pline boxes.

Add an image into Image manager located by pline boxes.

Logos

To add the same logo into multiple sheets:

  1. Use LAYER to create a new and current layer.
  2. Use BOX to place a pline box over the first sheet where the logo is to go.
  3. Use MATRIX to copy the box at the sheet spacing over every sheet.
  4. In ADDIMAGE
    1. Select the boxes by layer.
    2. Browse to select the image file of the logo.
    3. Click "Add Image" to add the image, located by the lower left and upper right extents of each selected box.

See also

IMAGE
Image manager.
BOXIMAGE
Add images to named pline boxes.
ASAPIMAG
Add images for plotboxes that are the same size and refer to a mastersheet.
TML date  Source 
08/02/22     Geocomp Update or $200  
 ADDISO

Add the depth indicated by an isopach layer to the points contained within a DTM layer.

Determine the depth of the isopach at the location of each point on a DTM surface, and then add that depth to the elevation of those points.

If the DTM point is beyond the limits of the isopach layer's DTM edge, the point's elevation is unchanged.

See also GC54 and GC87.

TML date MenuSourceGC
29/10/08   DTM|​Add isopach thickness Secured 240
 ADDMAPSY

Add coordinate mapping systems.

Import Transverse Mercator coordinate systems from a file for use with commands such as COORDCON and GCCOORD that transform coordinates from one mapping system to another.

The files has extension .GMS and comma-separated values. This example shows the first two lines with the field headings and the definition of Broome Grid 2020:

#HORIZ_DATUM,​Ellipsoid,​PROJECTION_ID,​PROJECTION_NAME,​CM_ZONE_DD,​FALSE_EASTING,​FALSE_NORTHING,​CENTRAL_SCALE_FACTOR
GDA2020,​GRS1980,​BRO2020,​Broome Grid 2020,​122.3333333333,​50000.0000000000,​2300000.0000000000,​1.0000029800

Importing coordinate systems from a file that you prepare is easier than using the "Define CS" button in GCCOORD or COORDCON. Run or COORDCON at least once in a session before ADDMAPSY.

If your projection is other than Transverse Mercator, for example, Lambert Conformal Conic, please refer to Chapter 13 of the Terramodel User Guide, or contact Geocomp Systems for advice.

Commands that use coordinate systems in the Mentor database include COORDCON, GCCOORD, FYATBOUT, GCKMLIN, GCKMLOUT, GCLLGRID, LLTABLE and SHADOW.

TML date  Source 
08/02/22     Geocomp Update or $200  
 ADDTIDES

Add tide corrections to depth records.

Apply or reapply tide corrections from a tide file to selected depth records within a time period.

The tide file must in the format dd/mm/yyyy,hh:mm:ss,t.ttt where t.ttt is the tide value in metres and correctly sorted by increasing date and time.

Depth records are points with negative elevations when deeper than tide datum or positive when drying heights (above water). The point name must have been formatted by HDMS.

Restore any depths rounded with HDMSRTR prior to running ADDTIDES. Relabel depths after running ADDTIDES.

TML dateGuide Source 
08/02/22 built-in help   HDMS  
 ADJAREA

Adjust a lot to match a specified area.

Create a closed pline that encloses a specified area by moving a reference set while fixing other boundary sets or plines.

Operation

Bndy Objs:
Select plines or sets that define the stationary part of the boundary only.
Ref Bndy:
Select a reference boundary set that, together with selected the selected boundary objects, defines an enclosed figure as it is moved until the value of the target area is reached.
Center
Select a location near the centre of the proposed closed figure.
Settings
Adjusted Area:
Enter the target area in square project units
Type of Adjustments
Adjust by Azimuth
Shift the reference line along the specified azimuth
Pivot Point
Rotate the reference line about a specified Rotation point
OK or Cancel
Accept or reject changes to Settings and position the mouse to select a location near the centre.
OK
Create the closed pline with the specified area.

How to adjust a lot

  1. Decide on the desired lot area in square project units
  2. Decide which boundary objects are fixed
  3. Check that they do not already define an enclosed region
  4. Create a reference boundary to be moved until the target area is reached
  5. Check that the fixed objects and the reference line together enclose a region and will still do so as the reference line is moved.
  6. Run ADJAREA
  7. Select the fixed boundary objects
  8. Select a reference boundary pline or set that crosses the fixed objects to define a closed region
  9. In Settings
    • Enter the desired adjusted area in square project units
    • Specify azimuth direction in which to move, or a pivot point around which to rotate
  10. Specify a location within the proposed lot
  11. OK to create a closed pline with the adjusted area

Please refer to Adjarea.pdf for an illustrated example.

ADJAREA is also known as ADJUSTAREA.

Notes

  • Select boundary objects that define an open figure.
  • The Reference Boundary must be a set.
  • The reference boundary can have multiple segments and arcs. .
  • Vertices are created where the sets and plines intersect.
  • Curve types other than circular arcs are converted to chords.
  • Where there are two possible solutions, the solution enclosing the selected centre is used.
  • The created figure is a pline. Use GCCONVRT or CONVERT to convert to a set for use as a lot.

See also

PREDAREA
Create lots with a predefined area
GCTRACE
Create a closed figure inside sets and plines

Differences with PREDAREA

AdjAreaPredArea
Create single lotCreate multiple lots
Use set and pline boundariesUse set boundaries
Create closed plineCreate closed set
Consider boundaries, area and direction or rotationConsider frontage, minimum area, rear length, angle and setback

TML dateGuideMenuSource 
29/10/08 Adjarea.pdf Cogo|​Lots|​Adjust area
Cogo|​Adjust area
Field Data Module  
 AIRVALVE

Label a pipe with airvalve blocks.

Place blocks on a HAL and VAL to show the location of airvalves.

The blocks must be named AirValvePlan and AirValveProfile.

The blocks are placed at high points, such as airvalves, and low points, such as scour valves.

See also TP40.

TML date  Source 
08/02/22     Geocomp Update or $200  
 ALIAS

Create, edit and delete command aliases.

Create, edit and delete aliases for commands.

An alias is a command that substitutes for other text entered at the command line or in a menu, toolbar button or workspace button.

Aliases are for commands which need command line arguments, are unfamiliar, renamed, misspelled, replaced or are easier to remember in your own language, dialect, idiom or standard.

Use EXEC in an alias to execute an external command.

Alias editor

Add
Enter a new alias in the Alias field, the command name the alias is for in the Command field and any command arguments, up to 66 characters, in the Arguments field. The alias cannot include spaces. The command must be an an installed Terramodel command or TML and not another alias. To copy an alias, select an existing alias and enter a new alias name and modify the command or argumnents. Click Add to add the new alias.
Update
Select an alias from the list and enter any new values in Alias, Command or Arguments field. Click Update to replace the alias.
Delete
Select an alias from the list. Click Delete to remove the alias.
Print
Report all aliases to P3Pad.
OK
Accept all changes and update the ALIAS.INI file.
Cancel
Cancel without making any changes.

Examples in ALIAS.INI installed with Geocomp Update

User action Result Example of
Type UNITSET Execute UNITSSET Common misspelling
Type FAVOURITE Execute FAVORITES Alternative spelling
Type FAVORITOS Execute FAVORITES Spanish language
Type REVEAL Reveal hidden set segments with UNHIDE Rename obscure command
Type VOLUME Execute EARTHWORK Keep Terramodel 9.8 command
Type THREEPC command Execute GC3PTARC command Substitute with alternative command
Click on  profile view toolbar button in Views toolbox Open Profile view using SVIEW Command line argument and toolbox
Click on  vpan toolbox west arrow button in VPAN toolbox Pan right Command line argument and toolbox
Type Z or W ZOOM using a window Like AutoCAD
Type MOOZ MAGNIFY the view scale by 0.5 to zoom out Like SDRMap
Type DXFOUT or DWGOUT Execute an DXF or DWG EXPORT script Like AutoCAD
Type 17 Measure 3D vector using GC29 Like Geocomp
Type CASCADE Cascade views by "MACROPLAY Cascade" Execute a macro
Type EXPLORE Launch Windows File Explorer Launch an external executable application using EXEC
Click on  Windows Explorer toolbar button on Toolbar Launch Windows File Explorer Launch an external executable application using EXEC
Type UG Open the User Guide Open an external file using TMRUN in a fixed location
Type RUN C:\TMCUSTOM\​GEOCOMP\​DOCS UG.PDF Open the User Guide Open an external file using TMRUN in a user-specified location

ALIAS.INI

Aliases are defined in the first ALIAS.INI file in the Terramodel Search Path (TSP). If you use ALIAS command to add or edit aliases, please keep note of your changes as the default ALIAS.INI, which has over 2000 aliases, is replaced during each Geocomp Update. Many commands and menu items in Geocomp Updates rely on these aliases. The default is C:\​TMCUSTOM\​GEOCOMP\ALIAS.INI.

Use TSP to check which ALIAS.INI is in use (although if ALIAS.INI is in any location under C:\Program files (x86)\​Trimble\​Terramodel\, the file actually in use might be a copy in the Windows VirtualStore).

We do not recommend defining your own ALIAS.INI from scratch. If you do, many commands added or edited by Geocomp Systems will not run. The best way to add your own aliases is with ALIAS command. To edit with a text editor, copy C:\​TMCUSTOM\​GEOCOMP\ALIAS.INI to C:\TMCUSTOM\ALIAS.INI, make your edits and rename C:\​TMCUSTOM\​GEOCOMP\ALIAS.INI to ALIASGC.INI so that your ALIAS.INI is found in the TSP. Lines that start with a semi-colon ";" are hidden from the Alias Editor. Changes take effect when you restart Terramodel or, if you edit with ALIAS command, when you click OK. Don't try to manually edit any file under C:\Program files (x86)\.

Any remnant [Alias] section in TMODWIN.INI would take precedence over ALIAS.INI. Use EDITINI (Show Old INI File) to show whether there is an [Alias] section in any INI file. Use EDITINI (Fix Status Bar) to remove any [Alias] section from the current TMODWIN.INI.

ALIAS.INI in Geocomp Updates include all commands on the English, French, Spanish and German menus.

See also

RUN
An alias to open an external file

Command dateGuideMenuSource 
12/03/09HELPTM File|​System Configuration|​Command alias Secured  
 ALIGNIMP

Import alignments from an ASCII text file.

Import HAL, VAL or SLOPE alignments with horizontal curve radii or vertical curve lengths from a comma-​delimited file.

Browse or enter the filename.

The Settings control the Name, Colour, and Linetype for the alignment created.

The check box "Adjust for HAL Equations", allows you to select the registered HAL from which to extract chainage equations.

The current view determines how the file is interpreted. Where there is no curve, omit the value in [ ].

Plan (Y before X in View Settings OFF)
East,North,[,Radius]
Plan (with Y before X in View Settings ON)
North,East[,Radius]
Profile
Chainage, Elevation[,Vertical Curve Length]
XSect
Offset, Elevation[,Radius]
Super
Chainage, Elevation[,Vertical Curve Length]

See also GC65FILE.

TML date  Source 
08/02/22     Trimble or Geocomp Update  
 ALIGNOFF

Import alignments offsets from a text file.

Import chainages and offsets for a horizontal or vertical alignment.

These are added to the Alignment Offsets in the HAL or VAL Manager.

  • Browse to select the comma-​delimited file.
  • The format is assumed to be: Chainage, Offset.
  • Pick the Pline or Set that you want to use for the registered HAL.
  • Enter a name for the HAL to be registered. The default is the filename.

This will overwrite any already-registered HAL with the same name.

See also GC65FILE.

TML date  Source 
08/02/22     Trimble or Geocomp Update  
 ALIGNTXT

Make text perpendicular to alignment.

Rotate selected text to be perpendicular to alignment.

See also TEXTALIGN.

TML date MenuSource 
08/02/22   Modify|​Text|​Align to HAL Geocomp Update or $250  
 ALL

view all toolbar button

Function key F12

Zoom to extents

Zoom to the extents of all visible objects in the active view and refresh.

The extents of objects inside blocks are not considered. Use ALL to see the effect of changes to vertical exaggeration in VIEWSET.

Command dateGuideMenuSourceGC
12/03/09HELPTM View|​All
Toolbar button
Function key F12
Field Data Module 131
 ALT

Function key F10

Enable menus for entry by keyboard.

Enable the menu for key entry for selection of a menu by pressing the underlined character then select an item from the menu, without using the Mouse.

ALT is an ALIAS to MACROPLAY ALT which simulates the standard Windows functions of pressing ALT key or F10 function key.

Macro date MenuSource 
15/11/12   Function key F10
File|​Macro|​Play|​alt
Standard
User-​definable
 
 ANG

Report angle-right between points.

Reports the horizontal angle at an instrument point subtended to the right from the backsight point to the foresight point.

Also reports the distance from the instrument point to the foresight point.

Uses the current Angle Units setting.

If all three of the coordinate locations are point objects, the point numbers will be displayed.

See also IDANGLE, GCANG, GCLABIP and LABELANG.

TML date  Source 
08/02/22     Trimble or Geocomp Update  
 ARC

Draw a pline arc from any three parameters.

Choose one of 10 Types of arc, for example "Start, Center, End" or "3 Point".

ARC defaults to the last Type used.

If you need Sets, use CONVERT or GCCONVRT command to change the Plines to Sets, or use GCARC.

The arc is drawn from the first point to the last point.

If a radius is used, a negative radius will draw the arc on the right-hand side.

In Terramodel Help, this command is called ARCS.

See also GC3PTARC, ARC2P and CURVESOL.

TML date MenuSourceGC
08/02/22   Draw|​Pline|​Arc Secured 21
  ARC2P

Create an arc pline by two locations and a radius.

The arc is drawn anti-clockwise to the left of the locations.

Use a negative radius to draw the arc on the right-hand side.

See also ARC, ARC2PSET and GCARC.

TML date MenuSourceGC
08/02/22   Draw|​Arc|​Pline by 2 points Geocomp Update or $250 21
 ARC2PSET

Create an arc set by two points and the radius.

The arc is drawn from the first point to the second point.

Use a negative radius to draw the arc on the right-hand side.

See also ARC, ARC2P, GCARC and GC3PTARC.

TML date MenuSourceGC
08/02/22   Draw|​Arc|​Set by 2 points Geocomp Update or $250 21
  ARCBL

Create breaklines along the arc segments of all sets on a designated DTM layer.

Create points at regular intervals along the arc and connect a set from the existing first TP to each of the new points and finally to the end TP of the arc. The number of chords created is based on a specified maximum middle ordinate (arc-to-chord tolerance) value which indicates the maximum allowable deviation from the true arc for any breakline chord.

The elevation of each point is interpolated along the arc from the elevations of the points at the arc TPs. If either TP has an undefined elevation, Breaklines will not be formed along that arc, and a warning message will be issued in the message area.

The new sets are named "SETARCBL", and given the current line colour, so they can be selected separately from the arcs.

See also GCARCBL to make the chords invisible and BLFILTER to filters out excess breakline points.

TML dateGuideMenuSource 
08/02/22 RG 1217 DTM|​Arc breaklines Secured  
 ARC​BREAK

Replace arc segments in sets with points and arcs or chords.

Replace all arcs in selected sets with additional segments by number of points, chords or an arc-to-chord tolerance.

Method

Points
Create the specified number of new points per arc and replace the arc segments with new arcs.
Chords
Create the specified number of new points per arc and replace the arc segments with chords.
Arc to chord
Create new points at the specified maximum distance from the arc and replace the arc segments with chords.

Layer

Set layer
Create the new points on the same layer as the set
Current layer
Create the new points on the current layer

Notes

The smoothness of sets is not changed so any dead regions still apply.

See also GCCHORD which can also create chords along plines and GCARCBL which creates chords in separate sets.

TML date MenuSourceGeocomp
08/02/22   Draw|​Arc|​Break into chords Geocomp Update or $25 39
 ARCENTRE

Toggle visibility of set arc centres.

Turn off or on the visibility of all points at the centre of arc segments in sets.

If sets are visible, their arc centres are also visible unless ARCENTRE has been used to toggle off project variable GC_ARC_CENTRE.

TML date MenuSource 
08/02/22   Modify|​On/Off|​Arc centres Geocomp Update or $250  
 AREA

Report the area inside plines or sets.

Report the area and perimeter if closed and length if open.

Line
Report to message scroll the area of a single figure and the accumulated area after subsequent selections.
Multiple
Report to P3pad for each selected figure including the sum.
Digitiser
Report area inside selected locations, without creating having to create a new object.

The unit labelling is configured by UNITSSET.

The message “Unable to get record's area” usually means that the figure crosses itself somewhere. If you do not know where, get the area using GC10 or User-defined REPORTS such as Closure Report and Geometry Report. With GC10 and REPORTS the area inside the enclosed part is subtracted from the larger part, not added, and figures with spirals are not valid.

Command dateGuideMenuSourceGC
12/03/09HELPTM Reports|​Area/Perimeter
Inquire|​Area/Perimeter
Field Data Module 63
 ARRANGE

Arrange icons of minimised views at the bottom left of the display.

Arrange icons of minimised views at the bottom left of the display.

Arrange is an ALIAS to MACROPLAY ARRANGEICONS which simulates the Arrange icons command in the Window menu.

Macro date MenuSource 
08/02/22   Window|​Arrange icons
File|​Macro|​Play|​arrange​icons
Standard
User-​definable
 
 ASAPIMAG

Add mastersheet images to plotboxes.

Add to each plotbox the same images that are in the mastersheet.

After you have used PLANSET to create plotboxes, place each logo image once in the mastersheet using IMAGE Manager then use ASAPIMAG to copy the logos in IMAGE Manager so they appear on each sheet.

The plotboxes don't have to have been created by PLANSET, they just need to all be the same size and shape and all refer to the same plotbox (which PLANSET calls a "mastersheet" ).

See also ADDIMAGE.

TML date  Source 
08/02/22     Geocomp Update or $200  
 ASHIN

Import an Ashtech points file

Import an Ashtech formatted points file (.PTS).

TML date  Source 
29/10/08     Field Data Module  
 ASM01

Renumber points in chainage|​station order.

Renumber selected points to increase in the direction of a selected alignment.

TML date  Source 
08/02/22     Geocomp Update or $200  
 ASSETLAY

Relayer objects to match Asset_ID attribute.

Asset_ID attributes are feature attributes commonly used with pipe survey commands.

TML date  Source 
08/02/22     Geocomp Update or $200  
 ASSIGNZ

Modify elevation of contours by crossing pline.

Modify elevation of contour plines in the order of a crossing pline.

See also GCMULCON.

      Source  
      Hamilton  
 AUSGEOID

Import an AusGeoid DAT or TXT file

Import a file of elevation differences (N-values) to be used to transform AUSGeoid98, AUSGeoid09 or AUSGeoid2020 elevations to or from Australian Height Datum.

In the same way, AUSGEOID can also import AUSGeoid2020 uncertainty values.

The N-values are in a one-minute grid of Latitude and Longitude. For AUSGeoid98 and AUSGeoid09 data, the coordinate system is LL-GDA94. For AUSGeoid2020, LL-GDA2020.

Select a suitable boundary to limit the number of imported points. For example, importing Ausgeoid2020 with no boundary creates over 15,000,000 points. At the other extreme, selecting a boundary that is too small will import insufficient grid points to interpolate N-values over your whole site.

Prepare an N-values grid

  1. Obtain a suitable AUSGeoid .DAT or .TXT file containing N-Values.
  2. In Terramodel,
    1. Start a NEW project.
    2. Import any clipping boundaries.
    3. Select or create an empty current layer with a suitable name like N-VALUES 09 LL or N-VALUES 2020 54.
    4. Run AUSGEOID to import N-values from the file.
    5. Use TMXOUT to export the clipped N-Value grid to .TMX for later use.

Settings

Change
Select a geodetic coordinate system
For Bdy:
Select a limiting boundary in that coordinate system
Transform Lat. Long into East, North
Transform the grid into Eastings and Northings in that coordinate system if for adjusting elevations. Do not transform if for adjusting distances.
Import N values into Current Layer
Import points from the file that fall within the boundary
Cancel

Downloads

Download AUSGeoid2020 .DAT files from Geoscience Australia. These .DAT files are huge.

Download AUSGeoid09 .TXT files from NSW, NT, QLD, SA, TAS, VIC or WA or from Geoscience Australia.

For more information and more .DAT and .TXT files, see Geoscience Australia.

GGF

Surveyors with certain Trimble instruments can apply elevation differences while importing "Trimble raw survey (.dc)" points using .GGF files (such as these AUSGeoid09 .GGF files for Australia or for just South East Australia). Matching .GGF files must be correctly installed on the instrument and in Coordinate System Manager (CSM). Contact your Trimble instrument supplier for details.

Commands that use N-values

NZGEOID
Import New Zealand N-values
GC54
Correct elevations
GC29UTM
Measure distances
TRAVUTM
Traverse
GCSCANIN
Import lidar

TML date  Source 
08/02/22     Geocomp Update or $200  
 AUTO​DRAFT

Create line, block and text features based on field codes.

Create pline, sets, blocks and text to names of selected points according to field codes defined in an AutoDraft Configuration (.ADC) file.

Introduction

AutoDraft creates survey drawings from field-coded survey data using a user-defined configuration file.
Standardising

The key to realizing the power of AutoDraft is standardising your company's field codes and surveying procedures. When those collecting the data and those using Terramodel to create maps from the data are talking the same language, AutoDraft turns survey data into mapped data effortlessly.

Identify every feature that you expect to survey in the field and assign each feature a unique field code.

Identify the way you want to define curved lines in the field.

Create a global field codes to apply to any feature and field code attributes for each feature.

Create a configuration file with the AutoDraft Editor.

For each point feature, define the text and blocks to create.

For each line feature, define the line attributes, associated offset lines, text and blocks to create.

When the configuration file is complete, supply the codes to your survey teams.

When a survey includes an unknown code, either correct the survey or update the .ADC immediately. Do not leave unknown codes in an ADC.

Field Codes

In the field, the surveyor assigns a field code to each surveyed point. Each field code identifies the point. For example, a field code identifies a tree, the top of a curb, a monument, etc. Field codes can be very simple (MON = monument; FE = fence, TC = top of curb, CL = centerline) or very complex, depending on the amount of information that is standardized. No matter how you use field codes, when the field code is imported, Terramodel treats the field code as a point descriptor, which becomes the point object name.

Configuration File

In the office, the AutoDraft Editor allows you to create a configuration file that holds global settings that apply to all features and the feature definitions for each field code. A feature is defined as either a point or a line. AutoDraft allows you to define the colour and layer of the point or line and any number of field codes. Each field code has several field code options that you can assign to it. These field code options include such things as designating a point as the beginning or the end of a line, as a point on a curve, or a point that is to be labeled with text or a symbol. The AutoDraft Editor offers the functionality to organize these features by feature category. Each feature can also have any number of text objects and blocks associated with it.

Each line feature can have any number of lines that can be offset both vertically and horizontally.

Advanced Features

Advanced features include

  • Pass a parameter from field directly to the final map.
  • Define a feature with two or three points and dynamically stretch a block between them.
  • Define multiple features at a single point.
  • Define multiple line strings.

Creating a Configuration File

AutoDraft requires a configuration file. This configuration file is a binary file that stores global information, settings that apply to the overall processing of field codes and global field codes, and point and line features associated with field codes.

The simplest way to create a configuration file is to base it on a file that already exists.

  1. Run AutoDraft.
  2. Browse to select a configuration file to use as a base. Look for examples in C:\TMCustom\​Geocomp\​Docs and C:\​Program files (x86)\​Trimble\​Samples\​AutoDraft.
  3. Click the Edit button. The AutoDraft Editor appears.
  4. Select File|​New to create a new configuration file with the same global settings.
  5. Drag and drop Global field codes, Feature Definitions feature categories and individual features from your base file to your new file.
  6. Close the base configuration file without saving it, just in case you made a change accidently.
  7. Finally, use File|​Save or File|​Save As to save the new configuration.

Using Global Codes to Modify the Feature Code

To use any global code with any feature in a field code, enter the feature code, a space and the global code.

For example:

If a Feature code is and a Global code is then this Field code can automatically draft this
MON T- MON T- a monument with without text
CH Z- CH Z- a church spite with no elevation
FE POC FE POC the mid-point of an arc in a fence
PIT01 CLOSE PIT01 CLOSE the closing segment of a pit

Notes

To join all selected points with sets based on common field code and string number in the point name, leave the ADC field blank.

To automatically draft surveys where standard survey coding procedures have been followed, select a corresponding .ADC file.

Browse to select a predefined ADC file such as Geocomp Field Codes Revised.ADC, USStandard.ADC or UKStandard.ADC, or Edit to modify or create your own.

AutoDraft can accommodate many survey conventions. One common convention is start each point name with a field code (also known as a feature code) followed immediately by a string code. Prefix each comment, global code or parameter with a space.

Dialog

Points
Select points to be automatically drafted.
Config file
Browse to select an AutoDraft Configuration (.ADC) file. The default file and location is stored as a project variable. Leave blank to join points with the same names.
Edit
Open the AutoDraft Editor.
File
Open or create a new AutoDraft Configuration (.ADC) File
New
Create a new AutoDraft configuration file with default global settings are copied from any currently active configuration file.
Open
Open an existing configuration file, whether ASCII or binary.
Close
Close the currently active configuration file, with a prompt to save any changes.
Import
import field codes from a BLKPTS .map file, a MAPPOINTS .map file, a PTLAYCOL file or a LABELPOINT Symbol.map file.
Export FCL
Export the field codes as a Trimble .FCL file format for Survey Controller 10.x field software. See also FCXOUT.
Save
Save the currently active configuration file in binary format.
Save As
Save the currently active configuration file in binary format with a new name. If the currently active file was opened as an ASCII file, the file is converted to a binary file.
Exit
Exit the AutoDraft Editor window, with prompt to save any unsaved changes.
Edit
Edit an AutoDraft Configuration (.ADC) File.
Undo
Undo changes to the .ADC
New Global Code
Select Global Settings then add a new global code or modify global settings.
Global Settings
Specify a multiple field code separator, the processing order, where to expect the string number and a layer for radius points.
Field code omission list
Enter a comma-separated list of field codes that AutoDraft is not to process. For example, PRP for a field code for radius points created at the center of an arc. Wild cards are accepted (? for a single character and * for multiple characters).
Multiple field code separator
Enter a character to separate multiple field codes for the same point. For example, a multiple field code separator of /, and a field code of FE/WL/KB, can describe a point where a fence (FE), a wall (WL) and a kerb (KB) meet. Common separator characters include + and |. The most suitable character for such double-coding depends on the keyboard of the instrument.
Feature instance ID placement
Specify which characters control line stringing.
Left
Place a string code of up to three alphanumeric characters before the feature code, such as 01KERB or RKERB.
Right
Place a string code of up to three alphanumeric characters after the feature code, such as KERBL, KERB02, 408L or 40802.
Integer
Use integers in the field code for the stringing and alphabetic characters for the feature code such as KERB01BK.

If a feature has a line, the feature is strung, unless the feature also matches a point with no line. For example, with placement to the right, if TOP is a line, and TOP00 is a point only, TOP, TOP1 and TOP01 will string but TOP00 will not.

Processing order
Record ID
Process points in order the points were collected in the field.
Point number
Process points by increasing point number.
Radius point placement
Specify the layer for centre points of arcs in sets. If the layer does not already exist, the layer is created with visibility off.
Spline deflection angle tolerance
Sets created by AutoDraft along a spline curve, approximate the curve by straight segments. Enter the maximum change in angle between the tangent of the curve at two successive points. Increase this value to increase the length of segments; decrease this value to decrease the length of segments (and increase the number of points around a sharp curve).
Apply
Apply changes entered into this dialog.
Cancel
Cancel changes
Global code
Specify codes which can apply to any feature, for example CLOSE to close a string or POC for the mid point of an arc. See also Field Code Definition below.
Unknown codes
Optionally, define specific characters to indicate lines and arcs.
New Feature Category
Select Feature Definitions then add a new feature category of edit feature definitions
Feature Category
Define Categories such as Vegetation or Electricity
New Feature
Within each category, add a new feature or edit features
Description
Enter a description of the new feature.
Root field code
Enter a root field code. All field codes with a common prefix that matches a root field code can be updated by editing any matching root field code. The root field code is required when exporting ADC files to survey instruments.
Type
Point
Label points using text and block objects.
Line
Create sets or plines through surveyed points using straights, arcs or Overhauser splines. Create sets or plines at an offset. Lines can be open or closed. With field codes, designate special points along the line such as the start, end or curve. Designate a three-point circle. Designate any point with multiple sets or plines.
Comment
Enter a comment to be included in reports such as the order of points to survey a 3-point block or parameters such as "Tree type, height (ft), diameter (ft), drip diameter (ft)".
Point Display
Specify the new point layer and colour.
New field code
For each feature, add a new field code or edit field codes. For example, TOP or 102 for Top of Bank, up to 9 characters long. String numbers can be up to 3 characters.
Curve generation attribute
None (Default)
Do not assign any curve generation attribute to this field code or global code.
PC
Draw the previous segment as a straight line, and the next segment as an arc. To compute the next segment as an arc, Autodraft uses the previous segment as a tangent line and the current and next points to define the curve by the two-point and a line method of defining a circle.
POC
Draw an arc combining the previous segment and the next segment. Use the previous point, the current and the next point to compute an arc radius.
PT
Draw the previous segment as an arc, and the following segment as a straight line. To compute the previous segment as an arc, Autodraft uses the "ahead" segment as a tangent and the previous and current points to define the curve.
Spline
Draw a spline from the previous point, through current and the next point, using all three points to compute the spline that passes through the points calculated by the Overhauser method. For plines, this creates an Overhauser spline curve. For sets, AutoDraft divides the segments into smaller segments that approximate a Overhauser spline curve.
Begin curve
Begin a curve at this point. Use all the points between this point and the following BeginStraight point to compute a spline. The points in-between must be part of the same feature as the BeginCurve and BeginStraight points.
Begin straight
Begin a straight line at this point. Use all the points between this point and the previously BeginCurve point to compute a spline.
Curve ahead
Begin a curve at this point. Continue the curve through all consecutive points with this field code.
Circle
Use this point and the next two points to define a circle.
Refer to FDM UG for illustrations of each curve type.
Line control attribute
None (Default)
Do not assign any line control attribute to this field code or global code.
Begin
Start a new line feature.
End
End the line feature. END code is not necessary if the next instance of the feature is started with a NEW code.
Blocks
On
Show all block items associated with this point.
Off
Do NOT show any block items associated with this point. To disable drawing of a 2-point or 3-points blocks, assign this attribute to first point of the three.
Text
On
Show all text items associated with this point.
Off
Do NOT show any text items associated with this point. If you use this attribute on any point of a two or three point block, the text is disabled.
Elevation
On
Record this point as a 3D point (with an elevation).
Off
Record this point as a point with undefined elevation. If is a raw data point with an elevation calculated in RDE, then this function changes the elevation. When you re-enter the RDE you will receive a warning. If you Ignore the point in the RDE, it will not be used in any coordinate computation updates. If this point describes a Target Height Change, the Target Height Change is still recognized by RDE.
Breakline Smoothness
Set the smoothness of contours that cross breakline sets. See SETSMOOTH.
Default
Use the default in DESIGNSET, which should always be Soft.
Soft
Soft contour smoothing
Sharp or Hard
Add a sharp or hard bend only for particular breakline codes.
Dead
Use for a breakline that enclosed dead region that is not to be contoured.
Point in DTM formation
Points with elevations are be included in the formation of DTMs when "Include point in DTM" is enabled in EDIT. See also GC53.
No change
Do not change whether the point is to be included or excluded
Include
Change the point to be included in DTMs
Exclude
Change the point to be excluded from DTMs
Close
Close a set or pline by connecting this point to the point that begins the set or pline.
Apply
Apply changes on this dialog to the AutoDraft Configuration file
Cancel
Close this dialog without making the changes
New line definition
For each Line definition, specify the name, layer, colour, linetype, type, smoothness, direction and offsets.
Name
Enter the name for the linetype or select Default to adopt the Feature Description.
Layer
Select a layer name, [POINT LAYER] or [CURRENT LAYER].
Linetype
Select the Line Type.
Line colour
By layer
Colour 0. As the layer colour changes, so does the colour of the line.
Select
Select a colour number.
Point colour
Use the colour of the point.
Point colour
By layer
Colour 0. As the layer colour changes, so does the colour of the point.
Select
Select a colour for the point.
Point colour
Retain the colour of the point.
Object type
Create as a set or a pline.
Breakline Smoothness
Set the smoothness of contours that cross breakline sets. See SETSMOOTH.
Default
Use the default in DESIGNSET, which should always be Soft.
Soft
Soft contour smoothing
Sharp or Hard
Add a sharp or hard bend only for particular breakline codes.
Dead
Use for a breakline that enclosed dead region that is not to be contoured.
Relayer points
Relayer the point to a layer specified layer in the Block definition or keep the point its original layer
Reverse direction
Reverse the direction of line, and therefore any linetype pattern
Apply
Apply changes entered into this dialog
Cancel
Close this dialog without accepting changes
New block association
For each feature, to add a block, specify the block name, the layer name (which can be [CURRENT LAYER] or [POINT LAYER], and whether to relayer the points.
Appearance
Specify the block colour, whether to explode the block and how to scale the block.
Colour
As defined
Use the colors of the block when it was created.
By layer
Set the color to 0. This has the affect of setting the color of the block to the default color of the layer. If the layer color changes, so does the color of the block.
Select
Select a specific color for blocks.
Point colour
Match the colour to the point
Block explode option
Explodes blocks into component parts, with the option of entering name for the parts.
Scaling
Enter scale factors in X and Y (the Z scale factor is ignored) or enter parameter numbers. For example, to add blocks for tree trunks and canopies, add Block01 scaled by parameter 1 and Block02 scaled with parameter 2. Then a point coded TREE 0.1 2.4 will have a block scaled by 0.1 and another blocks scaled by 2.4. A block is defined with a radius (or diameter) of 2.4 is inserted at 2.4 metres in radius (or diameter) if you select ground units and do not autoscale.
Placement
Specify how blocks are placed relative to the points
Rotation
Enter a rotation in the format DDD.mmss for blocks inserted by one point, or enter a parameter number for the rotation. To rotate anticlockwise, specify a negative value or nagative parameter number.
Auto rotation
When Autorotation is enabled, the block objects rotate automatically through a dynaview as the dynaview is rotated. This should not be used with a north arrow but could be used with other symbols to keep them oriented up the final plotted sheets. AutoRotation can be edited by EDIT.
Attach to point
Refer the block to the associated point. If the block is attached to the point, when the point moves or is deleted, the block is also. If not attached, the Block is separate. Use the PN field in EDIT to delete or change the Point Number.
Relative positioning
1 point
The block is inserted at the point with specified rotation.
2 point
The block is inserted at Point 1, and scaled in the Y direction to fit between the two points. Block rotation is ignored.
2 point window scale
The two points identify the top right and bottom left corners of a window and the block is inserted within the window. Block rotation is ignored.
2 point rotate only
The block is inserted at point 1 and rotated based upon the angle from point 1 to point 2. The rotation angle is ignored.
3 point
The block is inserted at the first point, rotated and scaled in the Y direction to the second point, and scaled in the X direction to the third point. Block rotation is ignored.

This diagram explains how to define 2-point and 3-point blocks.

Block elevation
Define the elevation of the insertion point of the block, when the block is not attached to the point.
Undefined
The block elevation is undefined (*) (Default).
First point
The block elevation is the elevation of the first block point.
Last point
The block elevation is the elevation of last block point in a 2 or 3 point block.
Average
The block elevation is the average elevation of the block points.
New text label
For each feature, optionally add text. Specify the text, EAT codes, layer, style, colour, leader line, border and offsets of any new text.
Text
Enter any strings of text or EAT code, or field code parameter.
EAT codes...
Enter or select an EAT code using the EAT Code Insertion Aid.
Field Code parameter reference
Enter a parameter to be transferred from the point to the text.
Apply
Apply changes entered into this dialog.
Cancel
Close this dialog without accepting changes.
Delete entry
Delete the selected entry.
Cut entry
Delete the selected entry and store in the clipboard.
Copy entry
Copy the selected entry to the clipboard.
Paste entry
Paste the current values from the clipboard.
Replace...
Replace values of selected items.
Deletion confirmation
Be prompted when deleting.
View
View only certain features.
Show all line features
When on, all features that are defined as line features appear in the feature list, including curves.
Show all 1 point features
When on, all features that are defined as one point block features appear in the feature list.
Show all 2 point features
When on, all features that are defined as two point block features appear in the feature list.
Show all 3 point features
When on, all features that are defined as three point block features appear in the feature list.
Refresh
Refresh the hierarchy of the configuration file.
Reports
Report some or all details of the .ADC to P3Pad.
Full
Report all the Global settings and Feature Definitions to P3Pad.
Global section
Report the Global settings to P3Pad.
Root codes
Report Features listing the Root code, the feature type (point or line), the feature description, and the comment string to P3Pad.
Field codes
Report the field codes in a P3Pad.
Categories
Report the Feature categories and associated features to P3Pad.
Single category
Report the currently selected category to P3Pad.
Single feature
Report the currently selected feature to P3Pad.
Help
Display AutoDraft editor Help. The text from these help pages has been copied into this TML List.
OK
Use the ADC to modify the selected points and create plines, sets, blocks and text.
Close
Close the command

Unknown features

If any point names don't match a field code, you are asked whether to add them to the ADC. If you do, identify the discrepancy, undo the AutoDrafting, correct the survey or the ADC, delete the unknown features from the ADC and then rerun AutoDraft on the survey until you are no longer prompted. If you do not, your survey will not be correctly drafted, but you will not add incorrect codes to your ADC.

Passing a Parameter from a Field Code

Field parameters passed to AutoDraft can be used in a variety of creative ways:

  • To add a field comment to a drawing.
  • To dynamically set the dimensions of a concrete pad.
  • To dynamically note the width of a stone wall.
  • To record the tree height, trunk diameter and classification
  • to create kerb strings at horizontal and vertical offsets

Groups

All new objects are given the same new group number which is one more than the previous largest group number.

Error messages

Watch out for any error messages in message scroll, especially when editing a new or imported .ADC.

See also

CSV2ADC, PTS2ADC, BLKPTS, GC16ADC, GCIMPORT, GCINSBLK, GCJOINMP, GCJOINPT, MAPPOINTS, MULTCODE, PTJOIN, PTLAYCOL, RELAYER and SURPIMPT.

Command dateGuideMenuSourceGC
12/03/09 FDM UG
HELPTM
Draft|​Automated drafting from points Field Data Module 125
 AUTOSAVE

Enable automatic saving of project files.

AutoSave attempts to back up the current project file at a user-​specified time interval so it may help you recover from unexpected power failures or computer crashes. It does not help you recover from closing without saving, overwriting backups, and so on. The project file is autosaved with a randomly generated name in a randomly generation subfolder of the folder you specify in the AutoSave Configuration dialog box.

To use AutoSave

  1. File | System configuration | AutoSave (AUTOSAVE).
  2. To turn AutoSave on or off, click the AutoSave On check box.
  3. To set the time interval for each autosave, type the time (in minutes) between autosaves into the Check Every box.
  4. To change the directory for autosave files:
    1. Turn off AutoSave (see step 2), and click Browse. The Browse for Folder dialog box appears.
    2. Find and click on the folder for the autosave files.
    3. Click OK. The new folder name appears in the Directory for AutoSave Files area.
    4. Turn on AutoSave if desired.
  5. Click OK.

Recommendations:

  • Do not rely on AutoSave.
  • Waiting for Autosave regularly delays use of Terramodel which can be annoying and take a long time.
  • It's quicker and safer to turn off AutoSave and habitually save early and save often with SAVE and SAVEAS.
  • Look for files in the project folder with extensions .~pr or .pr~. These are recent backups created by SAVE and SAVEAS.
  • Check to see if you have enough disk space.
  • Check to see a directory used by Terramodel was deleted.
  • Make sure your network server is working properly if your computer is on a network.
  • If your AutoSave path is on a network, you may be opening someone else's file.
Command dateGuideMenuSource 
12/03/09HELPTM File|​System Configuration|​Autosave
File|​Config system|​Autosave
Field Data Module  
 AUTOSET

Create a clockwise set joining points.

Create a closed set on the current layer joining at least three selected points clockwise from the southwest around a location at the mean of the coordinates.

See also QSET, GCTRACE, LOTJOIN, PTS2BDY and DTMEDGE.

Command dateGuideMenuSource 
12/03/09HELPTM Draw|​Set|​Autoset Secured  
 AVERPTS

Compute average coordinates of points

Compute average easting, northing and elevation of selected points.

See also RANGE, DTMSTATS, GC05 and GC31.

TML date  Source 
08/02/22     Geocomp Update or $250  
 AVGEND

Compute volumes by average end-area between DTMs

Compute volumes by end-area given an alignment, Xlines and two dtm layers.

Use AVGEND to compute end-area volumes if you do not have the Site Design or Roadway modules. Compare totals with EARTHWORK reports.

Create XLINES along an alignment first. Smaller intervals give more accurate volumes.

Dialog

Align
Enter the alignment (pline or set object) along which Terramodel will compute volumes. Select the same alignment you used to create the xlines.
Outside
Select the first DTM layer from which you will calculate volumes. This layer should completely encompass the second, or inside, layer and must contain 3D points.
Inside
Use this layer control to select the second DTM layer. Make sure that, within the limits of the xlines, the points on this layer lie within the extents of the outside layer and have elevations.
Calc
Specify the chainage limits of the volumes and whether to send the report to the screen or to an external file.

See also

EARTHWORK and VOLUME
Compute cut and fill volumes between surfaces.
GCGRDVOL and GC20
Compute volumes between surfaces within multiple boundaries. Report volumes within chainage ranges for a similar report to AVGEND but with more accurate volumes.
EARTHWRK and XVOLUMES
Report volumes by end-area of roadjobs.
FIXLAYERS
Fix layer properties created by an old version of Terramodel that produces incorrect zero volumes in AVGEND reports.

TML dateGuideMenuSourceGC
08/02/22 RG 402 DTM|​Volumes from XSections Secured 471
 BARRIER

Report on installation of pre-cast road barriers.

Report on installation of pre-cast barriers along a roadjob.

Select a roadjob, and as-built points at the base and top of barriers.

In Settings, specify the chainage range, asphalt thickness, barrier height and barrier width.

TML date     Source  
08/02/22     Geocomp Update or $250  
 BASIN

Create, enter and edit basin parameters for a point.

Create, enter or edit basin parameters for a point.

Basin point
Select a point to locate a basin.
Basin name
Enter a name of up to 80 characters.
Basin ID
Enter a basin ID of up to 127 characters.
Pre-dev, By-pass and Develop
The data entry table has columns for you to enter areas, slopes, lengths, times and cooeficients for pre-developed, by-pass and developed watersheds.
Area
Enter watershed areas in acres or hectares or compute using HAREAB.
Average basin slope %
Enter the average slope for each watershed, measured in feet per foot or meters per meter, from the highest point of the drainage area to the point of discharge (into the pond or from the watershed). To compute an approximate slope, divide the change in elevation, from the highest point to the point of discharge, by the hydraulic length.
Hydraulic length
Enter the distances that a drop of water travels through each watershed, from the highest elevation to the lowest, or to the point of discharge.
Tc (hours)
Enter the time of concentration, the time in minutes for the Rational method, or in hours for the SCS method, takes a drop of water take to travel through each watershed, from the highest elevation to the lowest, or to the point of discharge, once the ground has reached saturation.
C/Cn
Enter the weighted runoff coefficients (Rational method), or curve numbers (SCS method), for each watershed. Use HCCN to compute these weighted coefficients.

BASIN requires Hydrology module.

See also GCFALL.

TML dateGuideMenuSource 
29/10/08 UG 405 Hydro|​Basin|​Define basin Secured  
 BBEAR

Create a point at the intersection of two bearings or two lines.

Select a point or line to indicate the starting and second point and bearings. If you select a point, enter a bearing to indicate the direction from the point.

For each solution, BBEAR creates a new point at the intersection of the two bearings on the current layer.

Command dateGuideMenuSourceGC
12/03/09HELPTM Cogo|​Lines|​Bearing-​bearing intersection Secured 23
 BCPIPEIN

Import a pipe survey from Business Center.

Import a pipe survey with attributes which has been exported from Trimble Business Center as a CSV file.

String the pipes by Asset ID or String No.

Command date  Source 
08/02/22     Geocomp Update or $250  
 BDIST

Create a point at the intersection of a line and an arc.

Solve for the intersection of two arcs or distances, and create a point object at the intersection.

Each arc is defined by a centre point and distance or by selecting an arc segment to define the centre point and distance.

Command dateGuideMenuSourceGC
12/03/09HELPTM Cogo|​Lines|​Bearing-​distance intersection Secured 12
 BEARTEXT

Add a datum angle to bearing text.

Add a specified datum angle to text containing bearings expressed as degrees, minutes and seconds (DMS)

Enter the datum angle as a DMS string in HP notation like this: 125.30451 for 125°30′45.1″.

If the bearing is EAT text, the bearing is exploded to normal text then the angle is added. Any other characters in the text, such as brackets, distances and new lines are left alone.

TML date  SourceGC
08/02/22     Geocomp Update or $250 8
 BESTFITA

Draw a curve or plane of best fit through selected points.

Create points and a set on a specified layer by fitting an equation to selected points.

Create points and a set on a specified layer by fitting an equation to selected points.

For each curve type, enter Settings for the result layer and other parameters as required.

Curve types

2D Line
Create a set between new two points with no elevations. See also BFITLINE.
Plane
Create a centre point and a rectangular set on a 3D plane. See also ELEVREFPLANE and IRBAY.
2D Circle
Create a 2D pline circle and centre point. See also CIRCLE and BFITCURV.
3D Circle
Create a set with a specified number of straight segments joining points on an ellipse which represents a circle in 3D space observed from above. See also ELLIPSE.
Parabola
Create a pline with a parabolic vertical curve. Edit the vertical curve with CURVE if the pline is in a view mode with vertical exaggeration such as Profile or Xsect. See also PLINE, GCPRFEDT and PARABOLA.
Catenary
Create a pline of segments on a catenary through three points. See also CAT.
TML date  Source 
08/02/22     Geocomp Update or $250  
 BFITCURV

Draw an arc of best fit through selected points.

Create a pline arc fitted through three or more points using the Least Squares method.

Dialog

Select points
Select the points through which a curve will be fitted.
Options
Select layers for the points and curves, set the location method and vary the weight of each point in the computations.
Layer
Store points on
Specify the layer on which the PC, PT and radius points will be stored when using the Create option.
Store curve on
Specify the layer on which the set arc that connects the PC, PT and radius points will be stored when using the Create option.
Location method
Auto select
Compute an initial centre of arc and radius from the first three points.
User select
Enter a trial location for the centre of arc and the radius length.
Radius centre
Locate a trial position for the true center of arc.
Radius length
Enter a trial radius.
Number | Point | Weight
List the point numbers in order and weight them by the number of times the point is to be considered.
OK
Accept curve options.
Cancel
Cancel curve options.
Locate
Show the solution by creating a pline circle with the computed radius point and radius distance. Guessing a radius point and radius close to the true answer will speed the calculation.
Create
Solve the arc as a set, PC point, PT point and radius point.
Report
List the points used to calculate the arc, the weight of importance of each point, their distances from the arc and their coordinates on the arc perpendicular to their position.
Delete
Delete the last set and points created with the Create option.
Close
Close command.

TML dateGuideMenuSource 
08/02/22 RG 558 Cogo|​Curves|​Best-fit curve Secured  
 BFITLINE

Create a line of best fit through selected points.

Create a pline fitted through two or more points using the Least Squares computation method.

Dialog

Select points
Select the points through which a line will be fitted.
Options
Layer
Assign layers for the new objects.
Number | Point | Weight
List the point numbers, order and weight. A weight of zero forces the line to go through the point. When two points are given a weight of zero, a line is passed through the two points. To ignore a point remove it from the selection. Higher weights pull the line towards the point.
OK
Accept line options.
Cancel
Cancel line options.
Create
Solve the line as a set and two points.
Report
List the points used to calculate the line, their weight, their distance to the line and their coordinates on the line perpendicular to their position.
Delete
Delete the last set and points created with the Create option.
Close
Close the command.

TML dateGuideMenuSource 
08/02/22 RG 567 Cogo|​Lines|​Best-fit line Secured  
 BGELEV

Create an elevation view of points.

Copy selected points into an "Elevation" drawing in View 6.

The position of the point along the selected Baseline determines the horizontal position in View 6, while the Z coordinate of the Point determines the vertical position in View 6.

The points in View 6 are placed on the same layer that the points were originally placed on in the Plan View.

The points in View 6 are given an alphanumeric identifier (point number). If the baseline has a Name, then this name and the original identifier are combined to create the identifier for the point in View 6. If the baseline does not have a name, a (2) is combined with the original identifier to create the identifier for the point in View 6.

Max Alpha Points must be set in SYSTEM to a large enough number.

See also FLIPUP which is similar but has more features.

TML date  Source 
08/02/22     Field Data Module  
 BHEXTEND

Extend borehole DTMs to specified offsets.

For each selected point, create two points with the same chainage, elevation and layer name, at specified horizontal offsets from the main alignment of a selected road job, and a set between them.

For boreholes along a road, DHEXTEND creates points and sets for DTMs of each borehole surface.

See also BOREHOLE.

TML date  Source 
08/02/22     Geocomp Update or $200  
 BHOLE01

Import boreholes from a CSV.

Import points from a CSV file of bore hole data with elevations below a specified Top DTM layer.

The CSV file format is similar to this example:

First line HEADERHoleName, East, North, Layer01 name, Layer02 name, Layer03 name, Layer04 name, etc., etc., .....
Additional linesHoleName, E, N, depth to Layer01, depth to Layer02, depth to Layer03, ....
ExampleBH3A , 318128.00, 7345997.30, 0.5, 1.4, , 6.1, 9.8

See also BOREHOLE.

TML date  Source 
08/02/22     Geocomp Update or $200  
 BIGXMLIN

Import LandXML points within boundaries without new lines.

Import points from a LandXML file that fall within a closed pline or within an offset from an open pline, when the XML file has long lines of points.

Try to import LandXML files with GCPTSIN, GCXMLIN or LandXML import script first. If they choke on XML files because the files are all on one line, try BIGXMLIN to read points one character at a time or GCFIXXML which adds new lines into any XML file between every pair of "><" characters.

BIGXMLIN, GCPTSIN and GCXMLIN read points only. GCFIXXML adds new lines into any XML file after some ">" characters. The LandXML import script can also read surfaces and alignments.

TML date  Source 
08/02/22     Geocomp Update or $200  
 BIN2IMG

Create a coloured image from depths.

Create a coordinated image file of colours representing the elevation from hydrographic data created using HDMS.

TML date  Source 
08/02/22     POA  
 BL

Create a breakline set.

Create a set that is also a breakline.

Create set between points that have elevations and are on the same layer as the first selected point. The set is created on the same layer as the points.

See also SET, GCDTMEDG and DELETE​SEGMENT.

Command dateGuideMenuSourceGC
12/03/09HELPTM Draw|​Set|​Breakline Field Data Module 15
 BLDG

Create a pline with right angles.

Specify an origin, enter a bearing and distance and then click OK to enter the first wall segment.

Then enter a positive distance to create a segment to the right, a negative distance for a segment to the left, New for a new building, Undo to undo the last segment or OK to complete the command.

See also BUILDING, QSET and TRAVPLIN.

TML date MenuSourceGC
29/10/08   Draw|​Pline|​Building
Cogo|​Traverse|​Simple building
Field Data Module 4
 BLFILTER

Filter excess points from breaklines.

Replace straight set segments with fewer segments using a filter "tube" on the selected layer within any boundaries.

The initial filter tube is of the specified width, length and height and is orientated to the first segment on the set. The width is perpendicular to the segment. The height is vertical. Enter * to all any height.

BLFILTER checks for additional points within the limits of the filter tube. Any points inside the tube are discarded. The first point BLFILTER finds outside of the tube is kept, and the last discarded point inside the tube is added back to the set. The tube is then reoriented to the last two points, and the process is repeated.

See also FILTER which filters plines only, SETFILT and GCFILTER which filter by 2D offset tolerance and 3DFILTER which filters insignificant points from a DTM. Commands that add points include ARCBL, GCCHORD, GCDIVIDE and GCCHORD.

TML date MenuSourceGC
08/02/22   Modify|​More...|​Filter breaklines Geocomp Update or $200 127
 BLINECHK

Check for crossing sets on a layer.

Create points in layer CROSSING wherever any sets in a selected DTM layer cross, and report the set record numbers and the new point numbers.

These new points have the name "bl-cross" and are labelled with symbol 40 (circle).

These points indicate where all sets cross, whether breaklines arc segments, or segments connected to points that are 2D, non-​contourable or on different layers.

Any previously created points on layer CROSSING will be deleted.

As each set is checked against all the other sets, the count will appear to speed up on large DTMs.

Use CROSSCHK to check selected sets or plines.

TML date MenuSourceGC
08/02/22   Reports|​Mark|​​Crossing breaklines Geocomp Update or $250 43
 BLKPTS

Place blocks or symbols at points relative to an alignment.

Insert blocks or symbols at points by point name and a mapping file, relative to an alignment.

Dialog

Points
Select points
Alignment
Select an alignment (if Rotate relative to alignment is enabled in Settings)
Settings
Attach blocks to points
Attach blocks to points so that the blocks move as the points move.
Rotate relative to alignment
Rotate blocks or symbols relative to the alignment. When enabled, enter the relative rotation.
Use colour of layer for blocks
Turn on the Map Colour property of the blocks to display with the color of the layer on which they are placed or turn off to display the colors of the original block objects.
Default rotation
Enter the rotation for blocks not rotated relative to an alignment, including those beyond the extents of the alignment.
Relative rotation
Enter an angle to add to rotation relative to alignment.
Block mapping file:
Browse to select a block/symbol mapping file.
Edit file
Edit a mapping file using the included editor. It is usually easier to edit using your favourite text editor.
Create file
Create a new mapping file in your project directory or C:\TMCustom.

Map file format

The fields in the comma-separated mapping file are: Point name, Block name or symbol number, layer name, scale or size.

Use # to indicate a comment line or a comment on the end of a line

To specify a block, enter a block name. To specify symbol 82, enter &082, for example.

To create blocks on the current layer, enter layer 0.

For blocks, enter the block scale.

For symbols, enter the symbol size in sheet units. In Plan view, the symbol is scaled to project units, unless there is an extra field for "Absolute scale", that contains only the letter a.

See also AUTODRAFT and GCLABPNT.

TML dateGuideMenuSourceGC
29/10/08 RG 1217 Draft|​Blocks/symbols on points Field Data Module 125
 BLKREAD

Reread a block

Replace an internal block with a different external block with the same name.

See also MKBLKINT.

TML date MenuSource 
08/02/22   Draw|​Block|​Replace internal Geocomp Update or $250  
 BLOCK

Create, place, list or purge blocks.

Combine objects into a single object that can be manipulated as a block.

Blocks can consist of points, 3DFaces, plines, dynaviews, text and other blocks. Objects in blocks do not retain layer names.

A block can be inserted multiple times into projects, shared between projects, scaled, rotated and otherwise edited.

Create both internal blocks (which can only be used within a single project file) and external blocks (which can be used by any Terramodel project file). If you specify an External block, Terramodel will use the first block with that name on the Terramodel Search Path.

Points included in blocks lose point numbers. Sets are stored as plines when they are included in blocks.

Dialog

Create
Create a block definition. Select objects and the origin of the block. Click Name to enter a block name of up to 15 characters and a description. Do not define the block as External. Click Create to create the Internal block. To create an External block, first create the Internal block then use the SAVE Option.
Settings
Establish the default settings for inserting single or multiple blocks.
Scale
Enter a scale factor for the X, Y, and Z dimensions of all inserted blocks. The factors are measured in relation to the sizes of the original objects. For example, to place a block with 2.5 metres in diameter, using a block that is 1 unit in diameter, use a scale factor of 2.5. This default is usually 1.0.
Rotation
Enter a rotation around the axes. These defaults are usually 0 degrees.
Internal | External
Specify whether new blocks are to be created as internal or external.
Auto scale
Apply the current drawing scale of the active view to the inserted block. Use this feature to keep the plotted size of the block the same regardless of the current drawing scale, such as a north arrow always plotted 4 inches high.
Auto Rotate
Rotate blocks in a dynaview automatically as the dynaview is rotated to keep them oriented upright on the final plotted sheets.
Clip
Clip the block to the limits of rectangular dynaviews, even if the insertion point falls outside the dynaview. Clipping complex blocks such as hatch patterns can reduce the display redraw speed.
Map colour
Create and display the block with the line colour of the current layer, instead of the colours of the objects within the block.
On
Create the block with the line colour of the current layer, and display all objects within the block in the colour of the block.
Off
Create the block with the line colour of the current layer, and display all objects within the block in their original colours. Objects with colour 0 (BYLAYER) are displayed in the colours of the block layer.
Edit
Edit (EDIT) the properties of an inserted block.
Layer
Select the layer for the inserted block.
Attribute
List any attribute definition file attached to the block.
Ref. Obj.
Enter the record number of any parent object to which the block refers.
Name
Modify the name of the block to match another valid block. For example, change the name of a block named CIRCLE to TREE1 so the circle block is replaced with a tree canopy block. The inserted block will change size if the new block was defined at a different size.
Colour
Modify the colour number of the inserted block. The block displays in this colour when Map colour is on.
Group
Modify the integer group number. Set 0 for no group.
Obj
Display the record number of the block.
Description
Display the description in the original block definition.
Origin
Modify the X and Y of the origin of the block.
Elev
Modify the elevation of the block, when not attached to a point.
Scale
Modify the X, Y and Z scale relative to the original block definition. A block defined with one unit diameter is scaled to the entered value in project units. CIRCLE block is one unit in radius.
Rotation
Modify the X, Y, or Z rotation around the origin.
Pn
Attach the block to a subject point number to locate the block . If the point is deleted, any attached block is also deleted. EAT text in the block can refer to the subject point.
Auto scale
Apply the current view scale so the block is always the same size on the plot. Auto scale is off by default. Use SCLBLKS to turn Auto scale on.
Map colour
On
Display all objects within the block with the colour of the block.
Off
Display all objects within the block with their object colours. Objects with colour 0 are drawn BYLAYER, with the colour of the layer of the block.
Auto rotation
Rotate block objects in a dynaview as the dynaview is rotated. Use to orient blocks towards the top of final plotted sheets.
OK
Accept changes to the block.
Cancel
Cancel block editing
Insert
Insert a block into a project file.
Block name
Specify the name of the block to insert. Pick from blocks already inserted in the project, or enter the name of a block in the Terramodel Search Path.
Insert
Loc
Locate the insertion point of the inserted block.
Scale
Enter the X and Y scale factor relative to the original block definition. A block defined with one unit diameter is scaled to the entered value in project units. CIRCLE block is one unit in radius. Point label blocks vary in height as specified.
Map colour
Blocks are inserted with with the line colour of the current layer. This block colour is retained even if the block is later relayered.
On
Display all objects within the block in the colour of the block.
Off
Display the objects in the block with their original colours. Display objects with colour 0 (BYLAYER) in the colours of the block layer.
Insert
Insert the block.
Close
Close block insertion.
Close
Close block command.
List
List the internal and external blocks contained in the project file. The list includes the block name, whether it is an internal or external block, the view in which the block was created, the number of plines or sets in the block definition, the number of text objects in the block definition, the number of inserted blocks in that block definition, and the description of the block.
Save
Save a block definition.
Name
Select a block definition.
File
Enter up to 8 characters for the name of an external .BLK file.
Save
Save the block as External and create the .BLK in the current project location. To make the block available in any project, use a file manager to move the .BLK to a location on the TSP such as C:\TMCUSTOM.
Modify
Select one block from a list of external blocks that have been inserted and modify it to an internal block. See also MKBLKINT.
Multiple
Place multiple identical blocks on selected points with a specified scale factor and rotation.
Purge
Delete selected unused block definitions from the project file. To purge more than 130 block definitions, or purge unused blocks nested in other unused blocks, repeat the Purge. Large numbers of unused blocks imported from .DWG can take hours to purge. To purge all unused blocks in seconds, use GCPURGE instead. You may want to delete missing blocks first with DELBLKS.

Block notes

  • Depending on how the blocks were created, GCEXPLOD and EXPLODE explode blocks differently with respect to layers, colours, elevations, names and sets. If one command doesn't do what you hoped, try the other one.
  • If the exploded block or text object has an elevation, the pline retains the elevation.
  • Points in blocks do not retain their point numbers.
  • Blocks can be nested inside blocks, so you may need to repeat.
  • Recursive blocks, that contain blocks with same name, cannot be exploded. Simply delete them.
  • Blocks imported from DWG or DXF files can include 3DFaces. These become points and sets when the block is exploded in Terramodel. To create a block with 3DFaces of a Terramodel DTM, export that DTM surface as 3DFaces to DWG, block that layer in some CAD program then import as DWG into Terramodel.
  • A block with Map colour ON is displayed in the colour of the block; with Map colour OFF, in the colour of the objects in the block.
  • Use SCLBLKS to change the map colour status of multiple blocks.
  • Use SYM2BLK to replace symbols with blocks.

See also AUTODRAFT, BLKREAD, BLKPTS, GC09, GCBLKFIX, GCINSBLK, HATCH, MKBLK, TEXT2PNT and UNITBLK.

Command dateGuideMenuSourceGC
12/03/09HELPTM Draw|​Block|​Block
Draw|​Block
Field Data Module 189
 BLOCKDIR

Modify the direction of blocks.

Modify the direction of selected blocks to a new bearing.

Block:
Select blocks
Bearing of Blocks
Enter a new bearing
Modify Block Bearings
Modify the direction of selected blocks to the new bearing
Close
Close command with selected blocks in the new direction

The initial new bearing is the new bearing from the previous BLOCKDIR session.

See also TEXTDIR and ROTATE.

TML date  Source 
08/02/22     Geocomp Update or $250  
 BLOCKLST

Create an array of blocks for a legend.

Insert labelled blocks in array from selected external blocks.

For an example, see the project file C:\TMCUSTOM\​Geocomp\​Docs\​BLOCKSALL.PRO.

See also

DOC​UMENTS | Drafting | Blocks
Display charts of our blocks in .PDF.
BLOCK LIST
List internal and external blocks used in a project.
BLOCK SAVE
Create an external block in the project folder from an internal block in the project.
LINETYPS
Create a chart of linetypes.
MKBLKINT
Make external blocks internal.

TML date  SourceGC
08/02/22     Geocomp Update or $250 148
 BLUETOP

Bluetop report.

Create a bluetop report for a roadjob.

Bluetops are pegs with a blue-painted top surface and blue whiskers placed in the ground to the elevation of the finish course.

TML date  Source 
08/02/22     Geocomp Update or $250  
 BOREHOLE

Import boreholes from a file.

Import points from a file of bore hole data.

Specify whether the Z values are elevations or depths.

The file format is similar to this example:

First line Info and Layer Names ID,E,N,FILL 1,ALV 1,NONCO 1,COHES 1,MUD 1,SNDSTN 1,SNDGRV 1,NONCO 2,COHES 2
Example data lineOXBN15, 32624.26, 151422, 15.78, 13.6, 11.9, 9.1, 9.1, 9.1, 9.1, 9.1, 9.1, 9.1, -8.66,
Example data lineOXBN16, 32553.86, 151409, 14.033, 12, 12, 12, 9.3, 9.3, 9.3, 9.3, 8.1, 6.5, -8.66, -8.66

See also BHOLE01.

TML date  Source 
08/02/22     Geocomp Update or $200  
 BOX

Draw a pline box by two corners.

Draw a rectangular pline on cardinal bearings at specified opposite corners.

See also GCBOX, which prompts for three corners, POLYGON, which prompts for number of sides, centre location and the distance from centre to vertices, PLOTBOX, which prompts for bearing and distances in sheet units, and PAD, which prompts for two points and an elevation.

If the box is to be used for a DYNAVIEW, locate the first corner at the bottom left so that the insertion point of any rectangular dynaview can always be found at the bottom left.

Command dateGuideMenuSource 
12/03/09HELPTM Draw|​Pline|​Box Secured  
 BOXDYNA

Create pline boxes from dynaview extents.

Create rectangular pline boxes at the extents of selected dynaviews on the selected layer and with the colour of that layer.

The plines are created with the name of the dynaview and refer to the dynaview record.

If a dynaview is rotated, or not rectangular, the extents are larger than the dynaview.

These boxes can be selected by PLOT when plotting in Multiple mode.

Creating these boxes in a distinctive colour can help locate dynaviews.

See also DYNAVIEW, FIXDYNA MVIEW, PLOTBOX and SHOWDYNA.

TML date  Source 
08/02/22     Geocomp Update or $200  
 BOXIMAGE

Add images located by named pline boxes.

For each selected closed pline, add into Image manager the image file with the same name as the pline.

The images must be in the same folder as the selected file.

The name of each image file and pline box must end with one of these file extensions: .BMP, .DCX, .DIB, .GIF, .JPEG, .JPG, .PNG, .PCX, .PICT, .TGA, .TIF, .TIFF, .WMF or .WPG, and the image file must be in the corresponding image format.

Named plotboxes

To place images into plotboxes with matching names:

  1. Create rectangular pline boxes with the names of image files, including the file extension.
  2. In BOXIMAGE,
    1. Select the pline boxes.
    2. Browse to select any file in the folder with the images.
    3. Click "Add Images" to add any image in the same folder as the selected file, located by the lower left and upper right extents of any selected pline boxes that have the same name as the image.
  3. Use EXIT to exit.
  4. Restart Terramodel.
  5. Use Image Manager (IMAGE) to check that your images have been added.

See also

IMAGE
Image manager.
ADDIMAGE
Add a single image to many boxes.
ASAPIMAG
Add images for plotboxes that are the same size and refer to a mastersheet.
NAME
Name objects.
TML date  Source 
08/02/22     Geocomp Update or $200  
 BREAK

Break a pline or set into two parts.

Break a pline or set into two parts at location.

Select a pline or set, then a break location. The pline or set is broken into two parts at the location.

Repeat
Enable this checkbox if you want the command to stay open until Cancel is clicked.
Set or pline
Select the set or pline you wish to break.
Break
Enter a location along the line where you want to break it.

To break a pline or set by removing a segment, use DELETE​SEGMENT.

In Terramodel prior to 10.5, BREAK deletes set segments like DELETE​SEGMENT does now.

A pline cannot be broken by BREAK within a spiral or vertical curve. GCPRFEDT can break a vertical curve into two.

Command dateGuideMenuSourceGC
12/03/09HELPTM Edit|​Break Field Data Module 276
 BREAKVAL

Break a pline within a vertical curve.

Break, trim or insert an IP within a vertical curve.

See also GCPRFEDT.

      Source  
      Hamilton  
 BRACKETS

Add brackets to selected text.

Add a prefix of ( and a suffix of ) to selected text.

To specify any prefix or suffix, use ADD2TXT.

TML date  Source 
09/03/22     Geocomp Update or $200  
 BUILDDTM

Build a DTM layer from contours, points and text.

Build a DTM layer from contours, points and text.

See also GCCOPY, GCCONVRT and TEXT2PNT.

      Source  
      Hamilton  
 BUILDING

Construct a building with perpendicular or angled sides.

Construct a building with perpendicular or angled sides based on positive (right) and negative (left) offsets. Close the building by direct closure to the beginning point or close on a perpendicular to the beginning line. The beginning line can be cut or extended to match the closing line.

See also BLDG, QSET and TRAVPLIN.

TML dateGuideMenuSourceGC
08/02/22 building.txt Cogo|​Traverse|​Complex building Wendell 4
 CAGDRLX

Report Compute-A-Grade ditch.

Specify a HAL and chainages to report a ditch in Compute-A-Grade .DRL format.

The TML name is CAGDRL_X. If CAGDRLX does not run from the command line, create an alias from CAGDRLX to CAGDRL_X or enter CAGDRL_X.

TML date  Source 
08/02/22     Geocomp Update or $250  
 CALLOUT

Label objects with predefined callout text.

Create, edit, store and use predefined callout styles to label common features.

Quickly label common point and line features, such as kerb inlets, without having to type the text each time.

Stored callout styles define text in the label and may also define leader lines and text borders.

The predefined callout styles save time, look consistent and reduce typing errors.

Callout styles are stored in external .COS library files so they are independant of the project. These libraries can be loaded into the initialisation file TMODWIN.INI from folders such as in C:\Program files (x86)\​Trimble\​Terramodel\​Locale\​English and C:\TMCUSTOM\​Geocomp\. "Geocomp" Initialisation files load the GEOCOMP01.COS callout style library.

Options

Callout
Create or edit a callout style, load and clear the styles contained within an external callout style library (.COS) file, and select the callout style to be used.
Name
Edit the name of the callout style currently highlighted below in the Callout Style list box. Use a short name that can be read within the list box.
Description
Associate more descriptive title of up to 80 characters a callout style.
Text style
Select, edit or create the text style.
File
Display and edit the path of the external .COS file in which the currently highlighted callout style is stored. Copy an existing callout style into another file by editing this pathname.
Browse
Browse to select a callout style library file (.COS).
Callout style
List the callout styles that have been loaded. Loading a callout style file makes the callouts defined within it available for use. Highlight a style to use, edit or display the data associated with that style.
Text
Enter or edit the textual content of the callout.
New
Create a new callout style. By default it is named "New Style", and is associated with the same callout style file as the style that is highlighted when you click on the New command button. The new callout style is not stored until you click on OK.
Delete
Deletes the currently highlighted callout style from the list, and from the indicated external callout style file.
Restrict...
Indicate that a callout style that employs station and offset labeling requires an associated subject HAL, and restrict the selection of that HAL to either plines or sets or both. You can also restrict the automated selection of the callout’s subject to a particular object type or types.
HAL types
Callout styles that are intended to display station and offset values must have a subject HAL which identifies the horizontal alignment. Use the "\HAL" EAT codes to label the station and offset of the text insertion point, the callout’s subject, or the end of the leader line. Allow Pline, Set or both.
Subject types
Predefined callout styles are generating text that labels properties of a particular subject. Limit subjects to sets, points, plines, blocks, to None to create a simple text string with no subject, or to Any object type.
EAT Code
Open the EAT Code Insertion Aid to insert EAT codes within the text string at the position of the text insertion marker, or replace the highlighted text.
Copy text from
Select text from an existing text object. Duplicate text objects, or base text on existing text.
Load
Load an external callout style library file to make the callout styles defined within it available.
Clear
Clear the Callout Style list box of the styles contained in any of the currently loaded callout style library files.
Leader / Border style...
Select the leader line and text border styles for the callout.
OK
Apply the changes
Cancel
Cancel without making the changes
HAL
If the callout style contains EAT codes for chainage and offset, refer the callout text a horizontal alignment.
Ldr:/Subj:
If the callout style contains EAT codes for a subject, refer to that subject. If the callout style includes a leader line, pick the leader line location.
Loc:
To place the callout text, select a location graphically, or enter the location of the insertion point and click Text.
Rot
Enter a bearing or an angle of rotation (measured from due north) at which the text is to be placed. Valid rotation angles range from 0° to 360° and can include negative angles. The default rotation is 90° which generates horizontal text.
Props
Specify the style, linetype and gap of any leader line, and the style and linetype of any border, and the record numbers of any subject or HAL.
Text
Place the defined callout at the entered location.
Close
Close the command without placing a callout.

See also GC21 which sets the active callout style and GCLABPNT which labels multiple points with EAT text.

Command dateGuideMenuSourceGC
12/03/09HELPTM Draw|​Text|​Callout text... Secured 92
 CAROUSEL

Configure plotter carousels.

Select and edit plotter pen carousel definitions.

Define the colour and width for "pens" to be used when plotting.

The list of carousels

Close
Close the carousel command
New
Enter a name for a new carousel, enter the number of pens (up to 255) in the carousel and edit the definition for each pen.
Edit
Select a carousel to display or edit the pen definitions.
Delete
Delete a carousel

Pen definition

Carousel size
Display or edit the carousel size. Enter a larger size to add pens with default values. Enter a smaller size to remove pens with higher pen numbers.
Colour
Enter a colour in the form of a triplet of red, green and blue in RGB decimal integer values from 1 to 255. Pen 0 is not included because objects with pen 0 are not plotted.
Choose
Select a colour from a palette of basic colours, or from custom colours you define by triplets of RGB values, or of Hue, Saturation and Luminosity.
Width (mm)
Enter the width of the pen in millimetres when plotted on a raster plotter or printer that has a Windows printer driver. Enter 0 for the default width, which for HP plotters is 0.3, too wide for small text.
Pen speed
Enter the pen speed for vector plotters that pick up physical pens from a carousel and move them across paper or film. Enter 0 for the default speed for that plotter.

Vector plotters

Vector plotters plot images created by moving a physical pen, pencil or blade following paths. Such pens are typically selected from a carousel of up to eight pens, so when plotted to paper or film, the width and colour depends on what pen is in that carousel position. Vector plotter drivers included with Terramodel use HP-GL or HP-GL/2 graphics languages.

Raster plotters

Most plotters and printers are raster printers that print dots in the selected colours onto a grid on paper or film, or into a file such as a .PDF. Images from Image manager require raster printers. Raster plotters normally require a Windows printer driver.

Vector plot files on raster plotters

Terramodel linework is exported as segments. Curves are replaced by straight segments using the SetArcTol value in TMODWIN.INI which is typically 0.001. Raster printers convert these lines into paths of dots of the specified width. Some raster drivers send pixels only to the printer. Others pass on these lines to be processed later which is why some .PDF files created from Terramodel contain linework that can be extracted via .DWG or .DXF.

Plots from Terramodel to HP-GL and HP-GL/2 plotter drivers include colours. These are ignored by physical pen plotters, but can be used by raster plotters and image software.

TMODWIN.INI

Use CAROUSEL to define the pen numbers, PLOTSET to map the object colour to a pen number and PLOTTER​SET to assign the default carousel for each Plotter Configuration. All these are configured in TMODWIN.INI. To copy these settings from another computer use EDITINI to copy sections from an .INI file such as TMODWIN.INI or C:\TMCustom\​Geocomp\​tmodwin_geocomp_defaults.ini. The carousels are in the PenDef sections.

By default, PLOTTERSET always includes a configuration called HPGL2 and CAROUSEL includes a carousel called Pen Plotter. To configure the "Pen Plotter" carousel to match the HP default colours for pens 1 to 7, which are black, red, green, blue, cyan, magenta and yellow, use EDITINI to import [PenDef Pen Plotter] from C:\TMCustom\​Geocomp\​tmodwin_geocomp_defaults.ini. In this carousel, Pen 8 is white because pen 0, which is white in HP-GL/2, is never plotted in Terramodel.

Command dateGuideMenuSourceGC
12/03/09 Palettes, Colourmaps, Penmaps and Carousels in Terramodel File|​Plot setup|​Carousel setup Secured PU3
 CASCADE

Arrange all open views so that all the view names are visible.

Arrange all open views so that all the view names are visible.

Cascade is an ALIAS to MACROPLAY CASCADE which simulates the Cascade command in the Window menu.

Macro date MenuSource 
Macro   Window|​Cascade
File|​Macro|​Play|​cascade
Standard
User-​definable
 
 CAT

Create a catenary pline.

Create a segmented pline, between two attachment locations in the profile view, following the path of a cable suspended between two points.

Enter the weight, tension and horizontal increment.

TML date  Source 
08/02/22     Geocomp Update or $250  
 CDSPROF

Create an initial design profile for a cul-de-sac or kerb return.

Create a profile to transition between two other profiles. This profile can be used by SMPROAD to create a simple cul-de-sac design that ties into the adjoining curb or edge-of-pavement profiles.

Dialog

Culdecsac
Select the cul-de-sac horizontal alignment for the vertical profile.
Begin info
CL Hal
Select the the horizontal alignment to interpolate the beginning profile elevation.
Elevation data
Enter the difference in elevation for the cul-de-sac profile to vary above the horizontal alignment profile. Enter a negative value to vary below.
Profile
Select the profile for the selected horizontal alignment.
OK
Accept changes to information for the beginning.
Cancel
Cancel changes
End info
CL Hal
Select the the horizontal alignment to interpolate the ending profile elevation.
Elevation data
Enter the difference in elevation for the cul-de-sac profile to vary above the horizontal alignment profile. Enter a negative value to vary below.
Profile
Select the profile for the selected horizontal alignment.
OK
Accept changes to information for the beginning.
Cancel
Cancel changes
Create
Create the culdesac profile in the profile view.
Cancel
Cancel the command.

To create a kerb return,

  • Select the kerb return horizontal alignment at Cul-de-sac.
  • Click Begin info and select the centreline hal of one road, the vertical offset of the kerb alignment at the start of the kerb and the design profile of that road.
  • Click End info and select the centreline hal of the other road, the vertical offset of the kerb alignment at the end of the kerb and the design profile of the other road.
  • Click Create to create a profile pline with chainages from the culdesac alignment and four segments containing vertical curves end matching the grades and elevations of the design alignment profiles.

The kerb return has four segments with vertical curves.

See also CULDESAC, GC51 and GCPRFEDT.

TML dateGuideMenuSource 
08/02/22 RG 572 Cogo|​Streets|​CdsProf Secured  
 CENTREV

Recentre views based on chainage of active alignment.

Recentre Plan, Profile, Super and Xsect views by chainage of active alignment at a selected location.

Select a location in the plan, profile, super or xsect views. The plan, profile and super views, if open, are recentred on the horizontal or vertical alignment at the chainage of the location. The active chainage is set to the nearest cross section, and the Xsect view is fitted to the data.

If the selected view is the Xsect, the active chainage is used.

The match button recentres the plan view to the match the profile view.

There are buttons to zoom in or out by 25% and to fit data in all four views.

Ideal for working along a long narrow alignment such as a road, rail or pipe where no roadjob has been defined.

See also ACTIVE, CENVIEW, TPCENVIE and PPSX.

TML date  Source 
08/02/22     Geocomp Update or $500  
 CENVIEW

Recentre views based on chainage of road alignment.

Recentre Plan, Profile, Super and Xsect views by chainage of a roadjob at a selected location.

For any selected roadjob, select a location in the plan, profile, super or xsect views. The plan, profile and super views, if open, are recentred on the horizontal or vertical alignment at the chainage of the location. The active chainage is set to the nearest cross section, and the Xsect view is fitted to the data.

If the selected view is the Xsect, the active chainage is used.

The match button uses the centre of the active plan, profile or super view to recentre the other views. If the profile view is active, the plan and super views are scaled to fit the chainage range.

There are buttons to zoom in or out by 25%, to fit data in all four views, and to move to the next or previous chainage and make it active.

Ideal for working along a long narrow alignment such as a road, rail or pipe.

See also ROADJOB, CENTREV, TPCENVIE and PPSX.

TML date MenuSource 
08/02/22   Window|​Tile centred by chainage
Window|​Tile centred by station
Geocomp Update or $500  
 CF2SUPER

Create super­elevation slope alignment from existing crossfall.

For every point in a centreline set, compute the crossfall perpendicular to the HAL from the centreline to left and right edge-of-road sets. These crossfalls are created as slope alignments in the Super view on the current layer for you to match existing super­elevation.

Xlines are ignored as these are not interpolated linearly.

TML date  Source 
08/02/22     Geocomp Update or $200  
 CHAINAGE

Set the start chainage of a horizontal alignment pline.

Set the start chainage (also known as beginning station) of a horizontal alignment pline.

Chainages increase away from the first point or vertex.

Chainage equations can be assigned to registered horizontal alignments by HAL Manager (HALMANAGER).

Station and chainage

CHAINAGE is an alias to STATION command.

If the US English language version is installed, dialogs for commands written by Trimble refer to Station. If British English, these dialogs refer to Chainage.

Some commands use the convention configured by STAORCHN.

To select menus which refer to station, use MENUCFG to select a _US.M menu file. To refer to Chainage, select a different .M file.

This TML List usually refers to Station | Chainage.

See also

ACTIVE​CHAINAGE
Configure the active chainage.
SETCH
Modify the start chainage of a pline.
GC74
Modify the start chainages of many plines.
REVERSE
Reverse the direction of a pline.

Command dateGuideMenuSourceGC
12/03/09HELPTM Edit|​Chainage
Edit|​Station
Field Data Module 84
 CHECKATT

Check attributes.

Check selected objects for duplicate and missing attributes.

See also FYATBEDIT and DISPFEAT.

TML date  Source 
08/02/22     Geocomp Update or $200  
 CHEKROAD

Check and correct roadway alignment registration.

Check and correct roadway alignment registration.

See also GCSUBGDE, GCDTMGDE and CHKRDDTM.

TML date  Source 
08/02/22     Geocomp Update or $200  
 CHKRDDTM

Check road DTM and add breaklines across roads.

Check a DTM of a road, add a DTM edge or add breaklines in the direction of the Xlines.

See also CHEKROAD and ROADSETS.

TML date  Source 
08/02/22     Geocomp Update or $200  
 CHNGATTR

Replace selected attributes based on a dictionary.

Replace attribute names or attribute values of selected objects according to a dictionary file.

TML date  Source 
08/02/22     Geocomp Update or $200  
 CHNGCOLR

Change colour bylayer to colour by colour number.

For every selected object that has colour number = 0 (= BYLAYER), change the colour number to the colour of the layer.

Objects of Colour 0 cannot be selected by colour in any command, so select by any other method. Once CHNGCOLR has changed the colour number, you will be able to select them by colour.

The displayed colour will not appear to change until and unless you change the layer of the object or the colour in the layer settings.

Select all objects by view to change from colour-by-layer convention to colour-by-object convention.

To change from colour-by-object to colour-by-layer, COLOUR by view to colour 0.

TML date  Source 
08/02/22     Geocomp Update or $200  
 CHNGHEIG

Change elevation by point name

Change the elevation of all selected points to match the numeric value of the name.

All digits and the last decimal point in the name are considered; all other characters are ignored, for example:

point name new elevation
123.456 123.456
R.L.=123.456 123.456
123.456 FSL 123.456
123.456 I.L. 123456.00
90301 90301.00
TOP01 1.00
RCP dia. 225 class Y1 0.2251
STN_B *
  *

You may need to tidy up the names with GC01, SNR or CHNGNAME first.

TML date  Source 
08/02/22     Geocomp Update or $250  
 CHNGNAME

Replace characters in names based on a dictionary.

Replace characters in names of selected records according to a selected dictionary file.

Change the name of selected objects by replacing any string of characters in the name that matches the left-hand field from the list with the corresponding string of characters in the right-hand field. Where there is no match, the name is not modified.

Do not use to change names of blocks or text.

Options

Recs:
Select any objects to be renamed.
Stop after 1st Match
Matches are found by working down the dictionary file in order. Stop after the first match or allow multiple changes to the name.
Start Char Loc: and End:
Limit changes to within a range of character positions
Dic:
Enter the name and location of a dictionary file created in a text editor. Use ' and , for delimiters. End the file with an empty new line.
Browse
Browse to select a dictionary file
Edit
Edit the dictionary file in the text editor which is the default app for that file type. For example, use Windows Settings to chose Notepad as the default app for .dic files.
OK
Modify the names according to the dictionary
Cancel
Close the command without modifying names

Examples

C:\TMCUSTOM\​Geocomp\​CHNGNAME.DIC is an example of a dictionary file for substituting CGRDVOL grid labels.

'Row   1 Col   1','A1'
'Row   1 Col   2','B1'
'Row   1 Col   3','C1'
'Row   1 Col   4','D1'
'Row   1 Col   5','E1'
'Row   2 Col   6','A2'
'Row   2 Col   7','B2'
'Row   2 Col   8','C2'
'Row   2 Col   9','D2'
'Row   2 Col  10','E2'

See also

CHNGTEXT
Change multiple text objects using a dictionary file.
SNR
Find and Replace in objects
SNRFILE
Find and Replace in external files
CHTXT
Find and replace stations with chainages
GC01
Truncate names of objects
GC02
Modify point name to include chainage & offset.

TML date  SourceGC
08/02/22     Geocomp Update or $200 RDES
 CHNGTEXT

Replace selected text based on a dictionary.

Replace characters in selected text records according to a dictionary file.

Change selected text objects by replacing any string of characters in the text that matches the left-hand field from the list with the corresponding string of characters in the right-hand field.

Matches are found by working down the dictionary file in order.

Options

Text:
Select text
Match text width
If the new text is a different length, adjust the text width attributes to maintain the previous length.
Stop after First Match
Stop after the first match or allow multiple changes to the text.
Dic:
Enter the name and location of a dictionary file created in a text editor. Use ' and , for delimiters. End the file with an empty new line.
Browse
Browse to select a dictionary file
Edit
Edit the dictionary file in the text editor which is the default app for that file type. For example, use Windows Settings to chose Notepad as the default app for .dic files.
OK
Modify the text according to the dictionary
Cancel
Close the command without modifying text

Examples

Create your dictionary in a text editor or edit a copy of C:\TMCUSTOM\​GEOCOMP\​CHNGTEXT.DIC.

These are examples of using a dictionary to change the presentation language:

#Dictionary file format
# Lines with first char as # are ignored
#  use ' character as limiter
#'Current Text','New Text'
#
#'English',​'Espanol'
'Feasibility Study',​'Estudio de factibilidad'
'Road design',​'D seño decarretera'
'North',​'Norte'
'Cross-Section',​'Corte'
#
#'English',​'Francais'
'CHAINAGE',​'PK'
'CH',​'PK'
'SCALES',​'ECHELLE'
'SCALE',​'ECHELLE'
'Scale',​'Echelle'
'LONGITUDINAL SECTION',​'Profil en Long'
'CROSS SECTIONS',​'Profil en Travers'
'OFFSET',​'Distance du centre'

In the example above, 'CHAINAGE' is listed above 'CH'. If instead 'CH' is listed before 'CHAINAGE', and "Stop after 1st match" is not been selected, you get 'PKAINAGE', not 'PK'.

Special cases

EAT codes are treated like any other text. For example, '\SUB{Z,3}','\SUB{Z,4}' modifies the number of displayed decimal places in elevations from three to four. If the EAT includes a Name, use CHNGNAME to change the name instead.

Some characters must be specified by the three-​digit decimal ASCII value. What you see depends on the font. Not all fonts contain all characters.

FontASCII valueLooks likeFunction
TMODELF\010 new line
TMODELF\176°degree sign
TMODELF\129ødiameter sign
SYMBOL\199ødiameter sign
TMODELF\044,comma
TMODELF\039'apostrophe

For charts of these fonts, refer to Figures 5-13 and 5-14 in Terramodel 10 User's Guide.

See also

SNR
Find and Replace
SNRFILE
Find and Replace in external files
CHNGNAME
Change names by dictionary file
CHTXT
Change station text to chainage text

TML date  SourceGC
10/02/22     Geocomp Update or $200 514
 CHOSDIFF

Report chainage, offset and height difference for selected selected points from DTM.

Select a HAL, a Design DTM and some points and then report the Point Number, Chainage, Offset, Point Elevation, Design DTM Elevation, Elevation Difference and Name.

If you also select an Existing DTM, the report shows Ch, Offset, Design elevation, Point elevation, elevation differences from point to design, diff from existing to design, and Name.

The report can include Easting and Northing, a stripping depth and comma-separation for saving as a .CSV

TML date  Source
08/02/22     Geocomp Update or $250
 CHTXT

Convert stationing text to chainage text.

Convert text objects representing distance along an alignment from USA stationing format, for example nn+nnn.nn, to UK and Australian chainage format, for example CH nnnnn.nn.

See also CHNGTEXT and SNR.

TML date  Source
08/02/22     Geocomp Update or $250
 CIRCLE

Create a circular pline.

Create a closed pline of four equal arcs centred on a specified location, with a specified radius.

See also GCARC and CURVESOL.

Command dateGuideMenuSourceGC
12/03/09HELPTM Draw|​Pline|​Circle Field Data Module 29
 CLEANUP

Remove superfluous points from sets and plines.

Remove duplicate sequential, 2D and arc points from selected sets and vertices from zero-length plines. Any such accidentally created points and vertices can cause commands to behave in unexpected ways.

More precisely:

  • Delete from sets every point that has the same point number as the previous point,
  • Delete the last point in a set if it is an arc centre,
  • Delete sets which are zero-length arcs,
  • Remove all centre-points from two-point sets,
  • Remove from zero-length plines all splines and any more than two vertices, and
  • Relayer to layer 0 every point in a set that has no elevation and is at the same X,Y location as any point with an elevation.
  • Report all the changes, if requested.

See also DUPLTRIS.

TML date  SourceGC
08/02/22     Geocomp Update or $250 30
 CLEARMESS

Clear text from the message scroll window.

See also MESSAGESCROLL.

Command dateGuideMenuSource146
12/03/09HELPTM Windows|​Clear message scroll Field Data Module 146
 CLIP

Clip plines and sets to boundaries and delete objects.

Clip plines or sets where they cross selected closed boundaries and delete points, sets, plines and text.

Dialog

Mode
Inside
Delete selected plines, sets, points and text entirely inside any of the boundaries, break selected sets and plines at the boundaries and delete the broken sets and plines inside the boundaries.
Outside
Delete selected plines, sets, points and text entirely outside the boundaries, break selected sets and plines at the boundaries and delete the broken sets and plines outside the boundaries.
Break
Break selected sets and plines at the boundaries.
Bound
Select boundaries by closed sets, closed plines or text objects.
Objs
Select points, sets, plines or text objects to be clipped or deleted.
OK
Clip and delete objects.
Cancel
Cancel

Notes

The clipping boundary of text objects is at the extents of their rectangular text boxes at the text clip margin defined in DRAFTSET (even when the text has a border that is not rectangular).

When selecting text by Window or Crossing, the location of the insertion point determines whether the text is selected.

Points are deleted if you select them. Selecting a set does not also select the points.

Blocks and tables are not selected. Text, blocks and tables are not broken.

Alternative ways to clip

  • To clip multiple objects outside one closed boundary, use CLIP Outside.
  • To clip multiple objects inside one closed boundary, use CLIP Inside.
  • To break multiple objects at one closed boundary, use CLIP Break.
  • To break one set or pline at a location, use BREAK.
  • To remove segments from sets or plines, use DELETE​SEGMENT.
  • To clip multiple objects outside all selected boundaries, use CLIPOUT.
  • To trim or extend multiple plines to an open boundary, use GCEXTEND.
  • To trim one pline or set to a distance or to one or more boundaries, use TRIM.
  • To trim or extend selected plines to a maximum length, use GC88.
  • To clip DTMs, use GCCLIP.
  • To clip and merge DTMs, use DTMMATCH, GC33, GC33MULT, GCCLIP or GCMERGE.
  • To automatically clip contours, profiles and cross sections from dead regions, see SETSMOOTH.
  • To clip Xlines, use GCXLINES.
  • To clip hatching or other blocks, use EXPLODE or GCEXPLOD then CLIP Outside.
  • To clip a block to a dynaview, see BLOCK and SCLBLKS.
  • To clip an image, use IMAGE Clip or Dynaimage.
  • To clip subsurface lines in cross sections, see RDDESIGNSET.
  • To clip a road template at a surface, see SHAPE Tie to ground.
  • To clip contours under labels during creation, use CONTOURSET .
  • To clip objects to text, use CLIP Inside.
  • To create solid hatching behind text, use TEXTBACK. If the hatching is the same colour as the background, this looks the same as clipping objects to text.
  • To display objects obscured by other objects, use RENUMREC.

Command dateGuideMenuSourceGC
12/03/09HELPTM Edit|​Clip Field Data Module 254
 CLIPOUT

Clip objects outside multiple boundaries.

Clip all objects outside all selected boundaries.

Break selected objects at selected boundaries then delete all parts of the selected objects outside any of the boundaries.

For other variations on clipping, see CLIP.

The TML name is CLIP_OUT. If CLIPOUT does not run from the command line, create an alias from CLIPOUT to CLIP_OUT or enter CLIP_OUT.

TML date  Source 
08/02/22     Geocomp Update or $250  
 CLOSE

Close the current project without exiting Terramodel.

Close the current project file (.PRO) and the corresponding project lock (.PLK) file that was opened with the project.

Command dateGuideMenuSourceGC
12/03/09HELPTM File|​Close project Field Data Module 255
 CLOSEFIG

Close selected sets and plines.

For selected sets and plines, create a segment from the end to the start.

Optionally, use name masks from a file.

To limit your selection by name, create and select a Name Mask file (.NML). Names specified in the file may contain wildcard characters of ? and *. For example, tree_* would select tree_pine and tree_oak.

See also ISCLOSED.

TML date MenuSourceGeocomp
29/10/08   Edit|​Close lines Field Data Module 126
 CMD

Open Windows command prompt.

Open Windows command prompt.

See also COMMAND, EXEC and RUN.

Batch date  SourceGC
13/05/18    Geocomp Update or $200 200
 COLOR

Modify the color of selected objects.

Modify the color number of selected objects to a single specified color number in the range 0 to 255.

Objects with color 0 are reported as having color BYLAYER, and are displayed in the point or line color of their layer.

Blocks with Map Color flag turned ON are displayed in the color of the block. Blocks with Map Color flag turned OFF are displayed in the color of the objects in the block.

Since Terramodel 10.40, COLOR command is normally installed with US English but not with British English. Geocomp Updates install both COLOR and COLOUR.

If COLOR command is not available, either

  • Enter COLOUR at the command line,
  • ALIAS from COLOUR to COLOR, or
  • Install COLOR.TML or a Geocomp Update available from Geocomp Systems.

TML dateGuideMenuSourceGC
10/10/18HELPTM Modify|​Color Secured 40
 COLORCODE

Modify the color of points relative to a tunnel design.

Modify the colour of points by 3D distance from the current roadway.

Operation

  1. Create and make current a roadway template defining a tunnel
  2. Use TUNNELDTM to unwrap a layer of points to be compared with the tunnel design
  3. Run COLORCODE to select points and modify colours
    Tunnel Layer
    Select an unwrapped layer of points to compare with the design
    Select points:
    Select points on the selected layer
    Settings
    Limits and ranges
    Assign colour numbers within ranges of 3D distances.
    Create|Modify point
    Create new points on a new layer or modify the colour of existing points
    Layer
    Specify a new layer for new points
    Assign offset to elevation
    Assign 3D distances to the elevations of new points
    Interpolation spacing
    Interpolate 3D distances from cross sections extracted at the specified spacing
    Colour
    Modify the colours
    Close
    Close the command

See also

COLORPT
Modify colour all points on layer by elevation and contour interval
HDMS
Modify colour by depth

Installation

Since Terramodel 10.40, COLORCODE is normally installed with US English but not with British English.

If COLORCODE is not available, try

Command dateGuideMenuSourceGC
12/03/09 Tunnel Training Guide Tunnels|​Modify color codes Secured 342
 COLORCON

Change the colour of plines by contour interval.

Increment the colour number of selected pline contours based on elevation.

Change the colour of plines, with elevations, within each normal contour interval, to the next colour number. The colour numbers increment by 1 and repeat when the specified number of colours is reached.

Use COLORCON with other commands. Here are some examples:

Bands of colour

To colour isopachs of pavement depth at 0.1m intervals in 1.0m bands

  1. CONTOURSET the normal interval to 0.1 and Index interval to 1
  2. CONTOUR the isopach surface
  3. CONTOURSET the normal interval to 1.0
  4. COLORCON with, say 20, colours—a number large enough so the colours don't start repeating
  5. Modify COLOUR by colour if required.

Reduce the number of contours

To remove every second contour pline supplied at an interval of 0.25

  1. CONTOURSET the normal interval to 0.25
  2. COLORCON with number of colours = 2
  3. DELETE the contour plines with elevations ending in .25 or .75 by colour

Ribbon effect

To modify the colour to match the last digit of the elevation

  1. CONTOURSET the normal interval to 1
  2. CONTOUR the surface
  3. COLORCON with number of colours = 10

Contours with an elevation ending in 1 will be coloured 1, those ending in 2 will be coloured 2, and so on. Contours with an elevation ending in zero (0) will have colour 15 as the colour, since zero is reserved to designate colour by layer.

Change Index contour

To change the index contour of supplied contour plines from 0.25 to 1.0

  1. CONTOURSET the normal interval to 0.25
  2. COLORCON with number of colours = 4
  3. RELAYER the 1.0 interval contour plines by colour
  4. COLOUR the contours by layer

If your contour interval is less than 1.0m, use the COLORCON installed with the Geocomp Update.

COLOURCON is an alias for COLORCON.

See also

COLORPT
Modify point colours by contour interval
GCCOLCON
Colour contours by cut and fill
SHADEDTM
Hatch by elevation range
3DVISUALISER
Create an image coloured by elevation range
COLORCODE or COLOURCODE
Modify point colours by 3D distances from the current roadway.

TML date MenuSourceGC
08/02/22   Modify|​Colour contours by interval
Modify|​Color contours by interval
Modify|​Colour code contours
Modify|​Color code contours
Geocomp Update or $200 156
 COLORPT

Modify the colour of points by contour interval.

Modify the colour number of selected points by increment withing elevation ranges.

Modify the colour of points by elevation ranges determnined by the normal interval in CONTOURSET. The colour numbers increment by 1 and repeat when the specified number of colours is reached.

Colouring points by elevation helps you visualize the direction of the ground slope and identify points considered spikes or depressions.

Colour 15 is used in place of colour 0. If you specify the number of colours as 5, the colour numbers used will be 15, 1, 2, 3, and 4.

For example, to colour points within bands of 1.0m elevation,

  1. CONTOURSET the normal interval to 1.0
  2. COLORCON with number of colours large enough so the colours don't start repeating
  3. Modify COLOUR by colour if required.

See also

COLORCON
Colour contour plines by interval in a similar way
COLORCODE or COLOURCODE
Modify point colours by 3D distances from the current roadway.

TML dateGuide SourceGC
08/02/22 Tunnel Training Guide   Secured 156
 COLOUR

Modify the colour of selected objects.

Change the colour number of selected objects to a single specified colour number in the range 0 to 255.

Objects with colour 0 are reported as having colour BYLAYER, and are displayed in the point or line colour of their layer.

Blocks with Map Colour flag turned ON are displayed in the colour of the block. Blocks with Map Colour flag turned OFF are displayed in the colour of the objects in the block.

Since Terramodel 10.40, COLOUR command is normally installed with British English but not with US English. Geocomp Updates install both COLOR and COLOUR.

If COLOUR command is not available, either

  • Enter COLOR at the command line,
  • ALIAS from COLOR to COLOUR, or
  • Install COLOUR.TML or Geocomp Update available from Geocomp Systems.

Command date MenuSourceGC
10/10/18   Modify|​Colour Secured 40
 COLOURCODE

Modify the colour of points relative to a tunnel design.

Modify the colour of points by 3D distance from the current roadway.

Operation

  1. Create and make current a roadway template defining a tunnel
  2. Use TUNNELDTM to unwrap a layer of points to be compared with the tunnel design
  3. Run COLOURCODE to select points and modify colours
    Tunnel Layer
    Select an unwrapped layer of points to compare with the design
    Select points:
    Select points on the selected layer
    Settings
    Limits and ranges
    Assign colour numbers within ranges of 3D distances.
    Create|Modify point
    Create new points on a new layer or modify the colour of existing points
    Layer
    Specify a new layer for new points
    Assign offset to elevation
    Assign 3D distances to the elevations of new points
    Interpolation spacing
    Interpolate 3D distances from cross sections extracted at the specified spacing
    Colour
    Modify the colours
    Close
    Close the command

See also

COLORPT
Modify colour all points on layer by elevation and contour interval
HDMS
Modify colour by depth

Installation

Since Terramodel 10.40, COLOURCODE is normally installed with British English but not with US English.

If COLOURCODE is not available, try

Command dateGuideMenuSourceGC
12/03/09 Tunnel Training Guide Tunnels|​Modify colour codes Secured 342
 COLRLINE

Modify colours and linetypes of selected objects by layer.

Modify the colours and linetypes of selected objects according the layer of the object and a mapping file. The file format is

layer,colour,linetype

See C:\TMCUSTOM\​GEOCOMP\​GEOCOMP.LCL for an example.

COLORLINE and COLOURLINE are aliases for COLRLINE.

See also LAYERMAP, GC16 and GC16ADC.

TML dateGuide Source 
08/02/22HELPTM   Geocomp Update or $250  
 COMMAND

Command line.

Open a new command line.

Open a new command line so that a command can be entered from the keyboard while another command is still active.

To start a new command line, select Command from the File menu or press Ctrl+Shift+C.

If you open a new command line while you are still in a command, when this command is complete, control is returned to the previous command.

If the command line has disappeared, see Command​Toggle.

See also CMD.

Command dateGuideMenuSource 
12/03/09HELPTM File|​Command line
Settings|​Command line
Field Data Module  
 Command​Toggle

Toggle on or off the visibility of the command line.

Toggle an invisible command line on, select Command line from the Window menu.

The command line toggle only controls visibility, unlike COMMAND in the File menu which opens a new command line on top of the current command.

Command​Toggle is an ALIAS to MACRO​PLAY COMMANDTOGGLE which simulates the Command line command in the Window menu.

Macro date MenuSource 
08/02/22   Window|​Command line
File|​Macro|​Play|​command​toggle
Standard
User-​definable
 
 COMPASS

Place a compass rose.

Place a compass rose block with true north and optional magnetic deviation and date of survey.

Requires comp-tn.blk and comp-mn.blk which are supplied with the TML.

TML date  SourceGC
08/02/22     Geocomp Update or $200 616
 COMPGRID

Compactor Grid Settings.

Compactor Grid Settings.

TML date  Source 
08/02/22     Geocomp Update or $250  
 CONFORM

Report road thickness conformance.

Report whether a road design and subgrade have been constructed with a pavement thickness within tolerance.

Compare selected as-built survey points with a roadway design surface.

The design surface could be a roadway or a finish surface defined in surface manager.

In the Settings, specify a bottom DTM for thickness calculations, a chainage grouping distance, a depth from design, upper and lower elevation tolerances and maximum and minimum thicknesses.

The report shows, for each as-built point within the roadway, the chainage, horizontal offset, point elevation, roadway elevation, point conformance and pavement thickness.

The point conformance compares the elevation of each surveyed point with the elevation of the design surface, less any specified depth from design. If the elevation difference is out of tolerance, the report also shows the tolerance and the amount outside tolerance.

The pavement thickness check compares the elevation of each surveyed point with the bottom DTM. If the thickness is out of tolerance, the report shows the maximum or minimum thickness and the amount outside tolerance.

The report also includes a summary with tolerance percentages, maxima, minima and standard deviation.

For example, suppose you are constructing a road with 130mm (+/- 5mm) asphalt over 300mm (+/-10mm) crushed rock. Construct the subgrade at what's supposed to be 430mm below design. Survey the subgrade to get the "Bottom DTM". Place the rock. Survey again to get "AsBuilt Pts". In CONFORM command, select the design road and AsBuilt Pts. In Settings, enter a depth from design of 0.13, maximum thickness of 0.310 and minimum thickness of 0.290. Reconstruct the rock surface where outside conformance. Resurvey. Rerun CONFORM with the new AsBuilt Pts and other values the same to prove conformance and to create a new Bottom DTM. Place the asphalt. Survey the asphalt. Rerun CONFORM with same design road, new AsBuilt Pts, depth from design 0.00, max thickness 0.135 and min thickness 0.125.

TML date  Source 
08/02/22     Geocomp Update or $500  
 CONLABZ

Modify elevation of contours by labels.

Modify elevation of contour plines from contour labels.

See also GCCONTXT.

      Source  
      Hamilton  
 CONNECT

Connect plines or sets across a gap.

Connect two plines to form a single pline or two sets to form a single set connected by a new segment across the gap between the ends nearest to the selected locations.

Pick anywhere on the object nearest the end that you wish to be connected to the other line.

The resulting object retains the properties of the first object including colour and record number. Any objects that refer to either object line thereafter refer to the modified object.

Tick "Repeat" to select the other end of the second line as the nearest end of the first line. Click Cancel to close the command.

If either pline is splined, the new pline will be splined.

See also JOIN which requires the ends to have common locations.

TML dateGuideMenuSourceGC
29/10/08 RG 149 Edit|​Connect Field Data Module 15
 CONTENTS

Function key F1

Help Table of Contents.

Open the Table of Contents for help by selecting Contents from the Help menu.

From the Terramodel Help menu, select Contents to open the Table of Contents, Index and Search tabs for Terramodel Help, Import-Export Help and Raw Data Editor Help.

Sometimes, only the Indexes open.

If a Microsoft web page with a title like "Error opening Help in Windows-based programs" opens instead, WinHlp32 is not enabled. WinHlp32 is standard for Windows XP, is optional for Windows Vista, 7, 8 and 8.1 and is not available for Windows 10. That web page provides instructions and links to install WinHlp32 on Windows versions Vista, 7, 8 and 8.1.

This TMLLIST incorporates the help for all commands in Terramodel Help, Import-Export Help and Raw Data Editor Help.

If a current Geocomp Update has been installed and a Geocomp menu file has been selected (MENUCFG) from C:\​TMCustom\​Geocomp, the Index submenu of the Help menu includes the Indexes to Import-Export Help and Raw Data Editor Help.

Entering CONTENTS at the command line can open the Terramodel Help Index or this TML List here at CONTENTS.

If WinHlp32 is enabled, pressing F1 while using a standard Terramodel command often opens Help at a relevant page.

Help files, or just the Indexes, can be opened from the command line for Terramodel (HELPTM), Import and Export (HELPIE), Raw Data Editor (HELPRDE), Toolboxes and Workspaces (HELPTOOLBOX), 3D Visualiser (HELPTVL), Visualizer Complete HELPTV and Geodimeter File Editor (HELPGFE).

Help for GFE, RDE, TOOLBOX, TV and 3D Visualiser is also included in their own menus, if WinHelp32 has been installed.

See also ABOUT, GCHELP and DOCUMENTS.

Table of Contents

  • Terramodel
    • How to use Terramodel
    • Menu Options
    • Terramodel Commands
    • Terramodel and Geodimeter
  • Import-Export
    • Download/Import Introduction
    • Export/Upload Introduction
    • Device Options
    • Download
    • Import (Command)
    • Export (Command)
    • Upload
    • Import/Export Scripts
    • Import/Export Script Managers
  • The Raw Data Editor
    • Intro to the Raw data Editor
    • RDE Features
    • Field Data Reduction - Fast Start
    • RDE Dialog box
    • Terramodel Graphics Interface
    • Surveying Basics with RDE
    • RDE - Calculation methods
    • Key names, Data Tags

Command date   MenuSource 
12/03/09   Help|​Contents
Help|​Index|​Import + export
Help|​Index|​Raw data editor
Help|​Index|​Toolbox
Help|​Index|​3D Visualizer
Help|​Index|​3D Visualiser
Help|​Index|​Visualiser Complete
Help|​Index|​Geodimeter file editor
Function key F1
Standard
Geocomp Update
 
 CONTOUR

Extract pline contours from a DTM.

Create plines interpolated from a DTM at elevation intervals.

The extent of the DTM is controlled by LINKSET Settings.

The intervals, labelling, linetypes and layers are controlled by CONTOUR​SET.

The contours are created in the view that has the most contourable points on the specified layer. This DTM view is not necessarily the Plan view or the current view.

Command dateGuideMenuSourceGC
12/03/09HELPTM DTM|​Contour Secured 289
 Contour​AtElev

Create plines at a specified contour elevation.

Create contour plines everywhere a specified elevation intersects a specified DTM layer.

The labelling and minimum length are controlled by CONTOUR​SET.

Command date Guide Menu Source GC
12/03/09 HELPTM DTM|​Generate contours at elev Secured DTM 4
 CONTOUR​SET

Configure contour settings.

Set the contour interval and labelling values for use by contouring commands.

For example, to create contours at 0.25 m elevation intervals and labelled index contours at 1.0 m intervals, turn on Label contours, specify a Normal interval of 0.25, an Index interval of 4 and a Label nth contour value of 4, then use CONTOUR to generate contour plines.

To label index contours, enter the same value for index interval and label nth contour. To label contours at all intervals, enter 1 for both.

Labeling

Label nth contour
Enter the number of normal contour intervals per labelled contour interval
Dist. between labels
The distance along the contours at which the labels will be placed
Label text style
The text style used to label the contours
Border style
The text border style for the contour labels
Mirror elevation
Label contours with negative elevations with positive values, and vice versa
Clip lines under labels
Clip index contour lines within their elevation labels with text clip margins set by DRAFTSET
Force placement of labels
Place labels based strictly on the distance between labels, or move the label at bends if needed. Clipping text at bends can change the shape of contours.
Label contours
Label those contours with elevations that are evenly divisible by the normal interval multiplied by the label nth contour interval factor
Label ends of open contours
Label the ends of open contour plines

Line construction

Normal interval
Enter the normal contour interval
Index interval
Enter the number of normal contour intervals per index contour interval
Minimum length
Enter the minimum length of contour plines
Splining
None
Do not smooth contour plines
B Spline
Smooth contour plines using B-spline curves which pass inside the control points (vertices)
Overhauser
Smooth contour plines with Overhauser curves that pass through the control points (vertices) and remain tangential to line segments
Exponential
Create contours at exponential intervals for surfaces such as bacterial concentration and corrosivity
Show depression contours
Create the lowest contour line in a depression using a specified linetype such as DEPRESSION

Layer assignment

Normal
Specify the layer for normal contours. Use * as a wildcard for the DTM layer name. For example, enter *_CON to create normal contours extracted from the DTM_EXIST layer on layer DTM_EXIST_CON.
Index
Specify the layer for index contours. Use * as a wildcard for the DTM layer name. For example, enter *_ICON to create index contours extracted from the DTM_EXIST layer on layer DTM_EXIST_ICON.
Overwrite layers
Delete all objects on the contour and index contour layers before creating new contour plines

OK or Cancel

OK
Enable other commands to create contour plines at elevations divisible by the normal interval on the normal contour layer, and index contour plines and labels on the index contour layer
Cancel
Close the commands without changing an contour settings

See also

CONTOUR​ATELEV
Create contours at one elevation only
COLORCON
Colour plines by elevation interval
COLORPT
Colour points by elevation interval
COLORCON
Colour objects by positive, negative or zero elevation
GCMULCON and GCONECON
Modify elevations of plines by contour interval
LABEL​CONTOURS
Label individual contours
LINKSET
Display unlabelled contours at the normal interval in the link colour
DTMALL
Refresh all DTM layers and update project variables for displaying EAT text of the contour interval and index contour interval

Command dateGuideMenuSourceGC
12/03/09HELPTM Settings|​Contour settings Field Data Module 43
 CONTOUR​VOL

Compute volumes from contour plines.

Computes volumes for individual mounds or depressions based on contour plines.

The volumes are obtained by using the average-end-area method, where the area of a closed contour is determined, then averaged with an adjacent contour, and multiplied by the contour interval to obtain an incremental volume. Incremental volumes are then added together to obtain a total volume.

This method is less accurate than that of the EARTHWORK command, but can provide an alternative approximation of mound and depression volumes.

Use the ContourVol command in two different modes:

Line
Select a series of closed contour plines representing a mound or depression. Click the Volume button to display the accumulated volume in the message scroll area. If you wish to display a more detailed report that can be saved or sent to a printer, click the Report button.
Digitizer
Digitize closed contours representing a mound or depression.
  1. Input the elevation of the first contour using the Elev elevation control.
  2. Digitize a series of points for the first contour using the Loc point control. You must provide a minimum of three points for each contour.
  3. If you select points by typing coordinates in the Loc point control, click the Pt. button to enter the point and proceed to the next point.
  4. When you are done digitising points, click the End button to close the contour.
  5. Repeat for successive contours until you have defined the mound or depression.
  6. Click the Report button to display a detailed report that can be saved or sent to a printer.

The selected contours must be closed, assigned an elevation, and form a continuously rising mound or a continuously falling depression. If the contours are open due to labels, use GCMATCH to create plines across the gaps, then JOIN the contours.

Command dateGuideMenuSourceGC
12/03/09HELPTM DTM|​Volumes from contours Secured DTM V
 CONVDMS

Convert degrees, minutes and seconds (DMS) to decimal degrees or decimal to DMS.

Convert X and Y coordinates of selected points from ddd.mmss format to decimal degrees or decimal degrees to ddd.mmss format.

For example, a point at 123°27′24.4″ East, 89°39′15.6″ North, imported into Terramodel at 123.27244,89.39156, can be transformed by CONVDMS into decimal degrees at 123.45678, 89.65433.

DMS data can be stored in real-number fields using ddd.mmss format long as the applications that process those fields understand how to parse them. These can be imported from .CSV files into Terramodel as X and Y coordinates without error messages, but such coordinates will be incorrect for use in Terramodel until they are transformed to decimal degrees. Often, such coordinates are then transformed to metres or feet.

If your ASCII data includes other characters such as °, or spaces, remove them before importing into Terramodel.

Functions

Pts:
Select points to be transformed
From DDD.MMSS to DEC Degrees
Specify transformation from DMS to Decimal degrees
From DEC Degrees to DDD.MMSS
Specify transformation from Decimal degrees to DMS
Report
Report the new coordinates to P3Pad
Swap X and Y
Swap Lat|Long to Long|Lat during the transformation if required
OK
Complete the transformation
Cancel
Close the command without transforming any points

To convert from decimal degrees to feet or metres, use GCCOORD or COORDCON to select a From coordinate system with a name that starts with LL.

GCCOORD expresses and expects Latitudes south of the equator to be expressed as negative Y values. To convert Northings to Southings or vice versa, use GC56 with Y*-1.

The TML name is CONV_DMS. If CONVDMS does not run from the command line, create an alias from CONVDMS to CONV_DMS or enter CONV_DMS.

TML date  Source 
08/02/22     Geocomp Update or $200  
 CONVERT

Convert sets to plines or plines to sets.

Convert sets to plines or plines to sets. Any lines that are already of the desired type are not converted.

Colour, linetypes and layer names are retained. Names, start chainage and other attributes are not retained.

Convert Options

Lines
Select the lines to be converted
To (Set or Pline)
Select the desired type of lines
Del old
Delete the original lines
Dup pts ok
If ON, create all new points for sets; if OFF, connect sets to any existing points at the vertices
Lay
Create the new plines or sets on the current layer. If OFF, create on the same layer as the original object.

Tips on using Convert

GCCONVRT
GCCONVRT is an alternative which retains all the attributes such as Name and is much faster.
Dup pts ok
CONVERT can take a long time to convert a lot of plines to sets, especially if "Dup pts ok" is OFF.
Duplicate point removal
Use DTM formation or GC31 instead of CONVERT to remove duplicate points.
Elevation
When converting a set to a pline, the elevation of the new pline is derived from the first point in the set.
Plines and sets
You will keep or lose information specific to the object type. Plines converted to sets lose any spirals and splines. Sets converted to plines lose links to points and therefore their elevations, and also lose any lot number labels.
Visibility
Any hidden sets segments are omitted resulting in multiple plines. To control the visibility of set segments see DISPLAY​SET Ignore hide, HIDE and REVEAL.
Arcs
When converting a pline to a set, a new point object is created for the radius point and at each PC and PT. If multiple arcs use the same arc points, duplicate points will be created at each arc point.
Chords
To create new sets or plines made up of straight segments, use GCCHORD.
Command dateGuideMenuSourceGC
12/03/09HELPTM Edit|​Convert Field Data Module 292
 CONVSET

Set slope convention.

Define the slope convention (ratio preference) according your local practice.

Choose either Horizontal run: vertical rise (e.g. 4:1) or Vertical rise: horizontal run (e.g. 1:4).

These conventions can be overridden by Terramodel settings or report formats. Even within the one project, the convention may vary, so check in each case.

Command dateGuideMenuSource 
12/03/09HELPTM Settings|​​Convention settings Field Data Module  
 COORDCON

Convert between coordinate systems with a look-up table that emphasises USA and UTM.

Convert points, plines, blocks and text between predefined geodetic coordinate systems using predefined ellipsoids and datums by the seven-​parameter or NTv2 distortion grid method.

Dialog

Select From and To Coordinate Systems
Select Search to select the From and To coordinate systems.
World regions
Select a region of the world then select a system from that region from the drop-down list.
Define ellipsoid | Define datum | Define CS
If desired coordinate systems are not in any of the regional lists, new ellipsoids, datums and coordinate systems can be defined. Geocomp Systems adds new definitions requested by Customer Care Members. Add coordinate systems from a file by ADDMAPSY.
List selected
List details of the selected coordinate system.
List all
List details of every available ellipsoid, datum and coordinate system.
Any point
List the coordinates of a location in both From and To coordinate systems.
List the coordinates of a location in both From and To coordinate systems. For latitudes and longitudes, enter in DDD.MMSS.ssssss format.
Multiple objects
Select Objs:
Select objects to be transformed.
List
List the coordinates of selected points in both From and To coordinate systems.
Convert
Transform the coordinates of select objects from the From coordinate system to the To coordinate system.

Notes

The look-up tables in COORDCON emphasise USA and UTM coordinate systems. GCCOORD is a similar command that transforms the same coordinate systems but which emphasises Australian and New Zealand systems. Both call the same Mentor database files COORDSYS, DATUMS and ELIPSOID files in C:\Program files (x86)\​Trimble\​Shared\​Mentor.dir. Both commands require COGO module. "List selected" in GCCOORD shows more details.

Coordinate systems with names that start with LL use latitudes and longitudes. The others use eastings and northings.

The principles and operation are described in detail in Terramodel 10 User's Guide Chapter 13: Using Coordcon.

Use MEASUNIT to check the project units first. If converting to or from using feet, check whether to use Survey feet or International Survey feet.

Conversion between coordinate systems based on NAD-27 and NAD-83, are only accurate to within about 15 centimeters (RMS) in the contiguous 48 states since it uses the NADCON overlay.

Always make a backup copy of your project file prior to converting coordinates for the points in your file.

Select objects by View or by Layer to avoid missing objects that are invisible or outside a window.

Define a Coordinate System, Ellipsoid or Datum.

Many Coordinate Systems that are not already included, can be easily added by ADDMAPSY, or by installing a Geocomp Update, or by Geocomp Systems. Please read Terramodel 10 User's Guide Chapter 13: Using Coordcon before creating your own.

To define a coordinate system:

  1. Backup all the files and folders under C:\Program files (x86)\​Trimble\​Shared\​Mentor.dir.
  2. Run COORDCON
  3. Click Coordinate Systems
  4. Click Search
  5. To list or define ellipsoids, click Define Ellipsoid
  6. To list or define datums, click Define Datum
  7. Click Define CS
  8. Select the datum
  9. Enter a short name for the new Coordinate System into the Coordinate System Name box
  10. Enter an appropriate description
  11. Select the Projection
  12. Enter required information into the active boxes
  13. Click New CS to add the coordinate system to the dictionary.
  14. Click on OK.
  15. Click Set current to select the coordinate system
  16. Close COORDCON
  17. Manually edit the COORDCON.LUT found in the Terramodel Search Path to add the name of your Coordinate System.
  18. Run COORDCON to confirm that you can select the coordinate system, and that your test data with known coordinates transforms correctly.
  19. If you make a mistake at any stage, reinstate the backed up files and start again.

Commands that transform coordinates using the same database

GCLLGRID
Draw Latitude and Longitude grids and labels
FYATBOUT, GCKMLIN, GCKMLOUT, LLTABLE and SHADOW
Some other related commands

Commands that use other transformation systems

GC07 and GRIDPLAN
Transform when either coordinate system is not geodetic.
CONVDMS
Transform from latitudes and longitudes in decimal degrees to Degrees Minutes and Seconds expressed as DDD.MMsssss (or vice versa).
MEASUNIT
Convert between foot and metre coordinate systems.
CSM and GEOSYS
Manage Trimble coordinate systems.
GEOCALC
GeoCalc 4.20.

TML, LUT or DLL date GuideMenu SourceGC
08/02/22 UG 401
Nav notes
Cogo|​Utilities|​Coordinate conversion
HDMS|​Coordinate|​Coordinate transformation
Geocomp Update or $200 Geo​Calc
 COORDS

Display the Coordinate Scroll.

Display cursor coordinate data on a separate scroll dialog.

The data displayed varies depending on the current command, the current control type (locate, bearing, distance, offset, station, point, etc.) and the active view mode (plan, profile, sheet, cross section, etc.).

Coordinate Scroll Options

Coordinates
When the cursor is in the Plan view, display the Northing and Easting; in Profile view, the station | chainage and elevation; in Cross section view, the offset and elevation; and in Sheet view, X and Y. When a rubber band is used, display the X and Y differences from an anchor location to the cursor.
GPS Coordinates
Reserved for future use.
3-D Digitiser
Used when the digitizer responds with X, Y and Z values.
Bearing | Distance
Show the bearing and distance from the anchor point to the rubber band cursor when in the plan view mode.
Grade | Distance
Show the grade and distance from the anchor point to the rubber band cursor when in the Profile or Cross section view mode.
Station | Chainage | Offset
For a command like IDSTATION | IDCHAINAGE that has a a rubber band cursor from an active alignment, in the Plan view mode display the station | chainage and offset and show vertical lines at station | chainage in Profile view and Offset in the Cross section view.
Station | Chainage | DElevation
When rubber banding in the Profile view mode, display the station | chainage and the difference in elevation from the selected alignment to the cursor.
Layer | Elevation
Show the current DTM layer and the elevation on that DTM at the cursor location. Set the current DTM layer first using DTMCH or some other command that requires a DTM.
Slope | Aspect
Show the slope of the triangle on the current DTM layer at the cursor location and the direction of the surface slope. Layer | Elevation must be turned on to define the current DTM layer.
Visible
Control the visibility of the coordinate scroll.
Save
Save the current settings to the TMODWIN.INI file and exit the command.
Done
Keep the current settings for the current session without updating the TMODWIN.INI file, and exit the command.

Coordinate Scroll tips

  • Use the title bar to drag the scroll to a new location.
  • Minimize the scroll to a "Coordinates" icon at bottom left of the primary display, by clicking its minimize button at the top right corner of the dialog.
  • Maximize a minimized coordinate scroll icon by a double-click.
  • The coordinate scroll always opens on the primary display, even when moved to another display.
  • The Labels for each view are configured in the [ViewLabel] section of TMODWIN.INI by VIEWSET. The other Settings are stored in the [CoordScroll] section by COORDS.
  • The number of decimal places for Coordinate Scroll, and the precision of graphically entered points using a digitizer, is configured in [CoordScroll] by CoordNdec=. All these settings can be imported from a TMODWIN.INI with EDITINI.
  • The "Fix Status Bar / System, etc." button in EDITINI (amongst other things) makes the coordinate scroll visible with coordinates, bearings, distances, stations | chainages and offsets, moves the scroll to a location on the primary display and updates CoordNdec= to match the number of decimal places configured in Units Settings (UNITSSET) Precision. It does not change the View Labels.
  • If you lose the coordinate scroll, check that the scroll is "Visible". The scroll always opens on the primary display, and can then be moved to another display. If you still can't find the coordinate scroll, use FIXSCROLL | RECOVERSCROLL | CORDSCRL to reset the display location only, the "Fix Status Bar / System, etc." button in EDITINI to reset defaults, or use EDITINI to import a known good [CoordScroll] section from a TMODWIN.INI.

See also

GC75
Report distance and grade between sets or plines
IDSTATION
Report station | Chainage at cursor
GCDTMDIF
Report DTM differences at cursor
GCSPOT
Report DTM elevation at cursor
GCDTMDIF
Report DTM differences at cursor

Command dateGuideMenuSourceGC
12/03/09HELPTM Window|​Coordinate scroll Field Data Module SDS
 COPY

Copy selected objects to a new location or layer.

Duplicate selected objects on a new layer or at a new location.

Options

3d
Enable entry of X, Y and Z into From and To coordinates, select 3d. Otherwise, enter X and Y only.
Lay
Copy the objects to the current layer, otherwise to their original layers.
From
If not blank, the location from which the distance and direction is computed.
From
If not blank, the location to which the distance and direction is computed

Tips

  • The coordinate order is controlled by VIEWSET.
  • The objects are moved by the distance and direction from the From location to the To location.
  • To enter a known coordinate shift, enter 0,0 (or 0,0,0 if 3D), in "From" and dX,dY( or dX,dY,dZ) in "To".
  • To assign starting point numbers for new points, use the "Start Pn" setting of POINTSET.
  • Not all properties are retained. For example, colours, names and contourability can be modified or omitted.
  • To copy objects to another layer without changing their location, while retaining many of the properties, use GCCOPY.
  • To make multiple copies, use MULTICOPY.
Command dateGuideMenuSourceGC
12/03/09HELPTM Edit|​Copy Field Data Module 178
 COPYROAD

Copy a roadjob to a new roadjob.

Copy a roadjob to a new roadjob retaining all roadways, registered alignments and phases.

This allows you to quickly recompute a new design without having to re-enter all the values or lose the old design.

The Settings allow you to choose whether to copy surfaces, design templates, subgrade templates, skips, super­elevations, design settings or mass haul information.

TML date  SourceGC
08/02/22     Geocomp Update or $200 415
 COPYRWAY

Copy one roadjob into a different roadjob.

Copy all roadways from one road job to a different roadjob.

This allows you to merge two road jobs. To copy some roadways, copy the whole roadjob then delete the roadways you don't want.

The Settings allow you to choose whether to copy surfaces, design templates, subgrade templates or supe​relevations.

TML date MenuSourceGC
08/02/22   Roads|​More...|​Copy roadjob Geocomp Update or $200 415
 COPYTEMP

Copy a roadway template to other templates with the same name.

Update all design or subgrade templates in a roadway which have the same template name by copying the design of a nominated template.

This saves having to repeat the same edits to multiple templates with the same template name or repeatedly use the Copy button in TMANAGER.

TML date MenuSourceGC
08/02/22   Roads|​More|​Copy template Geocomp Update or $200 413
 CORDSCRL

Recover a lost coordinate scroll dialog.

If you lose the coordinate scroll, check that the scroll is "Visible" in COORDS.

The scroll always opens on the primary display, and can then be moved to another display.

If you still can't find the coordinate scroll, enter FIXSCROLL or RECOVERSCROLL, aliases for CORDSCRL, at the command line to reset the display location to 600 pixels down and 600 pixels across from the top left corner of the primary display.

The location can also be reset using EDITINI by the "Fix Status Bar / System, etc." button or importing a known good [CoordScroll] section from a TMODWIN.INI.

TML date  SourceGC
08/02/22     Geocomp Update or $200 SDS
 COUNT

Count the number of objects of each type in each view.

Report the number of points, plines, text, sets, tables, attributes, dynaviews or blocks that exist in the Plan, Profile, Sheet, XSect, Super, View6, View7 or View8 views.

Only used object types and populated views are reported.

See also

OLIST
A very similar command for which COUNT can be an alias.
OLIST2
Count the same objects as COUNT and OLIST and report to P3pad.
LAYINFO
Count the number of objects and points by layer for selected objects.
DTMINFO
Count the number of points on DTM layers.
LIST
List layers, objects, points, unused points, sets, plines and lots.
VIEWSET
View settings including view names.

TML date MenuSourceGC
08/02/22   Reports|​Count objects Geocomp Update or $250 SDS
 CREATELL

Import lists of layers in layer lists.

Import layer lists, layers, layer colours and layer linetypes from a file

The format of the input file is layer_list,​layer_name,​line_colour,​point_colour,​linetype.

Start all comment lines with the character "#". The first line should be a comment line. Include the word "Update" anywhere after the # on the first line to update all layers in the input file, otherwise colours and linetypes apply to new layers only.

If the file contains any new layers, you are prompted whether to import new layers or import only the layer lists and retain the pre-existing layers.

Only the layer list and layer name fields are required. Background prominence is not imported.

Use LLISTSET to check that the layer lists have been created correctly.

Use LLRPT to export a file suitable for use with CREATELL.

See also CSV2ADC to import a list of layers while creating an AutoDraft Configuration file.

TML date  Source 
08/02/22     Geocomp Update or $250  
 CROSSCHK

Check for crossing sets or plines.

Create points in layer CROSSING wherever any selected sets or plines cross.

These new points have the name "Cross" followed by the layer names, and are labelled with symbol 40 (circle).

These points indicate where selected sets or plines cross any other selected set or pline.

Any previously created points on layer CROSSING will be deleted.

As each set or pline is checked against all the other sets and plines, the count will appear to speed up on large selections.

Use BLINECHK to check and report for crossing sets on a DTM layer.

TML date MenuSourceGC
08/02/22   Reports|​​Mark|​​Crossing lines Geocomp Update or $250 43
 CROWFOOT

Toggle on|off arrowheads (crowfeet) from leader lines.

Select a segment label text object and toggle its configuration to either display or not display the crow's feet leader lines that point to the label from the end of the line segment.

If the label is a user-​mode label, toggling crowfeet off will restore the normal leader line established by this command's settings.

To make clear which line segment is being labeled , use curved arrows projecting from the end points toward the label, which are referred to by some as crow’s feet. The crow’s feet are a form of leader line and part of the segment label text object. They dynamically mark the location of the specific points that the segment label refers to, moving in response to a relocation of either point as the label updates to indicate the revised geometry.

Dialog

Settings
Select a leader line line type that includes small arrows, such as CROW'S FOOT, and a gap, for crow's feet, and a 'normal' leader line style, linetype and gap for the User mode of LABELSEG.
Toggle
Toggle the crow’s feet off and on, unless the selected segment label text object was created using LABELSEG User mode, where the label is not placed alongside the segment but rather pulled back away from it, in which case when the crow’s feet are toggled on there are two leader lines — one pointing to each end point, and when toggled off, a single leader line is drawn to the center of the line segment using the "normal" leader line style and linetype.

Crow's foot settings

The crow's foot gap is the distance in project units between the point and the crow’s foot leader line. You could, for example, use a linetype that includes a hollow circle representing the property corner, and configure the crow’s foot gap so to crow's foot touches the circle.

The Normal ‘User’ Segment Label Leader Line is the leader line used to point to a line segment when the segment label was created using the User mode of LABELSEG, and when crow’s feet are toggled off. User mode is typically used on short line segments, along which there is not enough room for the label to be placed, even without crow’s feet, so when you toggle the crow’s feet off, these two leader lines are replaced by a single leader line, pointing to the midpoint of the line segment.

The 'normal' leader line gap is 0.00. Adjust for pen width if required.

TML dateGuideMenuSource 
29/10/08 RG 1223 Draft|​Crowfoot toggle Field Data Module  
 CSM

Coordinate System Manager.

Manage coordinate systems used by Trimble devices only.

If you import a Trimble survey .DC file using the IMPORT script, the coordinate system defined in that file is imported into the .PRO file and used by specific Trimble-related commands. For this to work, the coordinate system must be present in the current system database file CURRENT.CSD. Coordinate System Manager manages CURRENT.CSD.

Use Coordinate System Manager to

  • Browse your parameters
  • Define a local grid
  • Establish a new site if you are working in an area that is not adequately covered by the definitions provided
  • Create or edit a site, zone, datum, ellipsoid, or geoid
  • Duplicate records
  • Select the projection used by a zone
  • Select the ellipsoid of any datum
  • Specify vertical and horizontal adjustments to a zone and save them as a named site
  • Select a geoid model
  • Assign the files to be used by a geoid model or datum transformation
  • Download the latest coordinate system definitions (.ggf) from Trimble
  • Save As a new CSD to replace CURRENT.CSD.

To open Coordinate System Manager, launch the .exe (see below), type CSM in Terramodel with Geocomp Update P, use another Trimble application such as Business Center.

Installation

Terramodel 10.61 installs Coordinate System Manager 2.80 with its coordinate system definitions. To update to CSM 3.3.1.0 download, extract and then copy the files to C:\Program files (x86)\​Trimble\​Coordinate System Manager\. Trimble Business Center (TBC), Pathfinder and Geomatics Office (TGO) also install versions of CSM. Once CSM 3.3.1.0 or later is installed, run CSM and download the latest updates to the software and definitions.

CURRENT.CSD

Coordinate System Manager manages the CURRENT.CSD database. The Terramodel installation backs up CURRENT.CSD and replaces it with a old default. Manually replace CURRENT.CSD with another of the same file name and location, if you want. That file could be a copy of one of the back-ups or one created by Save As in Coordinate System Manager. See Tools | Options menu in CSM for the location of CURRENT.CSD and .GGF files (which is usually C:\ProgramData\​Trimble\​GeoData).

Some examples of Coordinate System Manager versions

VersionExecutableFor WindowsLogo colourFolder colour
2.80 C:\Program files\​​​Common Files\​​Trimble\​​Geodb\​​Geodb95.exe95 to 98BlueRed
2.90C:\​Program files\​​​Common Files\​​Trimble\​​Geodb\​Geodbnt.exe32-bitBlueRed
3.3.1.0C:\​​Program files (x86)\​​Trimble\​Coordinate System Manager\Coordinate​System​Manager.exe 64-bitGreenYellow

GeoSys

To view and change the Trimble coordinate system in a project file, see GEOSYS.

See also

COORDCON and GCCOORD
Transform coordinate systems without Coordinate System Manager.
AUSGEOID and GC54
Apply AUSGeoid elevation adjustments without Coordinate System Manager.

Alias dateGuideMenuSource 
08/02/22 In-built help Windows Start|​Trimble Office|​Coordinate System Manager Geocomp Update  
 CSTAKE

Report construction staking.

Report construction staking from roadway crosssection surfaces.

In generating a staking report, define a cross-section stakeline. A roadway cross-section often contains many lines representing the existing ground, pavement and subgrade surfaces, curbs, etc. The stakeline is the surface to be staked which may include a single surface or include the finished surface in some places and the bottom of the lowest subgrade in others. The cross-section stakeline can include points computed at horizontal and vertical offsets from certain cross-sections.

Dialog

DTM Settings
Open ROADDTM Settings (ROADDTM) to specify the cross-section surfaces for the stakeline, add offset points to the stakeline, and enter the chainage | station limits.
Stake settings
Control the point in the cross-section stakeline from which the reported staking data is to be based, limit the report to a particular portion of the stakeline, and specify the direction.
Reference | Point code
Specify any reference node on the cross-section stakeline by point code which can include * and ? wildcards, or report relative to the centre of the cross section.
Reference | Offset
Specify a node in a cross section that matches with the point code by entering a nearby offset, or report relative to the centre of the cross section.
Start | End
Limit the report to between a Start and End chainage | station range, specified by point code or offset.
Staking direction
Report list nodes from left to right or from right to left.
Report Format
Select a construction staking format file .RSF. or edit such a file with a text editor.
Screen
Report to P3Pad.
File
Report to a text file
Create
Create the construction staking reports
Close
Close CSTAKE command

Construction Staking Format File

The .RSF file contains both literal text that is simply repeated in the report, and tags that perform specific actions. The file is divived into two sections: Header and Data. There are three type of tags — Section Heading tags, Action tags and Data tags.

SECTION HEADING TAGS
Header
The header section is preceded by the tag {HEADER}. The lines of text that follow it and which precede the data section are placed as literal text into the report.
Data
The data section is preceded by the tag {DATA}. The following action tags and data tags are processed.
ACTION TAGS
The action tags some particular action in creating the report. The following action tags are supported. In the following, when reference is made to moving to a particular point, that means that the described point in the cross-section stakeline is to be the next point in the report.
{CENTER}
Move to the center of the cross-section stakeline
{LEFT}
Move to the leftmost point in the cross-section stakeline
{RIGHT}
Move to the rightmost point in the cross-section stakeline
{NEXT}
Move to the next point in the cross-section stakeline
{PREV}
Move to the previous point in the cross-section stakeline
{SEARCHL=XX}
Search to the left for a point with a point code "xx"
{SEARCHR=XX}
Search to the right for a point with a point code "xx"
DATA TAGS
Data tags are replaced by the actual cross-section stakeline data that they represent.
{CUTFILL}
Cut or fill at current node relative to existing ground ("Cut -3.45" or "Fill 0.37")
{DELTACF}
Cut or fill at current node relative to reference node or previous node ("Cut -3.45" or "Fill 0.37")
{DELTAZ}
Cut or fill at current node relative to reference node or previous node ("-3.45" or "0.37")
{DISTANCE}
Distance between reference node or current node, and the next node (always a positive number)
{EAST}
Easting of current node
{ELEVATION}
Elevation of current node
{NORTH}
Northing of current node
{OFFSET}
Offset of current node
{PTCODE}
Name of current node
{ROADDESC}
Description of current roadjob
{ROADNAME}
Name of current roadway
{SIDE}
Side of cross-section (Left or Right)
{SLOPE}
Slope from current node to next node
{STATION}
Station at cross-section
{SURFACE}
Name of selected surface or design surface
{TAB}
Tab character
{SEGNAME}
Name of the node at the end of a segment
{SEGDIST}
Segment distance
{SEGCUTFILL}
Segment cut or fill
{SEGZ}
Segment elevation difference

For an example report format file and output file, see pages 997 to 999 in the Terramodel Reference Guide.

TML dateGuideMenuSourceGC
29/10/08 RG 992 Road|​Reports|​Staking|​Construction Field Data Module 41
 CSV2ADC

Create AutoDraft Configuration (.ADC) file from .CSV. or .MAP.

Convert a table of feature codes into an ASCII Auto​Draft Configuration (.ADC) file and create new layers for use with AUTO​DRAFT.

.CSV

Use a spreadsheet to populate fields following these examples and save as a .CSV:

Feature Code Layer Name Colour Point or Line Description Block name Line Type Text Category
102 TOP 0 L Top of bank   SOLID   Topo
TR Trees 3 P Tree foliage TREE8   Wattle Veg

.MAP

Select a .MAP file created for use in MAPPOINTS command in this format:

Feature code,​lineype,​layer name,​line colour number

Create layers

Select "Create layers" to also create new layers in the current project with the layer name, point or line colour and linetype.

Process

To convert your feature code list from .CSV to .ADC and use in AutoDraft:

  1. Make up a table of feature codes in a spreadsheet
  2. Save that table as .CSV
  3. Use CSV2ADC to convert the .CSV to an .ADC in ASCII format
  4. Edit the .ADC in a text editor, if you want
  5. Open the .ADC in the AutoDraft Editor
  6. Edit or add any extra information using the AutoDraft Editor
  7. Save the binary .ADC file
  8. Use the binary .ADC with AUTO​DRAFT.

Defaults

The fields and values written to the .ADC file are derived from feature codes in the .CSV or .MAP. Default global codes are added.

The AutoDraft Editor saves .ADC files in a binary .ADC format that can only be opened by AutoDraft.

See also

PTS2ADC
Create points for testing AutoDraft
XML2ADC
Import a CodeDictionary from XML into ADC

TML date  SourceGC
08/02/22     Geocomp Update or $250 339
 CSV2TAB

Create table of text from .CSV or *.TXT file.

Create a table of text and plines from a comma-separated values (*.CSV) file or tab-separated (*.TXT) file.

Browse to select the input file and then select OK to create the table.

Settings

Loc
Enter the location of the top-left corner of the table.
Use first line in file as table heading
Create a heading on the first row of the table from the first line of the imput file.
Table heading
Enter a heading for the first row of the table. Leave blank to omit the heading row.
Heading Style
Select a text style for any heading.
Layer
Enter the layer for plines and text. The plines are created in the line colour.
Text style
Enter the text style for the data. Use a fixed-width font for numerical data.
Text Colour
Enter the colour for the text only.
Skip the first [ ] lines
Specify the number of lines at the beginning of the input file to be ignored.
Tab or Comma
Specify whether the input file is tab or comma-delimited.
Hatch background
Create hatching behind the table with specified pattern, colour and scale.

The height and width of the rows and columns are calculated from the text styles and view scale. The width of the columns vary to fit the longest text object in each column.

Lines of text with no delimiters are skipped. If your text includes commas, use a tab-delimited file. Both file formats can be saved from spreadsheet programs.

See also

GCTABLE
Create a coordinate table from points
LLTABLE
Create a coordinate table including latitude and longitude from points
TXTIN
Create rows of text from an external text file
TEXT
Create text which can include a link to an external file

TML date  Source 
08/02/22     Geocomp Update or $250  
 CSVATTEX

Report attributes to a .CSV file.

Report attributes of selected objects to a .CSV file.

See also

DISPFEAT
Display feature attributes
CSVATTIN
Import objects with attributes.

TML date  Source 
08/02/22     Geocomp Update or $250  
 CSVATTIN

Import coordinates with attributes from a .CSV file.

Import coordinates with attributes from a .CSV file.

See also

DISPFEAT
Display feature attributes
CSVATTEX
Export objects with attributes.

TML date  Source 
08/02/22     Geocomp Update or $250  
 CULDESAC

Create a cul-de-sac alignment

Create a cul-de-sac alignment at the end of a pline or set on the same layer.

Dialog

Select alignment
Select the horizontal alignment.
Culdesac type
Select one of four cul-de-sac types:
Typical
With three circular arcs
Typical cul-de-sac
Teardrop
With a central traffic island
Teardrop
Hammerhead
With a square end
Hammerhead cul-de-sac
Knuckle
With widening on the outside of a bend
Knuckle cul-de-sac
Properties
Define the properties for the selected type of cul-de-sac.
Typical
Enter radius of bulb, offset to left or right of bulb, radii and tangent lengths at entrance and street width, and radii for the island.
Teardrop
Enter radius of bulb, offset to left or right of bulb, right and left radius of entrance and street width.
Hammerhead
Enter length of hammerhead, right and left radius of entrance and street width.
Knuckle
Enter radius of knuckle, offset to inside or outside, tangent lengths and radii at entrance and street width.

Offsets defined in LAYOUT can be selected in Properties.

Create
Create points and sets on the current layer using the selected alignment, cul-de-sac type and defined properties.
Close
Close the command

See also CDSPROF.

Command dateGuideMenuSource 
29/10/08 HELPTM and RG 574 Cogo|​Streets|​Cul-de-sac Field Data Module  
 CURRENT

Select the current layer.

Select the current layer by selecting an object or from a list of existing layers.

See also

LAYER
Select or create the current layer from the toolbar
SETCURL
Select the current layer by selecting an object
LAYERNXT
Change the current layer to the next alphabetical layer
LAYERNEW
Create a new and current layer with parameters
LAYERSET
Change properties of layers

TML date  Source 
08/02/22     Geocomp Update or $250  
 CURSOR

Limit the direction and increment of cursor movement

Limit the direction and increment of cursor movement while drawing linework.

Cursor modes

None
No restriction on cursor direction
Ortho
Draw the cursor along an orthogonal line from the last point drawn, based on the azimuth in the Snap Settings
Perpendicular
Draw the cursor along a line perpendicular to the last line segment drawn
Snap settings
Change snap settings to control the increment

Command line

To change the cursor mode at the command line or in a toolbox,

For cursor modeEnter at command line
NoneCursor 0
Ortho onCursor 1
Ortho On|OffCursor -1
Perpendicular onCursor 2
Perpendicular On|OffCursor -2

Function keys

In the standard Trimble installation of Terramodel, function keys include:

KeyFunction
F7GRIDSET On|Off
F8CURSOR Ortho On|Off
F9SNAPSET On|Off
F11CURSOR Perpendicular On|Off

Function keys imported from a GEOCOMP...TMODWIN.INI, include on|off toggles for the display of point numbers (F7), point markers (F8), point elevations (F9) and point names (F11). See EDITINI to import [FunctionKeys].

Command dateGuideMenuSource 
12/03/09HELPTM Settings|​Cursor Field Data Module  
 CURVE

Insert or edit a pline curve.

Insert an arc, spiral, vertical, combining or Overhauser curve into a pline.

Select the type of curve to be inserted and the IP (also known as control point, vertex or Intersection Point) by clicking on or typing in the pline:cp.

After you select the curve type and vertex, click OK to select the curve properties.

Dialog

Mode
Select Arc, Spiral, Vertical, Combining or Overhauser mode.
Pine:cp
Select a vertex or curve in a pline.
Curve
Arc mode
Create a circular curve.
Select from
Arc len
Enter the arc length.
Chord
Enter the chord length.
Dc
Enter the degree of curvature as an angle.
External
Enter the shortest distance from the IP to the arc.
Mid-ord
Enter the longest distance from the arc to the chord.
Radius
Enter the radius of the arc.
Tangent
Enter the tangent distance between the end of the curve and the intersection point.
Spiral mode
Create a circular curve and two clothoid transition spirals.
Select from
Dc
Enter the degree of curvature as an angle
Radius
Enter the radius of the arc
and enter the length of
Back
the back (entry) spiral.
Ahead
the ahead (exit) spiral.
Vertical mode
Create a parabolic curve in a profile view.
Select from
Length
Enter the horizontal length of the VC.
Kfactor
Enter the K-factor.
Crest
Enter the crest elevation.
Sight (stopping)
Enter the stopping sight distance. The eye and object heights are taken from Design Settings (DESIGNSET).
Sight (passing)
Enter the passing sight distance. The eye and object heights are taken from Design Settings (DESIGNSET).
Point
Enter a location that the curve passes through.
Decurve
Remove the curve.
Combining
Insert or edit a curve combining two circular arcs and three clothoid transition spirals.
Enter
Spiral In
The length of the entry spiral.
First radius
The radius of the the first arc.
Combining spiral
The length of the spiral between the two arcs.
Second radius
The radius of the second arc.
Spiral Out
The length of the exit spiral.
% delta 1st arc
  • The portion of the total delta angle at the IP as divided between the two arcs (expressed as a positive value), or
  • The length of the first arc (expressed as a negative value).
Overhauser
Insert a spline curve that passes through the vertex.
Close
Close the command.

See also these commands which allow you to enter curves with alignments: PLINE, SEGEDIT and HALDATA commands.

Command dateGuideMenuSource84
12/03/09HELPTM Draw|​Arc|​Pline curve
Draw|​Pline|​Curve
Draw|​Arc|​Curve
Edit|​More...|​Curve in pline
Field Data Module 84
 CURVESOL

Compute arc properties.

Calculate and report the properties of an arc given two arc properties. No objects are created.

Dialog

Choose from two known arc properties
Enter two values of Radius, Chord length, Arc length, Delta angle, Mid-Ordinate length, External angle, Tangent length or Degree of Curvature.
Segment area
List the segment area of the computed arc.
Sector area
List the sector area of the computed arc.
Curve definition chord length
Solve the degree of curvature based on the arc definition or chord definition of a curve. For the chord definition, also enter the chord length.
Calculate
Once two arc properties have been entered, calculate the remaining values.
Cancel
Cancel the command.
Report
Report each of the arc properties to a P3Pad report.

Curve parameters are reported to the precision established in UNITSSET.

Restrictions

Arc property combinationRestriction
Arc length, chord Arc length must be greater than the chord distance
Arc length, tangent Arc length must be less than 2 times the tangent length
Chord, middle ordinate Chord distance must be greater than 2 times the middle ordinate
Chord, radius Chord distance must be less than 2 times the radius
Chord, tangent Chord distance must be less than 2 times the tangent
Delta, arc length Delta must not be equal to 360 degrees
Delta, radius Delta must not be equal to 360 degrees
Delta, chord (or external, middle ordinate, or tangent) Delta must be less than 180 degrees
External, middle ordinate The external distance must be greater than the middle ordinate
Middle ordinate, radius The middle ordinate must be less than the radius.

See also

See also CURVE, SCURVE and FILLET.

Command dateGuideMenuSource84
12/03/09HELPTM Cogo|​Utilities|​Curve solutions... Field Data Module 84
 CUTFILL

Move a design DTM and balance cut or fill volumes.

Move or rotate a design DTM while automatically adjusting elevations until the desired cut, fill or net volume to an existing DTM is reached.

Shift or rotate the design surface for a better fit. Click OK to accept the new design location.

Dialog

Orig
Select the original DTM layer.
Des
Select the design DTM layer.
Settings
Volume balance options
Adjust the balances on Nett, Cut or Fill volume until the entered volume is reached within the entered volume tolerance. To fix elevations, enter * for the volume.
Shrink Swell factors
Enter shrink and swell factors for volumes if not equal to 1.0.
Default Design Batter Slopes
Specify whether to also compute sets where batters from design DTMs intersect the existing surface at entered cut or fill slopes.
Report
Report to P3Pad
Shift
Shift the design DTM horizontally by selecting From and To Locations.
Rotate
Rotate the design DTM about a location.
OK
Adjust the elevations of the design DTM.
Cancel
Cancel the command without making more adjustments.

Notes

  • Any changes to shrink or swell factors are also made to EARTHWORK Settings.
  • Batter (tie-in) cut and fill slopes are entered by DESIGNSET and edited for individual sets by EDIT Slopes.
  • The pad can be moved or rotated with fixed elevations by entering * for any balance volume. This is similar to MOVEPAD.
  • If the design layer cannot form a DTM, but has least one pline, you are prompted whether to convert plines on that layer to sets.
  • Constrain movement of some points on the design DTM by names CUT ONLY, FILL ONLY, FIX, FIX X, FIX Y, FIX Z, FIX XZ, FIX YZ, FIX XY or FIX XYZ.
  • Some constraint examples:
    • FIX a long pad or water storage at one end and move the other end
    • FILL ONLY above an existing pipe
  • Define any dead regions by SETSMOOTH.
  • Set distance and volume units by labelling and conversion factors in UNITSSET.
  • The design DTM must be enclosed by a DTM edge of one or more breakline sets.
  • Any batters must intersect the existing surface.

CUTFILL replaces MOVEPAD.

See also

DESIGN
Add cut or fill batters from a design DTM to an original DTM.
PLATFORM
Modify elevations of multiple design DTMs to a volume from an original DTM.
PAD
Create a rectangular set at a single elevation.
GCPAD
Create a set at a single elevation inside boundaries.
TML date MenuSource 
08/02/22   DTM|​More...|Balance cut|fill Geocomp Update or $200  
 CVD5EXPT

Export data to Civilcad ASCII .AS5.

Export points, sets and text to Civilcad .AS5 file format.

To export plines, GCCONVRT to sets first.

Civilcad .AS5 files can be imported by Civilcad versions 5 and later.

TML date  Source 
08/02/22     Geocomp Update or $200  
 CVD5IMPT

Import data from Civilcad .AS5 file.

Import data in Civilcad ASCII .AS5 file format.

The point numbers are retained, with the option of adding a constant.

Strings on a layer with common points are joined into sets.

.AS5 files can contain zero-length arcs which can result in extra circles when exported to DXF or DWG. Use CLEANUP to remove the zero-length arcs.

Civilcad .AS5 files can be exported from Civilcad version 5 and later.

TML date  Source 
08/02/22     Geocomp Update or $200  
 CVDEXPT

Export data to Civilcad Version 4 ASC.

Export points, sets and text to Civilcad .ASC file format.

Civilcad ASCII 4 (.ASC) files can be imported into Civilcad versions 4 and 5. For later versions of CivilCAD, export .AS5 with CVD5IMPT.

TML date  Source 
08/02/22     Geocomp Update or $200 FC C
 CVDIMPT

Import data from Civilcad Version 4 .ASC.

Import data in Civilcad .ASC file format.

Include points, strings and text.

Layer names are retained and codes are imported as names.

Non-​contourable points in the ASC file are not included in Terramodel DTMs. EDIT and GC53 toggle this attribute.

Strings on a layer with common points are joined into sets.

Civilcad ASCII 4 (.ASC) files can be exported from Civilcad versions 4 and 5. For later versions of Civilcad, export as .AS5 and import with CVD5IMPT.

TML date   Source 
08/02/22     Geocomp Update or $200 FC C
 CWISE

Reverse the direction of closed anticlockwise sets.

Reverse the direction of closed anticlockwise sets.

See also REVERSE, AUTOSET and GCTRACE.

      Source  
      Hamilton  
 DATAMINE

Import Datamine binary data.

Import a mine model in Datamine binary data file format.

TML date  Source 
08/02/22     Geocomp Update or $200  
 DCEDIT

DC File Editor

View or edit Trimble .DC files and Sokkia .SDR files.

DCEDIT is an alternative to running the DC File Editor directly from Windows Start... Programs... Trimble Office... Utilities... DC File Editor.

If you have a 32-bit version of Windows, type DCEDIT32 in the command line instead.

Alias date MenuSource 
08/02/22   Cogo|​Utilities|​Trimble DC file editor
Windows Start|​Trimble Office|​DC File Editor
Secured  
 DDIST

Create a point at the intersection of two distances or arcs.

Solve for the intersection of two arcs or distances, and create a point object at the intersection.

DDIST uses two command bars that define the information required for the two distances (arcs) to be intersected. Each arc is defined by a centre point and distance or by selecting an arc segment to define the centre point and distance.

Distance-Distance Options

1st pt/arc
Select either a point or an arc.
Dist
If you select a point, enter a distance from the point in the distance control to the right. If you select an arc, enter a distance from the arc centre. The default distance is the radius.
OK
Click OK to display a ghosted circle to indicate the location of the first arc. Now enter a 2nd point or arc and a distance then pick a location with the mouse to indicate one of the two arc intersection solutions.
Command dateGuideMenuSourceGC
12/03/09HELPTM Cogo|​Lines|​Distance-​distance intersection Secured 11
 DEADSETS

Show and create dead regions.

Show dead regions within a DTM or create dead regions.

Dead regions are defined by closed breakline sets with Dead smoothness.

DTM:
Select a DTM layer.
Loc Dead Tri:
Select a location inside a DTM triangle and create a closed breakline with Dead smoothness that defines a dead region around that triangle.
Min Tri Area
Enter a minimum triangle area.
Create
Enable creation of dead regions for each triangle that exceeds a Min Tri Area.
Show Dead Regions Layer
Turn Off
Delete any hatching created by this command.
Show every dead region on the selected layer by hatching. If Create is enabled, first create dead regions by minimum triangle area. Delete any hatching previously created by this command.
Cancel
Close the command. Dead region boundary sets and hatching are retained.

The default layer is the current DTM layer.

See also

SETSMOOTH or EDIT Smooth
Report or edit the smoothness of sets.
DELNULTR
Delete triangular dead regions.
DTMCH
Configure the current DTM layer.
BL
Create breaklines.

TML date  Source 
08/02/22     Geocomp Update or $200  
 DEFANG

Determine the angle between two bearings.

The angle is displayed in the message area for cutting and pasting into an angle control.

TML date  SourceGC
29/10/08     Field Data Module 91
 DELBLKS

Delete missing blocks and external text.

Delete all blocks with missing block definitions and all text linked to missing external text files.

"Unable to find block" messages may be due to trying to display:

  • An external block that links to a missing .BLK file
  • An internal block that is not listed in BLOCK command
  • A block with an invalid or too-long name
  • A missing, unlisted or invalid block that is nested inside another block, or
  • A text object that includes $File: to specify the path and name of an external file that is missing.

Common causes include importing a .DWG or .DXF with problem blocks, AUTODRAFT with missing or misspelt block names and moving or deleting a .PRO, .BLK or text file.

Use
DELBLKS
to delete all
  • internal blocks that are not listed in the List mode of BLOCK command
  • external blocks that have no corresponding .BLK file in C:\Program files (x86)\​Trimble\​Shared\​Blocks or any Terramodel Search Path folder such as C:\TMCustom\​Geocomp.
  • text objects with $File: linking to a path and file that no longer exists, and
and, optionally, replace these deleted blocks and text with new points that
  • have the locations of the insertion points
  • have names that include the names of the deleted objects, and
  • are excluded from all DTMs
BLKREAD
to reread the definition of an external .BLK after the .BLK has been updated
EXPLODE
to explode any blocks that contain nested missing blocks (then run DELBLKS again)
DELETE or EDIT
to delete or edit any objects
GCBADEAT
to delete or select EAT text with a subject or parent that no longer exists
BLOCK Purge
to purge selected unused blocks from the list of blocks
GCPURGE
to purge all unused blocks from the list of blocks
BLOCK
List
To list block definitions in a project

TML dateGuideMenuSource 
08/02/22 Built-in Draw|​Block|​Delete missing external Geocomp Update or $200  
 DELAYLST

Delete layer lists.

Delete one or more layer lists.

See also LLISTSET.

TML date  Source 
08/02/22     Geocomp Update or $200  
 DELCROSS

Delete objects between two locations.

Delete selected objects that cross the line anywhere between two locations.

You may want to run DUPLTRIS, GC58 or DISJOIN first.

See also DELETE​SEGMENT, GCFOLLOW, GCDTMEDG and TRISWAP.

TML date  Source 
08/02/22     Geocomp Update or $200  
 DELETE

Delete selected objects from a project.

Delete selected objects from a project.

Prevent objects from being selected for deletion by Type with Search Settings and by Layer with LAYERSET.

Once you Delete the objects, it may be necessary to REDRAW your screen to view the changes.

If you Delete all of the points defining a set, the set is also deleted. If you have checked "Protect Pn in Use From Deletion" in Point Settings your points will remain intact if you have selected the points for deletion but not the attached set.

See also Delete​Segment.

Command dateGuideMenuSourceGC
12/03/09HELPTM Edit|​Delete Field Data Module 31
 DELETE​SEGMENT

Delete a selected segment from a set or pline.

Click on each segment in turn that you want to delete then click Close to close the command without deleting any other segments.

See also DELETE to delete the whole record, BREAK to break the segment at a location, HIDE to hide or reveal a set segment and SEGEDIT to edit using a table of segments.

In Terramodel prior to 10.5, BREAK deleted set segments like DELETE​SEGMENT does now.

Possible aliases include BREAKSEG, DELETESEG, DELSEG and DS.

Command dateGuideMenuSourceGC
12/03/09HELPTM Edit|​Delete line segment Field Data Module 31
 DELNULTR

Delete nul (dead) triangles.

Delete selected sets that are triangles and have a smoothness of Dead.

Dead triangles are excluded from DTMs. They can be created by DEADSETS and by GC12DIN importing Full_Tins.

Select "Delete points that are no longer in sets?" to remove the first four points imported from a Full_Tin.

See also DUPLTRIS, REMTRIS, SETSMOOTH and GC53.

TML date  Source 
08/02/22     Geocomp Update or $200  
 DEPTHDTM

Create a depth surface DTM from plines with elevations representing depths.

Copy selected closed plines to a new layer, create new plines outside them at a specified offset and with elevation 0.000, then convert the new and copied plines to sets that represent breaklines in a depth surface.

Dialog

Pline (Layer list):
Select plines by layer list
Depth DTM:
Select a new layer for the Depth DTM
Offset Dist:
Enter a horizontal offset
Reverse Elevations
Multiply elevations of new points by -1.0
OK
Delete existing objects on the Depth DTM layer and then copy and create the new breaklines
Cancel
Close the command without deleting or creating any objects

The Depth DTM layer can be used as a depth surface in Surface manager and can be subtracted from a DTM to form another DTM below it.

See also

GCSUBDTM
Create a DTM of a subgrade by depth boundaries.
GC87
Create a DTM from a DTM and a Depth DTM.
EARTHWORK
Create a Depth DTM from two DTMs and compute volumes.
ADDISO
Add the elevation from a Depth DTM to points on a DTM

TML date  Source 
08/02/22     Geocomp Update or $200  
 DEPTHSUR

Create depth surfaces from boreholes.

Create depth surfaces in a roadway from borehole layers that have names with a specified prefix.

TML date  Source 
08/02/22     Geocomp Update or $200  
 DESC

Change numeric names to alphanumeric.

Change numeric names to alphanumeric names using a user-​defined descriptor mapping file (.PCO).

Dialog

Points
Select points
Map File
Browse to select a .PCO file in the format
Integer,Short_Name,Full_Description
OK
For each point with a name that matches an integer in the .PCO file, replace the name with the Short_Name.
Cancel
Cancel the command.

See also

IMPORT Script
Import scripts can also make this change using "Point Descriptor Expansion".
AUTODRAFT
AutoDraft can replace names as it automatically drafts.
DESCAD
Replace numeric point names with alphanumeric considering MultiCode Separators and Global Code Identifiers.
GRP2NAME
Modify the names to match the group numbers.
LAY2NAME
Modify the names to match the layer names.
PTS2NAME
Modify the names to match the point numbers.

Command date  SourceGC
29/10/08     Field Data Module 76
 DESCAD

Change numeric names to alphanumeric with separator.

Change numeric point names to alphanumeric point names using a multi-code separator and global code identifier using a user-​defined descriptor mapping file (.pco).

See also IMPORT, DESC, GRP2NAME and LAY2NAME.

TML date  SourceGC
08/02/22     Geocomp Update or $200 76
 DESIGN

Project batters from a design DTM to another DTM.

Create breaklines in the Design layer by projecting at fixed batter slopes from a DTM edge to an Original DTM layer.

The DTM edge must consist of one or more contiguous breakline sets that encompasses all other DTM points on the same Design layer. When you create a new set, for example by BL or DTMEDGE, the cut and fill batter slopes are assigned by the current values for Tie-in slopes in DESIGNSET command. Check or edit the design slopes of a set at any time by EDIT Slopes.

The grade is computed in 3D from the set. This is different to simply grading to an offset and elevation. If the set has a steep longitudinal grade, the difference will be noticeable.

DESIGN breaks arcs on the DTM edge into straight line segments using the Segments Per Arc setting of DISPLAYSET. New points created along the curves and at the intersection with the original surface, and new sets connect the new points.

Any ground intersection points, points along arcs, and sets created by DESIGN are assigned the name of the design layer. DELETE these objects by name or rerunning DESIGN. Name selection is case-sensitive.

See also GC17, GC23, SLICE, CUTFILL, MOVEPAD and SIDESLOPE

Command dateGuideMenuSourceGC
12/03/09HELPTM DTM|​Design Secured  
 DESIGN​ELEV

Modify elevation to design roadway elevation.

Modify the elevation of existing points so that they lie on the design surface of a designated road job.

Terramodel projects a perpendicular intersection from a location to the HAL to determine the chainage along the HAL and the offset from the HAL. The elevation of the point is interpolated by cutting a slice through the design surface at the station and offset.

Command dateGuideMenuSource 
12/03/09HELPTM Roads|​On design|​Design elev Secured  
 DESIGN​SET

Configure design settings

Configure the default batter slopes, set smoothness and vertical sight distance parameters. These settings are stored with the project file.

Design settings

Tie-in slopes
Enter the default cut and fill slopes for sets. The tie-in slopes are used by commands such as DESIGN to project an design DTM onto an existing DTM. Changes to these default slopes apply to all sets, except for sets where slopes have been edited by EDIT Slopes.
Default set smoothness
Enter the default set smoothness for all new sets. Always make the default Soft. See SETSMOOTH to change the smoothness of existing sets and for an explanation of each smoothness property. Use EDIT Smooth to check or edit the smoothness of a specific set. Smoothness affects contour, cross section and profile plines created from DTMs. If many breaklines are Hard or Sharp, 3D Visualiser can be very slow. If many closed breaklines are Dead, you will have many holes in contour plines. If a DTMEDGE is Dead, you will have no contour plines at all.
Vertical Curve Design Controls
Set the eye, object, and headlight distances used by VAL Editor (RDVALEDIT) to calculate vertical curves based on AASHTO standards for sight distances.
Eye Height
The distance from the road to the standard eye height of a driver.
Object Height, Stopping:
The distance from the road to the standard object height for computing the safe stopping distance.
Object Height, Passing:
The distance from the road to the standard object height for computing the safe passing distance.
Headlight Height:
The distance from the road to the centre of the standard headlight beam.
Divergence Angle:
The angle of the standard headlight beam divergence.
Command dateGuideMenuSource 
12/03/09HELPTM Settings|​Design settings Secured  
 DESPIKE

Remove spikes from a DTM.

Remove all points in a DTM layer where all the surrounding triangles exceed a maximum grade.

Options

  • Select a DTM layer
  • Specify a maximum grade in %
  • Limit the affected points to a boundary
  • Limit the maximum number of iterations
  • Keep breaklines
  • Remove points included in any triangle that exceeds the maximum grade
  • Remove peaks only
  • Maximum height difference
  • Maximum distance

See also GC53, GC69 and 3DFILTER.

TML date  SourceGC
08/02/22     Geocomp Update or $200 GCGeocode
 DFEDIT

Data Format Editor

Open the Data Format Editor.

Edit templates of survey data formats in the logger (.LGR) files used by Import Script manager (IMPORTSMGR) and Export Script Manager (EXPORTSMGR) to format or interpret survey data used by IMPORT and EXPORT scripts.

If your Windows is 32-bit, enter DFEDIT32 instead.

For advice on .LGR files, contact Geocomp Systems.

Alias date  SourceGC
08/02/22     User-definable Coordf
 DIAG

Trimble diagnostic report

Scan the computer and report details such as system architecture, Windows registry, applications and files relevant to Trimble applications including Terramodel.

If you have 32-bit Windows, enter DIAG32 command.

Dialog

File
Refresh
Update the report.
Save As
Save the report as a text file.
Print
Print the report to the Windows default printer. To print to .PDF, first change the default printer, or Save As a text file then print from a text editor.
Send
Attach the report to a new email in the default email client. The default address is to Trimble Support. Change the To address to send to anyone alse. If the email is not created, use Save As instead, and then attach the text file to a new email. Include your name and your request in your email.
Exit
Exit Trimble Diagnostic Report.
Options
Standard
Report Report System information, System DLLs, Shared components, Trimble products and Caterpillar products.
Detailed
Report System information, System DLLs, Shared components, Trimble Common Files, Trimble Files, Registry Dump, Trimble products, Caterpillar products and details of all the associated files and folders.
Help
About Trimble Diagnostic report.

Trimble Diagnostic Report is also installed with Trimble Data Transfer Utility (TDTU).

Version MenuSource 
1.4.21.0   Cogo|​Utilities|​Trimble diagnostic report
Windows Start |​Trimble Data Transfer |​Diagnostics Report
Trimble  
 DIM

Label dimensions between two locations or along segments.

Create labels showing dimensions between pairs of locations or along segments.

Click Props to configure the labelling method, units, decimal places, and layer.

Any vertical exaggeration in the current view is applied to the label. If the vertical exaggeration is later changed, the label will then be distorted.

Dialog

Pt-Pt | Segment
Dimension between pairs of locations or along segments.
Pts:
Enter two locations.
Seg:
Select one segment.
Loc:
Locate the new label.
Props
General properties
Distance type
Dimension the whole distance (Linear), the Horizontal (X-axis) distance or Vertical (Y-axis) distance. In the Plan view, Horizontal is the difference in the Eastings, and Vertical is the difference in Northings.
Layer
Select the layer on which to place dimension lines and text. Select layer 0 for current layer.
Dimension blocks
Create the label as a block instead of text and plines. Dimension blocks are named dim n, where n is a sequential number. If you delete a dimension block object, the block definition is discarded when the project is saved.
Force Dimensions outside
Create dimensions with arrows that point inward, or in the same direction, when the dimension is located outside the extension lines.
Format
Select Engineering format which uses decimal project units (feet or metres) set by Measurement Units (MEASUNIT) or Architectural format which uses feet, inches and fractional inches.
Units suffix
Append a suffix to the labels to show the distance unit.
Sub-units suffix
Append another suffix show the sub-units in the Architectural format.
Number of decimals
Enter the precision for distance labels using the Engineering format.
Units Scale
Enter the factor for the calculated distance. For example, to convert feet to inches, enter 12.0.
Fractional increment
Select the precision of the Architectural format.
Text Properties
Text style
Select the text style for font, height, aspect and slant. The justification is Center-Middle, and the orientation is Legible.
Text Colour
Specify the colour.
Distance from text to line
Enter a factor of the text height for the distance of the text away from the dimension line or the lines from the beginning and the end of the text.
Draw text above dim line
Place dimension text above the dimension lines or even with and between the dimension lines.
Line Properties
Draw dimension line
Enable dimension lines.
Linetype
Select the line type (usually a LEADER LINE).
Colour
Specify the colour for the dimension lines.
Draw dimension line 1
For Segments, create the first extension line.
Line type
Select the line type of the first extension line.
Draw extension line 2
Create the second extension line.
Line type
Select the line type for the second extension line.
Colour
Specify the colour for both extension lines.
Length of outside lines
Define the length of the outside dimension lines in sheet units when you Force Dimensions Outside and locate the dimension text outside the extension lines.
Extension line gap
Define the offset (in sheet units) to the beginning of the extension lines. If a dimension is located within this offset, the lines are extended further.
OK
Accept changes to dimensioning properties.
Cancel
Cancel changes in dimensioning properties.
Dim
Create label at a manually entered location. Not required for mouse-selected locations.
Close
Close the command and retain the new labels

See also

GCDIM
Dimension, with extra tick boxes.
GCDIMLOT and LABELSEG
Dimension lots

TML dateGuideMenuSourceGC
08/02/22 RG 1228 Draft|​Dimensioning Secured 91
 DISJOIN

Break sets and plines into segments.

Create a set or pline for each segment in selected sets and plines, with the option to delete the old objects.

GCUNJOIN does not break plines containing spirals or vertical curves.

DISJOIN is an alias for GCUNJOIN.

See also

JOIN
Join plines or sets with common ends.
EXPLODE
Explode sets and plines with complex linetypes into straight segments and text.

TML date  Source 
08/02/22     Geocomp Update or $250  
 DISP12DA

Display 12D Model attributes.

Report, label or rename selected records that have attributes imported from a 12D Model archive.

Use GC12DIN to import data from a 12D model archive and GCEDT12A to edit the attributes.

Dialog

Attributes:
Select objects with attributes.
Create Text in Layer
Specify layer for any new EAT text labels.
Text Style
Specify text style for any new EAT text labels.
Create Text
Create text labels for selected objects showing the selected 12D model attribute, and value, if any.
Report Only
Report to P3Pad for selected objects, the selected 12D model attributes and values, if any.

See also DISPFEAT and GC12DOUT.

TML date  Source 
08/02/22     Geocomp Update or $250  
 DISPFEAT

Display feature attributes.

Report, label or rename selected records that have feature attributes.

Objs:
Select objects
Create Text in Layer
Specify layer for any new EAT text labels
Text Style
Specify text style for any new EAT text labels
Select attributes
Select Display for a feature attribute to label, rename or report objects with that feature attribute. Select All to select All.
Create Text
Create text labels for selected objects showing the selected feature attribute, and value, if any
Copy Atts to Name
Append to existing names of selected objects the selected feature attributes, and values, if any
Report
Report to P3Pad for selected objects, the selected feature attributes and values, if any

DISPFEAT uses FEATURES.ADF.

See also DISP12DA, FYATBEDIT, FYATBEP, FYATBIN, FYATBOUT, CHECKATT, CSVATTEX, GC12DOUT, GC01, SNR and CHNGNAME.

TML date  Source 
08/02/22     Geocomp Update or $250  
 DISPLAY​SET

Configure how objects are displayed.

Partially display some objects for quicker redraw times, configure point display size and display curves as straight segments.

Dialog

View Resolution Segments per Arc
Enter the number of segments per circular curve.
View Resolution Segments per Spline
Enter the number of segments per splined pline. Enter 0 to displays the line as unsplined.
View Resolution Segments per Vcurve
The number of segments per vertical curve.
View Resolution Segments per Spiral
Enter the number of segments per transition spiral.
Quick dynaviews
Toggle on to hide objects displayed through dynaviews and to show dynaview frames only. See also SHOWDYNA.
Quick text
Toggle on to display and plot text as boxes drawn to the limits of the text objects. Toggle off to display and plot normally.
Quick EAT codes
Toggle on to display and plot all EAT codes as the actual codes and not the interpreted value.
Quick linetype
Toggle on to display and plot all linetypes as solid lines.
Ignore hide
Toggle on to reveal set segments hidden by HIDE are displayed and to enable CONVERT to convert hidden set segments to plines.
Hold DV scale
Toggles the way attribute text and the linetype scales are displayed and plotted within dynaviews. When toggled on, attribute text and linetypes are scaled within the individual dynaviews in which they are displayed, based on the scale assigned to the dynaview, as opposed to being based on the plot scale of the view in which the attribute text or line is drawn. This allows you to create multiple dynaviews showing the same object or even of the same view mode at varying scales. When toggled on, the attribute text and linetypes appear in accordance with their definition, regardless of subsequent alterations of the plot scale of the view in which these objects are drawn. When toggled off, attribute text and linetypes as displayed within a dynaview, are scaled based on the current plot scale of the target view, and their appearance will change as that plot scale is altered. Normal text objects are not affected by this setting.
Drag Text Quick
Toggle on to distort the text so the text can be dragged quickly. Toggle off to display legible text as you drag, which is slower.
Point size
Enter the size in pixels for a cross symbol for each point.
Text box size
Enter a minimum number of pixels for text. Text objects and attribute text that are smaller will be displayed as a text box. Enter 0 to always draw the text characters (except when Quick Text is toggled on).

View resolution

Curves are displayed as a series of short straight segments, but maintain their mathematical properties for curve computations. With more segments, the curve appears smoother, takes longer to display, uses more memory and results in bigger plot files.

For example, if the view resolution for arcs is 20 and for spirals is 10, the total number of displayed segments for Arc curves is 20, for Spiral curves is 10+20+10=40 and for Combining curves is 10+20+10+20+10=70.

Do not exceed 100 segments for all components together otherwise some curves will not display or compute correctly.

Recommended view resolution values
Splines
Spline: 100
Vertical curves
Vcurve: 100
Arcs
If you never use spirals
Arc: 100
If you use transition spirals but no combining spirals
Arc: 60 and Spiral: 20
If you ever use combining spirals
Arc: 33 and Spiral: 11

Commands that use the view resolution to replace curves with chords include DRAPE and GCDRAPE, DESIGN and CUTFILL, PROFILE and GCPROFILE and some exporters.

PLOTSET, GCCHORD, ARCBREAK and DIVIDE use other settings when replacing curves with chords.

Command dateGuideMenuSource 
12/03/09HELPTM Settings|​Display settings Field Data Module  
 DISTANCE

Report the distance between two locations.

Report the 2D distance between two locations defined by coordinates in From and To point controls.

The distance is displayed in the message scroll in both project units, and in sheet units at the view scale.

You have the option to also display the accumulative length which can be reset.

The locations can be limited by object snaps.

See also GC29 for 3D distances between points and along segments and these other commands that report distances: GC29UTM, REPORTS , GEOMINQ, GC3DSETS, GC75, GC81, LABELSEG, GCDIMLOT, GEOMRPTS, LABGRADE and TXTHTDIF.

Command dateGuideMenuSource 
12/03/09HELPTM Reports|​Distance
Inquire|​Distance
Field Data Module 17
 DIVIDE

Divide a line into intervals.

Create points along a set or pline at intervals.

You specify the number of segments, whether to divide one segment or an entire line, whether the points are moved to round number chainages, and whether to insert the points into sets.

See also GCDIVIDE, 3D, ADD2SET, GC28, GC283D, PREDAREA, GC04, INTOSET and GCIN2SET and GC682SET.

Command dateGuideMenuSource 
12/03/09HELPTM Draw|​Point|​Divide Line Field Data Module 13
 DLGDOIN

Import a USGS DLG (optional format) file

Import lines with elevations from a United States Geological Survey Digital Line Graph-Optional format (.DO) file.

USGS DLG-O format lines have an associated elevation (contour lines).

In the USGS DLG-O format, topological linkages are explicitly encoded for node and area elements as well as line elements. The files are comprised of 8-bit ASCII characters organized into fixed-length logical records of 80 characters. Bytes 1– 72 of each record may contain DLG data, and bytes 73– 80 may contain a record sequence number.

USGS DLG-O Header and Data Records

Header Records
  • File identification and description records
  • Accuracy records
  • Control-point identification records
  • Data-category identification records
Data (or footer) Records
  • Node and area identification records
  • Node-to-line linkage records
  • Area-to-line linkage records
  • Line identification records with line-to-node and line-to-area linkages
  • Coordinate string records
  • Attribute code records
  • Text records

To use DLGDOIN

  1. Create a new layer for the DLG data and make it the current layer.
  2. DELETE or RELAYER any objects on layer 0.
  3. Run DLGDOIN.
  4. Browse to select a .DO elevation file.
  5. Read the file.
  6. Plines and points are created on the current layer and assigned an elevation. Convert these plines to sets to create a DTM.

DLG Rules

  • The DLG header information is saved as project variables.
  • Only the header information for the last imported .DO file is retained.
  • The identical header is written out with the DLGDOOUT.
  • The current header information can be viewed with the PROJECTV command. Do not use PROJECTV to edit the header.
  • The following line attribute codes are retained: 200, 201, 202, 203, 204, 205, 206, 207, 208, 210, 299.
  • A maximum of six attribute codes is retained. For lines with these codes, a pline is created.
  • Lines that carry contours (201) are created on layer 0 (zero) and are named with its attribute codes and given the elevation of the last elevation parameter attribute. When the line is exported, its name is used to retain its attributes.
  • For all lines that do not have an elevation, a pline is created on layer 0 (zero). For all other lines, plines are created with the proper elevation and stored on the current layer.
  • The following single point attribute codes are retained: 300, 301, 302, 303. For lines with these codes, a point is created.
  • Points with an elevation are placed on the current layer. Points with no elevation are created on layer 0 (zero).
  • Lines that have an attribute of 611 (depression) are given the DEPRESSION linetype.
  • All of the elevation attributes, except for decimal fractions, are properly considered to assign elevations.

See also DLGDOIN and USGS .DEM IMPORT script.

Command dateGuideMenuSource 
29/10/08 HELPTM File|​Misc. Import/Export|​USGS-O DLG Import Field Data Module  
 DLGDOOUT

Export a USGS DLG-O file.

Export sets and plines with elevations to a United States Geological Survey Digital Line Graph-Optional format .

See DLGDOIN for the file format.

The DLG header variables imported by DLGDOIN and stored as project variables are used for the file header. Objects imported from a DLG file retain their attributes.

Points are exported with attribute code 300.

Nodes and areas are not retained.

Plines with the linetype "DEPRESSION" are exported with the 611 attribute. Use CONTOURSET to specify the linetype for depression contours.

To use DLGDOOUT

Objs
Select objects to be exported
File
Select the output file name name and location
Write
Export the .DO file
Cancel
Cancel the command

See also DLGDOOUT.

Command dateGuideMenuSource 
29/10/08 HELPTM File|​Misc. Import/Export|​USGS-O DLG Export Field Data Module  
 DLINE

Dimension between two locations.

Draw pline segments between two locations with the specified linetype and labels in the specified text style showing the length in metres to the specified number of decimal places.

See also LABGRADE and DIM.

TML date  SourceGC
08/02/22     Geocomp Update or $250 91
 DOC​UMENTS

List Terramodel documents.

List user guides, tutorials, manuals, charts, table, classes, notes, lists and help files.

This Documents list is installed with Geocomp Updates and includes links to these documents and associated sample data.

Many of these documents and data files are also on Terramodel installation CDs.

Links to most documents from this TML List only work from the local TML List installed with Geocomp Updates, and not from the TML List on the web.

See also GCHELP.

Command date Guide Menu Source  
08/02/22 Documents Help|​Documents Geocomp Update  
 DRAFTSET

Drafting settings.

Configure the text spacing, text offset distance, and other general drafting settings for the project.

Draft settings

Flip over angle
Configure the angle above which text objects with Legible orientation are automatically flipped so they can be read from left to right, from the right-hand side and the bottom of the sheet. This angle is applied to each dynaview so that the same labels can be oriented properly through multiple dynaviews. The flip over angle can be from 0° to 45°. A typical value is 10°. If the value is 0°, the label will never flip. If the value is 45°, the text will be upside down if read from the bottom of the sheet, but will appear correct when read from the right-hand side of the sheet.
Text clip margin
Configure the size of the clipping boundaries and of borders with styles other than Detail and Underline. Typical values range from 0.3 to 0.5 times the height of the text object. Commands that clip on these boundaries include CONTOUR, CLIP, HATCH and TEXTBACK.
Offset distance from line/arc
Configure the distance in sheet units between plines and sets and their labels, and between text and Underline borders. Typically, enter a value at least twice the diameter of your largest pen.
Space (%) between lines of text
Establish the spacing between lines of attribute text or lines of text objects. A typical value is 50% of the text height.
Fixed Detail Border Size
Configure the fixed height in sheet units for all text borders with a Detail border style.
Underline title Text Enlargement (%)
Multiply the height of the first line of multi-line text with Underline text border style by this percentage (e.g. 20%). If "Use height for pen mapping" is turned on in PLOTSET, the first line of text can use a different plotter pen.
Text Line Colours
Configure the colours for:
Leader Lines
Text leader lines
Underlines
Borders with an Underline border style
Margin Lines
Borders with a Margin border style
Enclosing Borders
Borders with an enclosing border style
Text line colours are used for new and changed text lines. Existing text lines are unchanged. If the colour of the text line line is 0, the text line line has the same colour as the text. If the colour of both the text and the text line is 0, both change colour with the layer.

See also STYLESET.

Command dateGuideMenuSourceGC
12/03/09HELPTM Settings|​Draft settings... Secured 90
 DRAG

Toggle dragging on or off.

When dragging is on, objects are displayed during move and rotation commands. When off, only the initial and final positions are shown.

DRAG is an ALIAS for SYSTEM -1.

The current DragMode is stored in the [System] section of TMODWIN.INI and so can be imported using EDITINI .

Alias date MenuSource 
29/10/08   File|​System Configuration|​System...|​Dragging on Field Data Module  
 DRAGHDIN

Import Drag Head log file.

Import Drag Head log file.

TML date  Source 
08/02/22     POA  
 DRAINRPT

Report drainage details to a CSV file.

Select drain sets and specify a lid layer.

TML date  SourceGC
08/02/22     Geocomp Update or $250 DGE 10
 DRAPE

Create sets where selected plines cross a DTM.

Create points on the current layer where selected plines cross links in the selected DTM and connect the points with sets along the plines.

If there is no grade change at the link crossing, no point is created.

Around each curve, the number of chords created corresponds to the view resolution segments per arc, vertical curve, spline or spiral specified in DISPLAYSET.

See also GCDRAPE which also transfers chainages, references and names to the sets.

TML date MenuSourceGC
08/02/22   DTM|​Drape plines Field Data Module 298+400+252
 DRILL01

Label a drill hole.

Label a drill hole with some properties of the collar point and drill hole.

The text label includes the name and coordinates of the collar point and the bearing and dip of the drill hole segment at the specified text location. The Settings button controls the text style.

The collar point does not have to be an end point of the drill hole segment.

TML date  Source 
08/02/22     Geocomp Update or $250  
 DRNGRADE

Label a set segment of a drain with the grade.

Label a selected set segment with text indicating the grade of the segment.

Select a set segment and a text location and, in Settings, specify whether to display an arrow or a table, any added text, the text style and a leader linetype.

Specify Display Arrow to create a pline with an arrow in the direction of slope, labelled with any added text and the grade expressed as a ratio and a percentage.

Specify Display Table to create multi-line text, with a rectangular border and leaderline, showing any added text, the elevation of the upstream point, the set name and the grade expressed as a ratio, the segment length and the elevation of the downstream point. The optional added text can be used for a table heading and the set name could indicate the pipe description or diameter.

See also LABGRADE for a more general grade labelling command.

TML date  Source 
08/02/22     Geocomp Update or $250  
 DRNVOLMS

Report volumes and surface areas of ponds in a DTM.

Hatch pond extents and report water volumes around low points in a DTM.

Dialog

DTM:
Select a DTM
Bdys:
Select any limiting boundaries
Water Layer:
Layer for new pond extents
Min Water Depth:
Enter a minimum pond depth
Step:
Enter a step size
Hatch
Create hatch blocks on water layer inside extents
Compute Volumes:
Compute water volumes
OK
For each pond deeper than the minimum, generate contours at step intervals, clip them to selected boundaries, then, for each low point, find the closed contour with the largest area, create pond extent plines and hatch blocks, and report the water elevation, area, depth and volume.
Cancel
Cancel command

See also

DTMDRAIN
Create sets around drainage catchments
GCFALL
Show flow paths and catchments in a DTM
LINKSET
Show triangle slopes
EARTHWORK
Compute volumes of depressions
GM1
Raise low points where steep

TML date  Source 
08/02/22     Geocomp Update or $250  
 DTED

Import DTED DT1 files.

Import Digital Terrain Elevation Data in DTED .DT1 format.

DTED is a gridded Digital Elevation Model standard from US National Geospatial-Intelligence Agency for the whole world with elevations above Earth Gravitational Model 1996 (EGM96).

TML date  Source 
29/10/08     Field Data Module  
 DTM2LDBX

Export DTM layer to Leica 1200 DBX database files.

Export a DTM layer within a boundary to an XML file and convert to Leica 1200 DBX database using RoadRunnerAddOn.

The database files can be used with Road Runner or DigSmart3D on Leica 1200 instruments. The XML file can also be imported into UMC_3D and iCON.

Define any dead regions by SETSMOOTH.

To suit some Leica applications, DTM2LDBX limits DTMs to 99,999 points. To create larger XML files, use DTM2XML.

If you select 'Create Leica DB files', but no .X?? files are created in the same folder as the .XML, download and install Microsoft Visual C++ 2013 Redistributable (x86).

See also ROADRUN, GCPTSOUT , GCMULXML, POWERGDE and PLAN2DBX.

TML date  Source 
08/02/22     Geocomp Update or $200  
 DTM2XML

Export DTM layer to LandXML triangles.

Export a DTM layer to a layer of triangles in a LandXML .XML file.

Define any dead regions by SETSMOOTH.

See also DTM2LDBX , VRMLOUT and EXPORT LandXML script.

TML date  Source 
08/02/22     Geocomp Update or $250  
 DTMALL

Refresh all DTMs toolbar button

Function key F12 Refresh all DTMs

Relink all DTM layers and redraw the display.

Relink all DTM layers, redraw the display and store the current contour intervals.

DTMALL reads the contour interval, and computes the index interval, from Contour Settings, then updates project variables DTMALL:CONT_INT and DTMALL:CONT_INDEX_I. Use these variables with EAT text to show the intervals on a plan. For example, to display the contour and interval intervals to two decimal places, create EAT text that includes \PROJ{V,D,DTMALL:CONT_INT,2} and \PROJ{V,D,DTMALL:CONT_INDEX_I,2}, use CONTOURSET to set the contour interval, DTMALL to reset the project variables and REDRAW to display the changes.

See also GCDTMALL which also creates arc breaklines, TOGLINKS which turns on and off link visibility without relinking and DTMUPDT which updates only the current DTM layer.

TML date MenuSource
08/02/22   DTM|​More...|​Update all DTM layers
Toolbar button
Function key F12
Geocomp Update or $250  
 DTMCH

Change the current DTM layer.

The current DTM layer is displayed in the Coordinate scroll box with the elevation, aspect and slope at the cursor.

To relink the current DTM layer only, use DTMUPDT.

The current DTM layer is not necessarily the current layer.

TML date MenuSourceGC
08/02/22   DTM|​More...|​Change current DTM layer Geocomp Update or $250 1
 DTMCONE

Project a cone onto a DTM.

Radiate from a specified x, y location and a specified height difference from the DTM, to the specified DTM layer, in 5° increments.

Join the locations with a pline or join points at those locations with a set and radial sets to the centre point.

Enter a positive height if the centre is above the DTM; a negative height if the centre is below the DTM.

Enter a positive slope to project up; a negative slope to project down. The slope may be entered in any vertical angle mode: Z (degrees from zenith), H (degrees from horizontal), N (degrees from nadir), P or % (percent slope from horizontal), R (ratio of horizontal to vertical) or D (vertical distance).

TML dateGuideMenuSource 
08/02/22 RG 1251 DTM|​Conical projection to DTM S  
 DTMDRAIN

Create set lines around drainage catchments.

Create set lines along the boundaries of drainage catchments of a DTM.

Options

DTM
Select the DTM.
DRAIN
Select the layer for the new sets. The default layer is set by HDEFS.
MIN HEIGHT
Enter a depth above which shallow ponds fill and overflow and boundary sets are created. The default height is the Minimum drainage height setting in HDEFS.

The minimum height is used to eliminate small depressions and must be reviewed for the overall effect.

DTMDRAIN makes assumptions such as water draining to one side of each triangle and consistent ground cover.

See also GCFALL which can use multiple locations per triangle to create catchment boundaries and flow paths.

TML dateGuideMenuSource 
12/03/09 UG 401 Hydro|​Compute drainage Secured  
 DTMEDGE

Create a set around a DTM edge.

Create a set in the current colour joining every point along the outside links of a selected DTM.

The DTM edge set locks the extent of the DTM, even against changes in link settings. The extent is limited by the outside points and breaklines and current link settings.

Before running DTMEDGE, select a distinctive layer colour and use LAYERSET or QISOLATE to isolate, LINKSET and DTMALL to display the extent of links and EVALDTM to look for breakline problems.

Multiple contiguous breakline set segments around a DTM function as a DTM edge. This means that DESIGN and CUTFILL can use different batter slopes and that the outside of a DTM formed from imported triangles always forms a DTM edge.

Edit a DTM edge set using GCDTMEDG, DELETE&#8203SEGMENT, BL and so on.

If there are any 3D points on the layer outside the DTM edge set, the DTM edge is invalid. GC22 checks for and fixes this.

GCDTMBDY creates pline boundaries at multiple DTM edges.

Command dateGuideMenuSource 
12/03/09HELPTM DTM|​DTM edge Field Data Module  
 DTMGRID

Interpolate a grid over a DTM.

Specify origin, bearing, intervals and boundary.

See also GCGENGRD, GRIDELEV, GRIDEXPT, GRIDMAKE, and TRMBGRID.

Command dateGuideMenuSourceGC
12/03/09HELPTM DTM|​Generate DTM grid Secured 221
 DTMINFO

List DTM information by layer for selected points.

List by layer, for the selected points, the layer name, the view in which any DTM is formed, the total number of points, the number of 3D Points, the number of 3D points not in DTM, the number of points in the DTM and the maximum and minimum Easting, Northing and Elevation.

To select all points in all views, click OK without selecting any points.

The totals are summed and the ranges computed for all the selected points.

"DTM view" shows which layers have been linked and in which view and whether they are part of a Multilayer DTM. No Links indicates that no DTM is formed in any view.

"Points in DTM" shows the number of points in the DTM that is formed. For layers with contourable points with elevations in more than one view, the DTM is formed in the view with the most such points. This is not necessarily the current or Plan view. You are warned if any selected points are not on this DTM view.

The selected DTM layers are relinked, and so duplicate points are moved to layer 0, before the report is generated. To report duplicate points before DTM formation, run GC92 first.

See also LAYINFO, COUNT, OLIST and LIST.

TML date MenuSourceGC
08/02/22   DTM|​More...|​List DTM layers Geocomp Update or $250 290
 DTMMATCH

Match overlapping DTMs at a match line.

Match two DTMs created by photogrammetry.

The surfaces are adjusted so that any contours created from the new DTM match perfectly at a match line.

Dialog

Dtm | Dtm
Select two DTM layers to be matched.
Line
Select a pline along which the DTMs are to be matched.
Def
Specify the elevation adjustment method.
Normal merge
On
Adjust the location of each point by the ratio of its offset distance from the match line to the maximum adjustment width, times the elevation difference between the point and the other DTM layer. The normal merge moves each point towards the other DTM. Where the DTM layers cross in the overlap, some points on each DTM may move up and others down. This is the usual method.
Off
Adjust each point by the ratio of its offset distance from the match line to the maximum adjustment width, times the difference in elevation of the DTM layers on the match line perpendicular to the point being adjusted. This method moves each point based on the condition at the match line. If the DTM layers intersect in the overlap area, some points on each DTM may move away from the other DTM.
Max adj width
Specify the maximum distance from the match line for points to be adjusted.

Tips on using DTMMATCH

  • The objects on the matched layers can be relayered to the same DTM layer for relinking.
  • DTMMATCH makes significant modifications to the project data including deleting points. Take a copy of the project by using SAVEAS before you start.
  • If DTMMATCH is to be used several times in one project file, save your work at each step.
  • The two DTM layers must overlap.
  • Create a single-segment pline or set to be the matchline.
  • Only points within the extent of the match line are be erased.
  • Match lines should not be significantly longer than the limits of a DTM.
  • Sets that cross the match line are clipped to a new point.
  • The DTMs re-link as required.
  • Elevations of points that fall within the length of the line and the adjustment width are adjusted. A set is created on each DTM along the match line through the new points.
  • All points outside the match line for each DTM are deleted.
  • The maximum elevation difference found along the match line, and the number of points adjusted, are reported.

See also

GCMATCH
Match contours
JOIN
Join matched contours
GC33
Create the highest or lowest of two overlapping surfaces
GC33MULT
Create the highest or lowest of multiple overlapping surfaces
MERGE
Create a surface from two overlapping surfaces
GCMERGE
Replace a surface with multiple overlapping surfaces
GCCLIP
Clip multiple surfaces from a single surface
GCCOPY
Copy multiple objects into a single surface.

Command dateGuideMenuSource 
12/03/09HELPTM DTM|​DTM Match Secured  
 DTMMATH

Create points by comparison with two DTMs.

Create new points on a third layer with elevations determined by a user-​defined mathematical formula which may include the elevations of the first and second specified DTMs.

In the Settings, specify the formula, the layers and whether to report the results.

Dialog

Layer 1
Select a DTM layer
Layer 2
Select a second DTM layer
Layer 3
Select a layer for the new points
Settings
Use layer 1 points
Use layer 1 points
Use layer 2 points
Use layer 2 points
Generate Report
Report each computed value to P3Pad
Formula
Enter a mathematical formula for the elevation of the new points on layer 3

For example

To get an "average" elevation, enter the formula ((Z2-Z1)/2)+Z1 or (Z2+Z1)/2.

See also

GC70
Combine elevation of point and a DTM.

TML date  Source 
08/02/22     Trimble or Geocomp Update  
 DTMPTS

Interpolate elevations of points from a DTM.

Assign elevations to 2D points from a DTM surface.

Points outside the limits of the DTM are not assigned elevations.

Only 2D points are be modified. To modify 3D points, first use ELEVATION or GCELEV to make the points 2D by giving them an absolute elevation of *.

See also ELEVOBJS which replaces elevations of point, text and blocks interpolated from a DTM.

See also GC70 which replaces elevations of both 2D and 3D points, and can also combine the point elevations with the DTM elevations.

See also GCPTSTXT which interpolates elevations from nearby text instead of a DTM.

See also DRAPE, DTMGRID, GRIDELEV, GC50, INT3DSET, GCNOELEV and ELVPLINE.

Command dateGuideMenuSourceGC
12/03/09HELPTM DTM|​DTM Pts Secured 236
 DTMSET

Create sets from DTM links.

Create a set for each link or triangle on a DTM layer.

Specify the new DTM layer, whether to create sets with three segments (triangles) or one segment (links) and whether to copy points to the new layer (or just the sets).

If these sets are used as breaklines in another DTM application, the resulting DTM will be similar.

Define any dead regions by SETSMOOTH.

If you are exporting .DXF or .DWG to an application that prefers 3DFaces, you do not need DTMSET. Instead, select "Export DTM surface as 3d faces" when you export.

See also GCDTMOUT, GSIDTMOU, QSGRIDOU, KORKDTM and TRMBTIN.

TML date MenuSourceGC
08/02/22   DTM|​More...|​Create sets from links Geocomp Update or $250 156+SDS-DXF
 DTMSHOT

Create a point on a DTM at a grade and bearing.

Create a point at the intersection of a theoretical 3D line and a DTM.

Specify a DTM layer, a start point, a bearing and a vertical angle.

The start point cannot be at the same elevation as the DTM.

The bearing and vertical angle units are controlled by UNITSSET.

See also GC23 and SLICE.

Command dateGuideMenuSource 
12/03/09HELPTM DTM|​DTM shot Secured  
 DTMSTATS

Report the points with the highest and lowest elevations in a layer.

Report the points with highest and lowest elevations in a layer and list the point numbers, the elevation difference and the average elevation.

The highest and lowest points are marked with temporary circles; the bigger circle marks the higher point. The circles disappear on refresh.

All 3D points on the layer are considered including invisible and non-​contourable points. See also RANGE, AVERPTS and EVALDTM.

TML date   Menu Source GC
08/02/22   DTM|​DTM statistics Secured 169
 DTMUPDT

Relink the current DTM layer and refresh.

Use DTMCH to change the current DTM layer first.

GCARCBL creates breaklines around arcs, DTMALL relinks all layers and GCDTMALL does both.

TML date MenuSourceGC
08/02/22   DTM|​More...|​Update current DTM layer Geocomp Update or $250 289
 DTMVISTA

Project sets onto a DTM.

Create sets projected onto a DTM from a viewpoint.

Sets
Select sets joining 3D points
View Pt
Select a point from which to project
DTM layer
Select a DTM onto which the sets are to be projected
Step distance around set
Enter a step distance in project units
OK
Create points on the current layer for each step along the sets where they would appear on the DTM from the view point
Cancel
Cancel without creating sets

For example, to lay out a sign on a hillside to be legible from a lookout:

  1. Adopt a view point at the lookout with elevation at eye level
  2. Define four points on a 3D plane near the lookout which frame the vista to the hillside
  3. Draft up a sign to the same proportions at the four points
  4. REVIEW to Plan, EXPLODE text, CONVERT plines to sets, ARCBREAK curves to straights, modify ELEVATION and so on to define the sign as straight set segments joining 3D points
  5. Transform the sign points and sets onto the plane near the lookout using GC3DADJ
  6. Use DTMVIEW to step along the sets, projecting from the viewpoint to the DTM to create points and sets on the current layer

TML date  Source 
08/02/22     Geocomp Update or $250  
 DUMPATT

Report the attribute records stored for a selected object.

Report the attribute records stored for a selected object.

TML date  Source 
29/10/08     Field Data Module  
 DUPLTRIS

Remove duplicated segments from triangular sets.

Remove segments from triangular sets on a layer that join the same points as segments on other sets on that layer and replace with single segments in the current layer colour.

This can significantly reduce the number of segments in an imported DTM that has a closed set for each triangle.

Select “Shortest Length Side Only” to minimise total breakline length, separate breakline strings like kerbs or remove flat triangles from digitised contours. Keep the “Middle Length Side only” if that suits the model better.

Select “Create all triangle sides”, to create a DTM surface very similar to the original but without duplicate triangle sides.

If you don’t need to keep any breaklines or boundaries, you may be able to simply DELETE all the sets on the layer and let Terramodel reform the DTM from the remaining points.

Any point in a set with the same number as the previous point is removed. Duplicate points are removed next time you reform the DTM.

See also REMTRIS, REMOVELINKS, LINKSET, 3DFILTER, GC31, GC58, GC66, GC92, DTMEDGE and CLEANUP.

TML date  Source 
08/02/22     Geocomp Update or $250  
 DUPLTUS

Remove duplicated segments from triangular sets.

Use DUPLTRIS instead if you have the Geocomp Update.

The TML name is DUPLT_US. If DUPLTUS does not run from the command line, create an alias from DUPLTUS to DUPLT_US or enter DUPLT_US.

TML date  Source 
08/02/22     POA  
 DXF3D

Import elevations from .DXF files.

Import elevations from 3D coordinates in a .DXF file corresponding to points in Terramodel.

Replace the elevation of each point in the Plan view with the elevation corresponding to the first matching X,Y coordinate pair in a selected DXF file.

For example, to import elevations from PolyFaceMesh objects in a DXF, use

  1. Import the .DXF file with a import script (IMPORT) such as AutoCAD (dwg or dxf) _i or DXFIN.
  2. GCCONVRT to convert the remaining plines to points and sets
  3. DXF3D to read the elevations from the DXF onto the points
  4. DTMALL or DTMUPDT to form the DTM and remove duplicate points to layer 0
  5. DUPLTRIS to remove duplicate segments
  6. DELETE all objects from layer 0

See also ACADCONV, DXFCHANG, DTMPTS, GC31 and GC58.

TML date  Source 
08/02/22     Geocomp Update or $200  
 DXFCHANG

Change the name of layers in a .DXF file.

Change the layer names in a specified input .DXF file to new layer names in an output .DXF file.

DXFCHANG can be used to substitute layer names with a different naming convention and to accommodate differences in valid characters and maximum layer name lengths.

Prefixes

Prefixing layers can help to identify objects imported from a particular .DXF.

Enter any characters to prefix the new layer names. Adding prefixes only does not require a mapping file.

If no file name is entered for DXF Out, the Out file has the same name as the DXF In file but with the prefix as a suffix.

Map file

Layer names can also be substituted in the .DXF using a mapping file.

The format of the .MAP file is:

input layer name,output layer name

GCMAPOUT can create create an initial .MAP file from selected objects, with default substitutions, for later amendment or addition of layer names in any text editor.

Layer names in the DXF that are missing from the .MAP file can be added to the end of the .MAP file. Use an empty .MAP file to read all layer names from the .DXF.

Any lines in the .MAP file that start with # are treated as comments and ignored.

Layer map files in .LNM format created by GC12DIN can also be used.

Changing layer names when importing

  1. If the data file is in .DWG format, export from CAD application to .DXF
  2. Open or create a new project in Terramodel
  3. DXFCHANG
  4. Browse to select DXF In (the input file name and DXF Out (the output file name)
  5. Browse to select a Mapping File
  6. Enter any prefix
  7. Select "DXF Out to Import into Terramodel"
  8. OK
  9. DXFIN to import .DXF into Terramodel

Changing layer names when exporting

  1. DXFOUT
  2. Export from Terramodel to DXF using the "2000" file format
  3. DXFCHANG
  4. Browse to select DXF In (the old file name), DXF Out (the new file name)
  5. Browse to select a Mapping File
  6. Enter any prefix
  7. Select "DXF Out to Import into CAD"
  8. OK
  9. Import .DXF into CAD application

TrimbleName

Names of points and sets are not exported to DWG and DXF because names are not normally included in their specification. However, some software and instuments from Trimble, other than Terramodel, can transfer object names between themselves using an APPID specified by Trimble called TRIMBLENAME. Select "Add TrimbleName for Line Work Names" to add the names of every set and pline to the DXF file as a TrimbleName APPID.

Length limits

Terramodel layer names have a limit of 17 characters.

DXFIN can use a project variable to determine which 17 characters to read.

The maximum length of lines in the .MAP file is 255 characters, so a Terramodel layer-name of up to 17-characters can be mapped to DXF layer-name of up to 237 characters.

Character limits.

The new layer names can have any characters acceptable to the destination CAD software. For AutoCAD .DWG and .DXF, spaces are only allowed in layer names for files in 2000 format or later. The following characters are not allowed in any AutoCAD layer names:

 / \ “ : ; ? * | = ‘

Terramodel layer names can have all of these characters. When exporting from Terramodel to .DWG or .DXF using a script, any character that is not an Upper Case letter, a digit, a -, an _, or a $, is substituted with _, as is any space exported to version 10, 11, 13 or 14.

Characters can also be substituted in a similar way when importing .DWG or .DXF files into Terramodel.

DXFCHANG automatically substitutes some characters to maintain compatability. In some cases, to get the exact characters you need, as well as preparing the .MAP file carefully, you might also need to substitute characters in layers within Terramodel or the CAD application.

ACADCONV

If a CAD application reports an error reading the .DXF, try saving as R10 .DXF format using ACADCONV or ODA Drawings Explorer.

See also

DXF3D
Import elevations onto points from .DXF.
SNRFILE
Find and replace text in an external file.
LAYERSET
Manage layer settings including layer names.
LAYERMAP
Modify layer names using a mapping file.
LLRPT and CREATELL
Report and transfer layer names with their layer lists, default colour numbers and linetype names
MATCHOBJ
Match properties such as layer names.
NAME2LAY
Modify layers to match object names.
IMPORT
Import .DWG and .DXF files.
EXPORT
Export .DWG and .DXF files.

TML date  Source 
08/02/22     Geocomp Update or $200  
 DYNAVIEW

Create dynaviews.

Use a dynaview to display a portion of a view in another location.

For instance, create a plotbox around a part of the plan view, create a second plotbox at a difference scale around the same part in profile view, and place dynaviews for both next to each other in the sheet view.

Refresh the view of the dynaview to show the objects inside the plotbox at that time.

Dynaview creation

Box
Select a plotbox, a closed set or pline that defines extent of the dynaview, such as one created by PLOTBOX, GCBOX or CIRCLE.
Loc
Enter the location of the origin of the new dynaview. This location can be in any view including the same view. Locate the dynaview where the first vertex of the plotbox is to appear.
Scale
Set the scale at which the new dynaview is drawn. The default scale is the plot scale for the view of the selected Box. Use VIEWSET to preview or modify plot scale for any view.
Rot
Set the angle of rotation for the dynaview. The angle of rotation is measured clockwise relative to the closed polygon. The default rotation aligns the last side with the east-west axis.

Dynaview editing

Use EDIT to edit dynaviews. To select the dynaview by mouse, click on the origin, which for rectangular plotboxes, is the south-west corner by convention.

Editable dynaview properties are layer, attribute if defined, name, auto off, group, boundary, layer list name, scale, rotation and location.

Turn Auto off ON, to turn off the display of objects that are referenced and not a part of the family tree.

The boundary is the closed plotbox pline that defines the extent of the dynaview.

A layer list can be used to display only a nominated layers. See LLISTSET.

See also

PLANSET
Lay out multiple dynaviews
PLOTBOX
Create a plotbox by height and width in sheet units
GCBOX
Create a plot box graphically
EXPLODE
Explode objects incluing Dynaviews
MIRRORDY
Mirror dynaviews about Y-axis
SHOWDYNA
Show objects visible on dynaviews
FIXDYNA
Replace dynaview plotboxes
MVIEW
Create dynaviews from multiple plotboxes
SCLPLOTB
Scale dynaview plotboxes
DISPLAYSET
Display settings including Quick (hidden) dynaviews
BOXDYNA
Create boxes at dynaview extents
LLIST
Modify the layer list of dynaviews
SCLBLKS
Scale blocks and whether clipped in dynaviews

Command dateGuideMenuSourceGC
12/03/09HELPTM Draw|​DynaView Secured 93
 EARTHWORK

Compute cut and fill volumes between two DTMs.

Compute cut and fill volumes between two DTMs, for any material (not just earthworks).

Create a temporary surface of points that represent the differences in elevation between the selected DTM surfaces and compute the cut and fill volumes above and below the zero datum in that surface. This surface is called an isopach surface because any contours extracted from this surface are isopachs that follow paths of constant elevation difference.

The isopach surface is deleted on completion unless you "save computed isopach".

Dialog

Surface comparison
Surface to Surface
Compute and report cut and fill volumes between two DTM surfaces.
Surface to datum
Compute and report cut and fill volumes between a DTM surface and a datum elevation.
Stockpile
Compute and report the volume of a measured stockpile to a surface derived from the toe of the stockpile.
Depression
Compute and report the volume of a measured depression or excavation to a surface derived from the top of the depression.
Isopach
Compute and report cut and fill volumes from a previously saved isopach surface that represents the difference between two other DTM surfaces.
Settings
Accumulate volumes
Add volumes to previously calculated excavation and fill volumes. Enter volumes or use the default totals from the last volume calculation.
Shrink/​swell factors
Enter factors that represent the difference between the original in-place volume before it is cut, and its final in-place volume after being placed and compacted into fill. Swell numbers are positive numbers greater than 1 and less than 2. For example, 1.2 equals a 20% swell. Shrink numbers are positive numbers less than 1. For example, .8 equals a 20% shrink. Generally, only the fill factor should be varied, leaving the excavation factor at 1.0.
Computation method
Volume totals only
Report only the total volumes.
Volumes by depth increment
Report volumes between depths at a specified increment.
Volumes by elevation range
Report volumes over the entire elevation range between intervals of elevations measured from an index elevation. For example, if the interval is 2 metres, the index elevation is 100.5 metres, and the elevation range is 98.5 to 106.5, the volumes are calculated for 98.5-100.5, 100.5-102.5, 102.5-104.5, 104.5-106.5, etc.

Isopach data creation
Save computed isopach
Retain the temporary isopach surface objects on the specified layer. The layer name should indicate which two DTMs were used.
Isopach colors
Select the colours for excavated points, for filled points and for breaklines created on the isopach layer.
OK
Accept changes to Earthwork settings.
Cancel
Cancel changes to settings.
First
Select the layer for the first DTM surface.
Second
Select the layer for the second DTM surface.
Boundaries
Select any limiting boundaries.
OK
Compute volumes.
Close
Close the command.

Tips

DTM, DEM and TIN.
A Digital Terrain Model is also referred to as a Triangulated Irregular Network or TIN. A DTM of points on a regular grid is often referred to as a Digital Elevation Model or DEM.
Isopach
The isopach surface is the surface representing the difference between two other surfaces. Isopachs are contours extracted from the isopach surface. Surface-to-surface volumes are limited to the extents of the isopach surface, which is formed from the difference points within the overlapping extents of the two surfaces and the boundary.
Quick isopach generation
If Quick isopach generation in LINKSET is ON, intersection points between the triangles are not included in the isopach surface, whch is quicker, but less accurate.
Depression
The volume of water displayed is the excavation volume. See also GCDAMVOL.
Initial Surface to Design Surface Volumes
If your design surface has batters to an existing surface, project the batters using DESIGN or SIDESLOPE before calculating volumes to insure that the design sideslopes are projected. Otherwise, vertical sideslopes may be projected up or down.
Surface to Surface
Surface-to-surface volumes are calculated by computing the isopach between two DTMs or between a datum and a DTM. First, each point is projected onto the other surface, the corresponding elevation interpolated, and the elevation difference is stored with the generated isopach point. The breaklines (of both surfaces are used to generate isopach breaklines. Additional points are inserted into the isopach breaklines where they cross DTM triangles (unless quick isopach generation is on).
Prismoidal volumes
The triangulated isopach surface is used to determine the volume by breaking the data for each triangle into the appropriate number of truncated vertical prisms. If the three points of a triangle all have positive or all have negative elevations (all fill or all cut) then a single triangular prism is present. If the isopach triangle has both positive and negative elevations (cut and fill) then the triangle is broken into a triangular prism and a quadrilateral prism. The volume of each prism is equal to the average elevation difference times the planimetric area. The total fill volume for the isopach is the sum of all positive prismoidal volumes. The total cut volume is the sum of all negative prismoidal volumes.
End-area and grids
The prismoidal method is more accurate than cross section or grid methods using average end area. The differences obtained between methods depend on the size of the grid or interval of cross sections and irregularity of the surfaces. Smooth surfaces may show differences of less than 1%. Some test cases have shown differences of as much as 10% when the cross section interval is 50 foot and the terrain is rough. As the size of the grid or cross section interval decreases, these volumes better agree with volumes computed from the isopach surface triangles. Use GCGRDVOL to report prismoidal volumes inside a grid or many boundaries.
Accurate volumes require accurate DTMs
The accuracy of the calculations is no better than the accuracy of the data and the calculated DTM. If breaklines are not properly used to form the proper TIN, good point data can produce bad volumes. If an insufficient number of points are used to describe a surface, then irregularities from the recorded data to the actual ground will produce volumes differing from field conditions.
Additional points
Set the maximum number of objects in System Configuration (SYSTEM) high enough to allow for at least as many additional points again as are in the two surfaces. The absolute maxium is 20,000,000. Duplicate points created by DTM formation are moved to layer 0. Deleting these will increase the number of new points you can create.
Check your models
Before forming any DTM from data imported from any source, use GC92 to check for duplicate points with elevation differences, and check for plines that should first be converted to sets. Only then, check the DTMs by EVALTDM, CONTOUR and 3D VISUALISER before computing any volumes.

The isopach DTM is created by forming a DTM from the created points on the isopach layer. If this surface has islands, linear extremities, incorrect data, or anything else that would cause a DTM to not form as expected, the volumes and areas will be "incorrect". If the reported volumes do not make sense, or the reported total area exceeds the area of the boundary, save the computed isopach surface and compare with the boundary. Check some sample elevations to confirm that "cut/excavation" and "fill" are the right way around.

DTM Edge
Use LINKSET to set the correct link settings for a DTM, then use DTMEDGE to fix the boundary to with a bounding set and GCDTMEDG to adjust it before adjusting link settings for any other surface.
Unable to compute volume isopach
This error message is often triggered by very acute angles on long thin triangles. Use a command like GCDIVIDE, GCCHORD or GC682SET to add more points and thus more triangles.
Alias
EARTHWORK command was previously known as VOLUME. VOLUME and VOL are aliases for EARTHWORK.

See also

GC20
Report volumes including cut|fill areas
GCGRDVOL
Report volumes of multiple regions
EARTHWRK
Report volumes by end-area in columns
XVOLUMES
Report end-area volumes to .CSV
DRNVOLMS
Report volumes of ponds
GCDAMVOL
Report volumes of dams

Command dateGuideMenuSourceGC
12/03/09HELPTM DTM|​Earthwork volumes
DTM|​Earthwork reports
DTM|​Compute volumes
Field Data Module DTM 3
 EARTHWRK

Report roadjob volumes by end-area.

Report accumulated roadjob volumes by end-area in columns to P3Pad or a text file.

Dialog

Road job
Select a Roadjob
Chainage range
Specify start and end chainages.
Report interval
Enter a report interval. For all chainages, enter *.
Report
Select Screen to report to P3Pad. Select File to specify a text file.
Phase
Select one or all phases
Volumes
Report volumes for each surface material, by subgrade or within each closed shape.
Shrink|​swell factors
Apply shrink and swell factors to volumes for each surface material, by subgrade or within each closed shape.
Full report
Report, for each material used at each cross-section in the chainage range, the total volumes, the volumes by material, Chainage totals and Totals Only.
Chainage|​Station totals
Reports, the cut|fill and total volumes at each cross-section in the report range and Totals Only.
Totals only
Report only the total cut and fill volumes across the report range.

Curve Corrections

When computing the volume of each material, the average of its cross-sectional area to adjacent cross-sections is multiplied by the distance between the cross-sections to get its volume. When one or more of the cross-sections occurs on a curved segment of the alignment a correction can be applied to account for the condition that the centroid of these cross-sectional areas may be to either the inside or outside of the HAL. The effective distance between the cross-sections is increased if the centroid is on the outside of the curve, and decreased if on the inside. Curve corrections increase the accuracy of the earthwork computations. Curve correction can be described as a normal average-end-area calculation plus or minus a correction for curvature.

Vol=½(Area1+Area2)Lm ± Crv

Where Crv describes an adjustment in the length between sections due to the curve and an adjustment due to the locations of the centroids of the two end areas. A thorough discussion of this method can be found in Route Location and Design by Thomas F. Hickerson under the heading "Correction for Road Curvature".

See also EARTHWORK for prismoidal volumes, GCGRDVOL for prismoidal volumes between xlines and XVOLUMES for end-area volumes to .CSV.

If you get zero volumes when you expect sensible values, see FIXLAYERS.

Command date Guide Menu Source GC
29/10/08 RG 1005 Roads|​Reports|​Earthwork...
Channel|​Reports|​Dredge volumes...
Secured 471
 EDIT

Edit any object.

Edit properties of any object according to one of seven object types.

Sets

A set is a string of straight or arc segments joining point objects.

  • Replace a point with another point.
  • Insert a point into a set before a selected point.
  • Append a point to the end of a set.
  • Delete a selected point from the set. If the set contains only two points, the entire set is deleted.
  • Reverse the order of the points. See also REVERSE.
  • Change the set Smoothness. See SETSMOOTH.
  • Reorder the points of the set so that the selected point becomes the first point in the set, the next point becomes the second and so on.
  • Swap the first specified point with the second specified point
  • Toggle the subtended angle of an arc between > and < 180°.
  • Change cut and fill Slope values.
  • Open or close the set. A closed set connects the first point and last point with a set segment.
  • Change CAD properties: layer, colour, linetype, group, name, reference object (parent) and start chainage.

Plines

A pline is a string of straight or curved segments with a single elevation.

  • Move an IP (PI, intersection point, control point, cp or vertex) from one location to another.
  • Insert a vertex before the selected vertex.
  • Append one or more vertices to the end of the pline.
  • Delete the selected vertex.
  • Reverse the order of the vertices of a selected pline.
  • Spline or desplines the pline.
  • Reorder the vertices of a pline.
  • Swap the first specified vertex with the second specified vertex.
  • Close or open the pline.
  • Undo the last change to pline.
  • Change CAD properties: layer, colour, linetype, group, name, reference object (parent), start chainage, elevation.

Text

Text is displayed using characters from a font.

  • If segment point numbers are displayed, the text was originally created by a command that included dimensions or differences between those points. See LABELSEG, LABGRADE and TXTHTDIF.
  • Copy text from another text object.
  • Enter up to 255 characters of text.
  • Origin is the text insertion location.
  • Elevation.
  • The bearing orients the text.
  • Open the Eat Code Insertion Aid Dialog Box.
  • Leader line colours are set globally by DRAFTSET.
    • Select the leader line style, indicating the use of a leader line, or [none]. If the subject text is a segment label, select the Crows Feet style (dimension arrows), or not. Toggle crow's feet with CROWFOOT.
    • Select leader line linetype. The leader line is drawn from the subject being labeled to the text.
    • Designate the location to which the leader line points. The leader line will normally point to the subject of a callout, but it can actually point anywhere you wish.
    • Assign a gap in project units between the leader line point and the beginning of the leader line. If the gap is expressed as negative, the gap scales with the view scale.
  • Select the border style and linetype. See also DRAFTSET.
  • The attributes of a subject of the text object can be used in EAT codes.
  • A HAL is an alignment from which the callout's subject text can include EAT codes that display a chainage and an offset.
  • EAT... Include EAT Extended attribute text
  • Metrics... See TEXTMETRICS.
  • CAD... Change layer, colour, group or reference object (parent)

Blocks

Blocks are made up from points, plines, text and other blocks. Sets in blocks are converted to points and plines.

  • Change properties: layer, colour, group, reference object, name, origin, elevation, auto scale, map colour, auto rotation, and subject point number
  • The block can be scaled in X, Y and Z, and rotated about those axes.
  • If the block is tied to a point number, the point and block will move together.
  • If AutoScale is ON, the block changes size with the view scale
  • If Map Colour is ON for this block, the block is displayed in the block colour. If OFF, in the colours of the objects in the block. When a block is first created, the block colour is the same as the line colour of the layer.
  • If Auto rotation is ON, the block is rotated so that it is displayed through a dynaview so it can be read from the left or bottom of a sheet.
  • If you change the block name, the appearance will change to match the appearance of any existing block with the new name.
  • Use commands like BLOCK, UNITBLK, MKBLKINT, SCLBLKS and AUTODRAFT to control block placement.

Dynaviews

Dynaviews are views of objects within a plotbox.

  • Change properties: layer, name, auto off, group, boundary, layer list name, scale, rotation and location.
  • If Auto off is ON, this turns off the display of objects that are referenced and not a part of the family tree.
  • The boundary is the closed pline that defines the extent of the dynaview.
  • Specify a layer list to limit a dynaview to display only those layers. See LLISTSET.
  • The dynaview is located at the first vertex in the boundary pline

Points

Points are objects at single locations defined by X, Y and Z values with names according to the view mode.

  • Change properties: point number, layer, colour, group, name, contourability, location, elevation and label.
  • See LABELPOINT for point labelling.

Tables

Tables showing properties of set segments, with attribute labels that link the segments to the table, are created and edited by Label Table (LABELTABLE).

Command dateGuideMenuSourceGC
12/03/09HELPTM Edit|​Edit object Field Data Module 32
 EDIT​INI

Edit initialisation file TMODWIN.INI

Edit the Terramodel initialisation file TMODWIN.INI.

Installing Terramodel or the Geocomp Update creates or modifies TMODWIN.INI which contains settings for the Terramodel user-interface that control colours, menus, toolbar buttons, function keys, and so on. Use EDITINI to import any initialisation settings, including settings that cannot be controlled using Terramodel commands.

If there is no current TMODWIN.INI, EDITINI creates a new blank one into which you "Import Sections from old INI file".

View settings

The displayed background, cursor and highlight colours depend on the current palette and colourmap (PALETTE).

Background colour
Select a colour number for the background of graphics window.
Cursor colour
Select a colour number for the graphics cursor.
HiLight colour
Select a colour number for the colour used to show selected objects.
Frame height and width
Specify the size of the Terramodel window frame on start up.
Command columns
Specify the maximum number of characters for the Command Line.
Point label height
Enter an arbitrary value to adjust the default height of point labels created or refreshed by F7, F8, F9, F11 or GCREDRAW. If the labels are too small, enter a larger value. If too big, a smaller. For the default size, enter *.
Fix view scale when labeling points
Turn on when drafting so that the view scale is constant, and the labels created by F7, F8, F9 and F11 change size as you zoom in and out. Turn off so that the view scale adjusts so those labels stay the same size as you zoom in and out.
View settings
Update the view settings and prompt to restart Terramodel.

Terramodel Search Path

Terramodel looks for prototypes, blocks, TMLS and many other file types firstly in the current project folder, then the folders in the Terramodel Search Path (TSP) in order, then specific Terramodel software folders that do not need to be added here. Sub-folders are ignored unless you include them.

Edit or add user-definable locations into the Terramodel Search Path. Use Crtl Enter to insert new lines for each folder.

Click "Update Terramodel Search Path" to remove any paths that do not exist and replace the TSP with the new values.

Click "Add TMCustom to TSP" to add C:\TMCUSTOM and C:\TMCUSTOM\GEOCOMP folders, which are required for Geocomp Update M or later.

The TSP is defined in the [System] section of TMODWIN.INI. If you "Import sections from Old INI file", and import a [System] section that includes TSP, those paths will be replaced. If user-definable files are in a folder that is no longer included, those files will no longer be available. If you do not want to update your TSP, but you do want to update something else in [System], such as your menu file, omit TSP= from the .INI to be selected and "Import Selected".

Fix Status Bar / System, etc.

Click "Fix Status Bar / System, etc." to reset values of some properties:

  • Edit set: Clear default mode
  • Coordinate scroll: Visible
  • Coordinate scroll: Location 300 pixels from left and 300 from top of primary display
  • Coordinate scroll: Coordinates visible
  • Coordinate scroll: Bearings and distances visible
  • Coordinate scroll: Station|chainages and offsets visible
  • Coordinate scroll: Match E|N decimal places with precision of coordinates in UNITSSET
  • Status bar: Visible
  • Command line: Visible
  • Command line: 200 characters long
  • Message scroll: Visible
  • Message scroll: 2 rows
  • Toolbar: Visible
  • Toolbar: Current layer visible
  • Toolbar: Current linetype visible
  • Toolbar: Current object colour visible
  • Toolbar: Current point colour visible
  • Plotterset: Suspend lock driver off
  • File menu: 8 recent files
  • System: Undo 19999 objects
  • System: Dragging mode on
  • System: 0.001 units tolerance for unequal arc radii
  • System: Maximum of 20,000,000 objects (in P3Server)
  • Alias: Remove any remnant aliases. See ALIAS.

Copy and backup

Copy the current TMODWIN.INI to a selected location or backup to TMODWIN.BUP in its current location.

Import sections from an old INI file.

Import or replace sections from an .INI file such as those that define colourmaps, palettes, penmaps, carousels, function keys and the toolbar. Click "Show Old INI File" to browse to select the .INI file, select the relevant sections by Click, Control Click or Shift Click, and then Import. New sections are added. Sections with names that match sections in the current TMODWIN are updated or replaced and reported to message scroll. Certain sections indicated by *** are not imported, such as lists of palettes or carousels.

Show old INI File
Browse to select an old TMWODWIN.INI file, or another INI file containing relevant sections in the same format. Typical "old .ini files" include:
  • A TMODWIN.INI that you copied as a backup
  • A TMODWIN.INI that you copied from your old computer
  • A TMODWIN.INI that you abridged with just your changed sections or parts of sections
  • C:\TMCustom\​Geocomp\​TRIMBLE_​DEFAULTS_​TMODWIN.INI with sections from a default installation with no Geocomp Update
  • C:\TMCustom\​Geocomp\​GEOCOMP_​AUST_DEFAULTS_​TMODWIN.INI with sections from Geocomp Update with Australian defaults
  • C:\TMCustom\​Geocomp\​GEOCOMP_​USA_DEFAULTS_​TMODWIN.INI with sections from Geocomp Update with American defaults
  • C:\TMCustom\​Geocomp\​HDMS_​DEFAULTS_​TMODWIN.INI with sections to suit Hydrographic mapping
  • C:\TMCustom\​Geocomp\​FIELD_DATA_​TMODWIN.INI with sections to suit Field data module (no key)
  • C:\TMCustom\​Geocomp\VIEWER_​TMODWIN.INI with sections to suit Viewer only (no key and restricted menu)
  • C:\TMCustom\​Geocomp\​DELETE_​COLORMAPS_​TMODWIN.INI with empty colormaps
  • C:\TMCustom\​Geocomp\​DELETE_​PALETTES_​TMODWIN.INI with empty palettes
  • C:\TMCustom\​Geocomp\​P3PAD_​REPORT_​TMODWIN.INI with the default P3Pad report font
Import Selected
Import configurations from the selected sections. New configurations are created. Configurations with the same names are updated. Other configurations are unchanged.
Replace Selected
Replace the whole of selected sections. All existing configurations in those sections are deleted. Only imported configurations are retained.
Import Selected Sections | Replace Selected Sections
Import or replace selected sections into the current TMODWIN.INI file.

Remove sections from TMODWIN.INI.

To delete a section from TMODWIN.INI, import an empty section with the same name and "Replace Selected".

Palette, colourmap, penmap and carousel

To make current an imported palette, colourmap, penmap or carousel, use PALETTE, PLOTSET or PLOTTERSET afterwards.

To remove a palette or colourmap, select the corresponding empty palette or colourmap section from C:\TMCustom\​Geocomp\​DELETE_​COLORMAPS_​TMODWIN.INI or C:\TMCustom\​Geocomp\​DELETE_​PALETTES_​TMODWIN.INI. Penmaps are best removed with PLOTSET. Carousels are best removed with CAROUSEL.

Location of TMODWIN.INI

EDITINI reports the location of the current TMODWIN.INI on the title of the dialog. Depending on your versions of Terramodel and Geocomp Update and how they have been installed, this TMODWIN.INI may be in C:\Program files (x86)\Trimble\Terramodel\Locale\English (or some other Locale) or in a location set by an environmental variable. In addition, Windows can redirect these changes to a hidden copy in the VirtualStore. By using EDITINI, you don't need to know exactly where, when or how.

SlopeTable

DTMAREA, GC44, GC44CSV and GC82 refer to a table of decreasing percentage slope ranges defined in TMODWIN.INI. For example,

[SlopeTable]
TableSize=3
0=200.0
1=100.0
2=50.0

To edit the slope table, copy TMODWIN.INI to a location where you have permission to edit, use a text editor to change the ranges, then import the [SlopeTable] section from that file. To restore the default slope table, import from C:\TMCustom\Geocomp\TMODWIN_TRIMBLE_DEFAULTS.INI.

After defining the slope ranges, specify the corresponding TableSize up to a maximum of 100.

SHADESLP uses a separate Shade Slope Ranges (.SSR) file.

See also

Other commands that edit TMODWIN.INI:

AUTOSAVE
Configure Autosave delay and location
CALLOUT and GC21
Load or change the callout style
COMMANDTOGGLE
Turn on the command line
CAROUSEL
Add or modify a pen carousel definition
COORDS
Configure the coordinate scroll
CORDSCRL
Reset the coordinate scroll
FAVOURITES
Favourite commands
GC64BIT
Convert software paths from 32-bit to 64-bit and add Geocomp folder
GCHELP
Report and edit Terramodel Search Path
LINETYPETOGGLE
Toggle linetype selection on the toolbar
MENUCFG
Configure the menus
NEW, OPEN, SAVE and SAVEAS
Current project name and location
OBJSNAP
Set running (object) snap modes
PALETTE
Select the current palette and colourmap
PLOTTERSET
Add or edit plotter configurations and lock driver on|off
STATUSBARTOGGLE
Toggle the status bar display
SYSTEM
Modify company name and address, macro directory, Max objects, Max alpha points, TML debug level, lock file on open, undo buffer, vertex marker size, cursor aperture size, toolbox autostart, mouse dragging or prompting for new points in sets.
TOOLBOX
Display, edit and save toolboxes in workspaces
VIEWSET and VIEWSCAL
Change view settings

Some of these commands also modify values in P3SERVER.INI, project variables, environmental variables or Windows registry entries.

TML date  SourceGC
08/02/22     Geocomp Update or $250 MM2
 EFFICIEN

Haul road efficiency calculator.

Report haul road efficiency of a road job.

Enter settings for reporting chainage | station interval, Rimpull graph, rolling resistance, gravity and truck weights.

TML date  Source 
08/02/22     Geocomp Update or $250  
 ELE2NAME

Change the name of selected points and plines to match their elevations.

Change the name of selected points and plines in the Profile and Xsect views to match their Y values and in the Plan and other views to match their Z values.

Overwrite, prefix or suffix the names.

TML date  Source 
08/02/22     Geocomp Update or $250  
 ELEV​ALONGSET

Modify the elevation of points along a set using a vertical angle

Modify the elevation of selected points within a particular set based on their position along the set with respect to a 3D reference point in that set, and a vertical angle.

If the specified vertical angle is other than a vertical distance, Terramodel multiplies the implied slope by the horizontal distance between the points along the set's alignment, and adds the resulting change in elevation to the elevation of the reference point to compute the elevation of the selected point.

If *
The selected point's elevation will always be set to the computed elevation.
If <
The point's elevation will only be altered if the computed elevation is less than the point's existing elevation, or if the point is currently a 2D point.
If >
The point's elevation will only be altered if the computed elevation is greater than the point's existing elevation, or if the point is currently a 2D point.

This command is similar to ELEVREFPT, except that the distance between the selected point and the reference point is determined along the horizontal alignment of a set within which they are both members.

See also ELEVREFPLANE.

Command dateGuideMenuSource 
12/03/09HELPTM Modify|​​Elevation|​​Along set Secured  
 ELEV​ATION

Modify the elevation of selected objects.

Modify the elevation of selected objects to an absolute elevation or relative to the current elevation of the object.

Use the radio buttons to select Absolute or Relative.

Turn 3D points into 2D points by entering an asterisk (*) as the elevation.

One way to balance earthwork is to repeatedly change the relative elevation of the design DTM by layer then repeat to project new sideslopes.

Replaced by GCELEV which does the same thing but with better-labelled radio buttons.

See also GC69 , GC53, GCNOELEV and CUTFILL.

Command dateGuideMenuSourceGC
12/03/09HELPTM Modify|​Elevation|​Elevation Field Data Module 9
 ELEV​OBJS

Interpolate elevation of points, text and blocks from a DTM.

Replace the elevation of selected points, text and blocks by interpolating from the DTM.

See also DTMPTS which only adds elevations on 2D points and GCPTSTXT which takes the elevation from the value of the nearest text object.

TML date MenuSourceGC
08/02/22   Modify|​Elevation|​From DTM Geocomp Update or $250 237
 ELEV​REFPLANE

Modify the elevation of points along a set using a vertical angle

Modify the elevation of selected points by projecting them vertically to an imaginary plane surface.

The plane surface is defined with respect to a 3D reference point by specifying a bearing, and a vertical angle.

The vertical angle is applied in the direction of the indicated bearing, establishing the tilt of the plane surface, which passes through the reference point.

If *
The selected point's elevation will always be set to the computed elevation.
If <
The point's elevation will only be altered if the computed elevation is less than the point's existing elevation, or if the point is currently a 2D point.
If >
The point's elevation will only be altered if the computed elevation is greater than the point's existing elevation, or if the point is currently a 2D point.

See also ELEVREFPT.

Command dateGuideMenuSource 
12/03/09HELPTM Modify|​Elevation|​Reference plane Secured  
 ELEV​REFPT

Modify the elevation of points along a set using a vertical angle

Modify the elevation of selected points based on their horizontal distance from a 3D reference point and a vertical angle relationship.

If the specified vertical angle is other than a vertical distance, the implied slope will be multiplied by the distance between the points, and the resulting change in elevation will be added to the elevation of the reference point to compute the elevation of the selected point.

If the specified vertical angle is entered as a vertical distance, it will simply be added to the elevation of the reference point to get the elevation of the selected points.

If *
The selected point's elevation will always be set to the computed elevation.
If <
The point's elevation will only be altered if the computed elevation is less than the point's existing elevation, or if the point is currently a 2D point.
If >
The point's elevation will only be altered if the computed elevation is greater than the point's existing elevation, or if the point is currently a 2D point.
Command dateGuideMenuSource 
12/03/09HELPTM Modify\​Elevation\​Reference point Secured  
 ELFS

Show elevation and grade of a profile at a chainage.

The chainage can be keyed-in or selected graphically in the profile view.

TML date MenuSource 
08/02/22   Reports|​More...|​Elevation at chainage
Reports|​More...|​Elevation at station
Trimble or Geocomp Update  
 ELLIPSE

Create an ellipse.

Create a pline that aproximates an ellipse.

Major axis record
Select a set or pline that extends along the major axis
Minor axis length
Enter the length of the minor axis
No. segs
Enter the number of segments around the new pline

TML date MenuSource 
08/02/22   Draw|​Pline|​Ellipse Geocomp Update or $250  
 ELV​PLINE

Interpolate elevations onto contour plines.

Modify the elevations of selected plines to match the averages of the elevations interpolated from the specified DTM at the vertices of each pline.

The elevations are rounded to the nearest interval in the current CONTOURSET command settings. Use ELVPLINE to convert 2D plines to contours when you have the DTM.

See also GCCONTXT, GCMULCON and PLTO3D.

TML date MenuSource 
29/10/08   Modify|​Elevation|​Pline elev. from DTM Field Data Module  
 EMXSALIGN

Import a Geopak alignment from EMXS.

Import an alignment from a Geopak geometry report format exported from EMXS software.

See also RDSCACALN and RDSGPALIGN.

TML date  Source 
29/10/08     Field Data Module  
 ERRELIP

Define error ellipse attributes.

Define attributes on selected points derived from any error ellipse blocks attached to the points.

These points can then be labelled with attributes using EAT TEXT.

RDE can create elliptical blocks indicating the possible error by least squares. These blocks are circles which are scaled by the errors in x and y, then scaled again by 1000 so they are readily visible, then rotated.

The TML name is ERR_ELIP. If ERRELIP does not run from the command line, create an alias from ERRELIP to ERR_ELIP or enter ERR_ELIP. ERRELIP requires the attribute definition file ERR_ELIP.ADF.

TML date  Source 
08/02/22     Geocomp Update or $200  
 EVALDTM

Evaluate DTM breaklines.

Report potential problems with DTM breakline formation.

For each set in a DTM layer, report:

  • Unused segments
  • 2D Points
  • Non-​contourable points
  • Points on different layers
  • Dead regions

Every straight set segment which connects two 3D contourable points on the same layer is a breakline unless it is crossed by another breakline with a higher record number.

TML date MenuSourceGC
08/02/22   DTM|​Evaluate DTM surface Geocomp Update or $200 140
 ESRIIN

Import ESRI Shapefile (.SHP, .SHX and .DBF) data.

Import ESRI Shapefile data using the ESRI (shp) import script.

The ESRI Shapefile format is defined by ESRI (Environmental Systems Research Institute) and is exported from many GIS applications.

ESRI Shapefiles consist of at least three files. The import script requires the .SHP, .SHX and .DBF files, which contain the geometry, the index and the attributes, to have the same name and location. If a .PRJ file is also supplied, view this in a text editor to determine the projection (coordinate system) of the other data.

ESRI shapes of different types are supplied separately. For example, a well (point), a river (pline) and a lake (set) would be stored in three separate shapefile datasets.

Do not confuse ESRI shapefiles wth unrelated .SHX and .SHP font files used by AutoCAD.

Dialog

Shape file
Browse to select the .SHP file.
Default layer
Select the default layer for the created objects.
Import points as
Import points as points, sets or plines. Try each.
Map properties
Any database fields found in the Shapefile are listed under File Property. For each field that you want to import, highlight the "File property" then a select the corresponding "Terramodel property" from the drop-down list. For example, if one of the file properties is "Contour_ht", to import that, select the Terramodel property "Elevation".

Next
Go to the next page, check the import summary, select Import, check the import report, and Finish.

Map properties

File properties are not imported unless you select them. Select a property to suit the data; map "PT_ID" to "Point number" or "Name"; don't try to map a name to a colour. Only one file property can be mapped to a particular Terramodel property; for example to import elevations from both "spot_ht" and "contour", import into seperate Terramodel projects and then transfer by TMX.

Any selected "ELEVATION" property is always imported as a Terramodel "Elevation".

See also

GCESRIIN
Import a grid of points with elevations in ESRI ASCII grid format.
ESRIOUT
Export ESRI shapefile data using the ESRI (shp) export script.
IMPORT
Import scripts.
Script date  Source 
29/10/08    Field Data Module  
 ESRIOUT

Export ESRI Shapefile (.SHP, .SHX and .DBF) data.

Export objects to ESRI Shapefile data for GIS using the ESRI (shp) export script.

The exported ESRI Shapefile data consists of .SHP, .SHX and .DBF files with the same name and location. Create shapefile data in a new folder to keep them separate and together. The files supplied together can be referred to as a "shapefile". The simplest way to supply the data together is usually to zip them.

.PRJ files describe the projection. If a .PRJ file is requested, obtain a .PRJ file from your client, read it in a text editor to determine their coordinate system, transform your Terramodel data to that coordinate system, export the shapefile data using the script, copy their .PRJ file to match the name and location of the other files you created, and supply them together.

The file extensions .SHX and .SHP are also used to describe unrelated CAD font files which cannot be imported using this script.

Dialog

Shape file
Browse to select the name and location of the .SHP and other files.
Export objects
Export points as points, sets or plines.
Export objects as
Export objects as 2D or 3D.
Common attributes to be exported
Select any required Name, Layer, Colour or Attribute properties. Do NOT select Attributes unless they already exist in the project.
Next
Go to the next page to select properties to be exported, pick objects, Next to check the export summary, and Finish.
Point properties
Point properties that can be exported are Point number and Elevation.
Set properties
Set properties that can be exported are Area, Perimeter, Azimuth, Distance, From Point, To Point and Lot name.
Pline properties
Pline that can be exported are Area, Perimeter, Elevation and Beginning Chainage | Station.
Attribute properties
If Terramodel attributes have been defined in the project, those attributes can be matched to shapefile fields. If no Attributes have been defined, the export will fail. For this reason, do not normally select Attributes.

ESRI shapes in a shapefile are required to be of the same shape type. For example, a well (point), a river (pline) and a lake (set) would be stored in three separate datasets.

If the export fails, try again with different settings.

See also

ESRIIN
Import ESRI shapefile data using the ESRI (shp) import script.
EXPORT
Export scripts.
Script date  Source 
29/10/08    Field Data Module  
 EXEC

Execute an external program

Execute an external .EXE or .DLL application using arguments for the path and variables.

For example, DCEDIT is an ALIAS for EXEC "C:\Program Files (x86)\​Common Files\​Trimble\​DCEditor\​DCEditor.exe".

The maximum number of characters in the arguement is 66.

See also RUN and CMD.

Command dateGuide SourceGC
12/03/09HELPTM   Field Data Module 200
 EXIT

Exit Terramodel

Save recent changes to objects, close the current project and exit Terramodel.

If you have made changes to objects since the last save, you will be prompted to save changes. If you have changed project variables only, save changes before exiting.

When you save changes, records are renumbered to remove any gaps in the sequence of record numbers caused by deleting objects.

See also RUN.

Command dateGuideMenuSourceGC
12/03/09HELPTM File|​Exit Field Data Module 0
 EXPLODE

Explode blocks, text, tables, dynaviews and complex linetypes.

Explode selected blocks, text, tables, dynaviews and complex linetypes into components.

To explode theseinto theseuse
one set or plinetwo sets or plinesBREAK
setsset segmentsDISJOIN
sets with arcssets with chordsARCBREAK or GCCHORD
plines with no spirals or vertical curvespline segmentsDISJOIN
plines with spiralsplines with arcs and chordsOFFSETDIST
plines with spirals, vertical curves or splinesplines with 2D chordsGCCHORD or FILTER
alignment plines with arcs, spirals, vertical curves or splinessets with 3D chordsGCCHORD
sets or plines with dashed linetypesplines with chordsGCEXPLOD
sets or plines with complex linetypestext in symbol font and plines with chordsGCEXPLOD
normal textplinesGCEXPLOD
text in symbol fontplinesGCEXPLOD
extended attribute text (EAT) with border and leader linenormal text, border plines and leader line plinesGCEXPLOD
leader line plinesplines and arrowhead symbol textGCEXPLOD
blocksplines, text, blocks and pointsGCEXPLOD or EXPLODE
hatchingplinesGCEXPLOD
label tablesplines and textEXPLODE
dimensionsrounded textTEXTRND
lot labelsnormal textLABELSETS Text
lot segment labelsEAT textLABELSETS Text
point labelstextLABELPOINT Explode
symbols on pointspoints and text with symbol fontLABELPOINT Explode
symbols on pointspoints and blocksSYM2BLK
mass haul diagramsplines and textMASSHAUL and MASSDIAG
dynaviewsobjectsEXPLODE or GCEXPLOD

Exploding blocks

  • Depending on how the blocks were created, EXPLODE and GCEXPLOD explode blocks differently with respect to layers, colours, elevations, names and sets. If one command doesn't do what you hoped, try the other one.
  • Because blocks can be nested inside blocks, you may need to repeat to explode more blocks.
  • Optionally, delete the old objects.
  • Recursive blocks, that contain blocks with same name, cannot be exploded. Use DELETE or BLKREAD.
  • Blocks can be selected or restricted by Type. For example, to select blocks but not text, use SEARCH settings or Right mouse button Type.
  • Explode hatching before you include any in a new block.
  • A block with Map colour ON is displayed in the colour of the block; with Map colour OFF, in the colour of the objects in the block. Use SCLBLKS to change the map colour status of multiple blocks.
  • Use CLIP to break plines or sets at a boundary.
  • Use DELBLKS to delete missing external blocks.
  • Use GCPURGE to purge all unused blocks.
  • Use SYM2BLK to replace symbols with blocks.
  • Use GCBLKFIX to explode blocks, modify the colours of the objects and recreate the blocks.
Command dateGuideMenuSource 
12/03/09HELPTM Edit|​Explode Field Data Module  
 EXPLORE

Windows Explorer toolbar button

Open Windows File Explorer.

Open Windows File Explorer file manager.

Windows File Explorer is also known as Explore, Explorer, My Computer, Computer and This PC.

Alias date MenuSource 
08/02/22   Toolbar button user-definable  
 EXPORT

Export data using scripts.

Using a system of configurable scripts, export data from Terramodel, directly to some survey instruments, or to a data file.

Survey formats

Scripts export or upload to a wide range of survey instruments and software including:

  • ASCII points
  • DiNi
  • .DWG and .DXF
  • Elta
  • ESRI shapefiles
  • Geocomp
  • Geodimeter
  • LandXML
  • MicroStation V7 .DGN
  • Nikon
  • Paydirt SiteWork
  • SDMS
  • Softdesk
  • Sokkia .SDR
  • SMI
  • SpectraPrecision .ALN, .RLN
  • Star*Net
  • Terramodel.PRO
  • Trimble Constructor
  • Trimble DiNi
  • Trimble SCS900
  • Trimble SiteWork
  • Trimble Survey Controller
  • Trimble Survey Data Card
  • Trimble DTM .TTM
  • Trimble Roading 3D .DC
  • Trimble Setout .DC
  • Tripod Data Systems (TDS)

Scripts

Some scripts come standard with Terramodel. Some are supplied with the Geocomp Update.

Some scripts export, some upload and some export and then upload. Some scripts download or import (see IMPORT).

The first item on the Export Script menu is always Export Script Manager (EXPORTSMGR). Scripts enabled by the manager are listed for selection from the File | Export/Upload menu.

Scripts always open when run from the command line, even when they are hidden from the list. Therefore, scripts defined in the Alias Manager (ALIAS) can always be opened by entering the alias. For example, PENZDOUT command always opens the "P,E,N,Z,D _e" ASCII points export script, if that script and alias exist.

ESRI shapefiles (.SHP)

See ESRIOUT.

LandXML (.XML)

The LandXML export script exports DTMs as surfaces and simple alignments from road jobs.

To export DTMs to LandXML, see also DTM2XML, DTM2LDBX and POWERGDE.

To export roads and alignments to LandXML, see also GCXMLOUT, GCMULXML, ROADRUN and GCUMC3D.

To import LandXML, see IMPORT LandXML.

Trimble

Many export and upload functions are described here: Transfer data to and from Trimble.

Scripts and commands
3300 | 3600 | 5600 | Constructor | TS315
Survey points export scripts.
DiNi Digital Level
Digital level export script.
Roadline and Roadline 3D
See GCRLNOUT, P29, P39 and GCMULTGD.
SCS900
Site Control System 900. See From Terramodel to SCS900 via script, Export sets, plines and text for background map as .DXF, Upload sets as .DC and Export and upload a roadway.
SiteVision Office
See .DWG and .DXF
Survey Controller
Upload via Survey Controller. See Upload points and Export and upload strings.
Survey Data Card
See Prepare Survey Data Card.
DTM (TTM)
Export a Digital Terrain Model as .TTM.
FCX | FCL | FAL
Export feature code libraries from .ADC. See Feature code libraries.
Roading 3D (dc)
Road alignments. See Trimble Roading 3D (DC) - Notes, Export design using templates as .DC, GCDCOUT and GCMULTDC.
Setout (DC)
See Export points as .DC.
GCDCOUT
Export cross sections at intersecting sets to .DC.
GCMULTDC
Export multiple alignments to .DC.
GCPTSOUT
Output points to ASCII files including Geodimeter Area, Trimble $PTNL,PJK .TXT and Trimble Recon LM80.
SURVCONT
Export Moss GENIO to Trimble Survey Controller.
TRMBGRID
Export Trimble gridded DTM .DTX.
TRMBROAD
Export a roadway to Trimble .TTA or .TTX. For most instruments, TRMBROAD has been replaced by Trimble Roading 3D (DC) script, GCDCOUT and GCMULTDC.
GCLFAOUT, GCSZAOUT and GCTMAOUT
Export for Trimble Alignment Planning (Quantm).

.DWG and .DXF

  1. Specify a .DWG or .DXF file and location, select a conversion mapping file to control colours, fonts, linetypes and widths, and a version.
  2. To export a DTM surface as 3D face entities, select the layer here.
  3. Do not export points as blocks with attributes unless you want every point to be labeled with a point number, elevation and name.
  4. Do not explode custom linetypes if you want to maintain dimensions of linework.
  5. Always make file 3D, unless you have a requirement for 2D.
  6. Select the view from which to export before you pick objects.
  7. Select objects to be exported from that view.
Script options

The default script is AutoCAD (dwg or dxf). Geocomp AutoCAD (dwg) and BricsCAD scripts export using the Geocomp_64 colour scheme. SiteVision Office script uses a SiteVision office colour scheme. DWGOUT command calls Geocomp AutoCAD (dwg). DXFOUT command calls Geocomp AutoCAD (dxf).

The Autocad Conversion File (.ACF) substitutes colours, fonts and linetypes. See EXPORTSMGRfor details.

3D Faces

If you export a surface as 3D faces, do not also pick any objects on the same layer (otherwise they will clash in CAD). To export the surface with objects, first make that surface layer invisible, using a layer list or otherwise, and then select objects by Crossing. To export that surface only, pick objects by layer then do not select any layers.

See also GCCOPY to create a DTM surface from other layers and DTMSET to create a network of sets from a DTM.

Missing Browse button

If the Browse buttons to select the .DWG, .DXF and .ACF files are missing, see SSERIFE to install the required Windows font.

Layer names

Terramodel layer names are limited to 17 characters.

Spaces are only allowed in layer names for .DWG and .DXF files in AutoCAD 2000 format or later. The following characters are not allowed in any AutoCAD layer names:

 / \ “ : ; ? * | = ‘

Terramodel layer names can have all of these characters. When exporting from Terramodel to .DWG or .DXF using a script, any character that is not an Upper Case letter, a digit, a -, an _, or a $, is substituted with _, as is any space exported to version 10, 11, 13 or 14.

To replace layer names in an exported .DXF, with layer names longer than 17 characters, or with other characters, see DXFCHANG.

LandXML

The LandXML export script can export DTM layers, limited by window or boundary, or alignments from selected road jobs.

DTM2XML can also export a DTM layer, GCMULXML can export 3D sets as hals and vals, and GCXMLOUT can export a roadjob and 3D sets at cross sections.

Terramodel

While there is an export script for Terramodel.PRO files, we recommend transferring data using TMXOUT, PCOPY or the Terramodel.PRO import script instead.

MicroStation .DGN

The MicroStation script exports in V7 .DGN format, which does not support alphanumeric layer names. Export to MicroStation via .DWG instead.

Dialog
MicroStation target file
Browse to select a name and location for the V7 .DGN file, then click Next.
Conversion mapping file
Select a MicroStation conversion mapping file (.MCF) and click Next.
Seed file
Select a seed file, pick objects and then click Next.
Export set points
Export set points, or not.
Export from view
Select the view from which to select objects.
Number of objects selected
Show the number of objects selected by Pick objects.
Export summary
Check the export summary then Export and Finish.

See also

GCPTSOUT
Export points to various formats
IMPORT
Import using a script
SNRFILE
Find and replace text in a file

Command dateGuideMenuSourceGC
12/03/09 HELPIE, UG, FDM UG File|​Export/​Upload Field Data Module 188,​FC D,​FC I
 EXPORTGC

Export or report cross sections in Geocomp format.

Export or report cross sections from a road job surface.

Report cross sections from a road job surface showing at each xline the station | chainage, easting, northing and bearing, and the offset, elevation, crossfall and name of each change of grade.

Report to P3Pad or create a Geocomp .CES file.

TML date  SourceGC
08/02/22     Geocomp Update or $200 402,482
 EXPORT​SMGR

Export script manager.

Hide, create, edit, delete or run export scripts.

Dialog

Export script menu
Select export scripts from those listed in EXPORT or on the File | Export/Upload menu.
New...
  1. Enter the script name to appear in the File | Export/Upload menu. By convention, suffix the name of upload scripts with _u, export scripts with _e, and export and upload scripts with _e+u.
  2. Specify whether the action of the script is to
    • Export to disk.
    • Export to disk and upload to an instrument/data collector, or
    • Upload from disk
  3. Step though Next buttons to specify the details of the script.
Edit...
Edit the details of one selected script.
Delete
Delete one selected script by deleting the .xe or .xe_ file from the script file location.
Run
Run the selected script.
Close
Close the script manager.

Instrument/data collector

If you selected the action to upload or export and upload, select the device to upload to.

Generic instrument
Define a device that communicates via a serial port and is not already available for selection from the list.
Direct communication
Select from a list of devices that communicate via a serial port.
Time out (ms)
Enter a time out period in milliseconds.
Data format
Select a data format where applicable.
Add/Edit Devices
Add to the list or edit devices defined by Trimble Remote Device Manager.

Turning scripts on and off

Export scripts are stored as files of the same name as the menu item. If the script file name is ticked in Export Script Manager, the file extension is made .xe so the script is listed on the File | Export/Upload menu and in EXPORT. If not ticked, the extension is .xe_ and the script is not listed (unless a matching .xe is also present). Import scripts have the extensions .xi or .xi_.

Turn on scripts for instruments and formats relevant you and turn off scripts that are not. A large number of listed scripts makes finding the one you want difficult. A very large number of listed scripts can fill the display and cause scripts to call the wrong dialogs.

If turning on on a tick in the manager does not add a script to the menu, use Windows File Explorer (EXPLORE) to show "File name extensions" and "Hidden items", and then manually change the file extension of that export script from .xe_ to .xe. The location of the script file is either C:\Program files (x86)\​Trimble\​Shared\​ImportExport\ or C:\Users\​UserName\​AppData\​Local\​VirtualStore\​Program Files (x86)\​Trimble\​Shared\​ImportExport\. Substitute UserName with your User name. The script is displayed if a file with the extension .xe exists in either location.

If turning off a tick in the manager does not remove a script from the menu, use Windows File Explorer (EXPLORE) to show "File name extensions" and "Hidden items", and then manually change the file extension of that export script from .xe to .xe_. The location of that export script is either C:\Program files (x86)\​Trimble\​Shared\​ImportExport\ or C:\Users\​UserName\​AppData\​Local\​VirtualStore\​Program Files (x86)\​Trimble\​Shared\​ImportExport\. Substitute UserName with your User name. Rename .xe to .xe_, or delete, in both locations.

Unwanted scripts can be deleted by the Delete button and by deleting in Windows File Manager.

If your computer prevents you from creating, editing or copying scripts, try to work in the VirtualStore folder. Script files can also be copied from some other computer where you can edit them. Make sure that your file name, extension and location are correct and unique.

Changes to installed scripts can be overwritten by later updates, so give your own scripts unique names and back them up.

Creating Scripts

When creating an export script, preset export parameters to create a default set of responses. Some elements of your export process should not change from export to export. Other elements should only be entered as you run the script. During script creation, you are presented with every available export parameter.

There are three input possibilities for each control:

  • Leave blank for the user to input information at runtime. "Show this page at runtime".
  • Enter a default value for the user to verify. "Show this page at runtime".
  • Enter a default value for a field the user cannot view or change. Do not "Show this page at runtime".

Some controls are required at runtime. For instance, every export requires you to name an export file.

Not all fields are required during script creation. Fill those which are likely to be standard.

Remote Device Manager

When creating or editing a script that uploads, devices can be selected from the Trimble Remote Device Manager to upload to instruments and data collectors.

Predefined devices include 3600 Elta, 5600 Elta, Elta GPS, 3600 GDM, 5600 GDM, 5600 TDS, 3600 TDS, TDS Survey Pro CE, 3300, Survey Controller on COM1 and Survey Data Card.

Remote Device Manager device classes can also be added and updated by other Trimble applications. Some of the devices mentioned here require the installation of Trimble Data Transfer Utility 1.57 (TDTU).

To add or edit a device, select Add/Edit Devices...

Dialog
New...
Select a device class from the list and configure a name and a data location such as a COM port, a drive letter and path or ActiveSync.
Delete
Delete the device from the list.
Properties
Display properties of a device. Changing some properties can require creation of a new device.
Close
Close the device manager dialog.
Help

Open Help for Trimble Remote Device Manager.

If a web page with a title like "Error opening Help in Windows-based programs" opens instead, WinHlp32 is not enabled. That web page provides instructions and links to install WinHlp32 on Windows versions before Windows 10. WinHlp32 is standard for Windows XP, is optional for Windows Vista, 7, 8 and 8.1 and is not available for Windows 10.

These help pages are also available in .PDF format.

Output file format

If you selected the action to export or export and upload, select one of these file formats: ASCII points, AutoCAD, DC Points (dc), ESRI Shape file, Feature codes (fcx), Geodimeter Area, LandXML - XML, M5 Points (Zeiss M5 format), MicroStation, Roading 3D (dc), Roadline (aln), Roadline 3D (rln), SCS900, SDMS, Softdesk Fieldbook (fbk), STAR*NET, TDS (dtm), TDS (job), TDS's Road layout (rd5 and tp5), Terramodel (pro) or Trimble DTM - TTM. For more details of these formats, see below.

Script tabs

For scripts with more than one pages of settings, running the script displays a sequence of pages with a Next button to open the next page. When editing the script, these pages are arranged in tabs.

Only script tabs relevant to the file format are shown.

If "Show this page at run time" is not selected, the page is not displayed when the script runs, so the user cannot change the settings from those entered in the script manager. Some deselected pages are displayed anyway.

Tabs for common script pages
Instrument/Data collector
Select a device from the Trimble Remote Device Manager or a Generic Instrument.
Communication settings
Specify com port settings for uploading via serial cable.
Export to file | Target file | Destination folder
Specify the output location or file name.
  • Leave blank, to save as files with default file extensions, starting in the project folder.
  • Enter a path, to save as files with default file extensions, starting in the entered folder.
  • Enter a path and file to save exactly that file.
  • Enter a suitable file extension, such as *.dwg or *.csv, to save with that file extension, starting in the project folder.
Raw source
Specify a data format template (.LGR or "logger") file, that describes the format of the output file. Refer to description of formats below. LGR files can be defined by the Data Format Editor (DFEDIT). For general advice on .LGR files, contact Geocomp Systems.
Upload source
Specify the format of specific data sources.
Point settings
Specify the value of undefined elevations, default units and whether to shift point numbers or coordinates.
Points target file
Specify the output file name and location, or leave blank, and enter the output format (see below).
Zeiss M5 line format
Enter format details for M5 data
M5 file | TDS job file
File selection dialog
Source files
Display source files
AutoCAD (dwg or dxf) | ESRI (shp) | LandXML | MicroStation | SCS900 | SDMS | Sitework | Star*Net | DC | TDS | FAL
See below for settings of specific formats.
Language translation
Specify character sets.
File upload overwrite protection
What to do when the file already exists.
Export summary
Display a summary of export settings before exporting the data.

ASCII

For ASCII formats, enter codes delimited by spaces or commas to indicate the data content and order of the output files.

Enter P for Points field, E for Easting, N for Northing, Z for Elevation, D for Description|​Name, X for Station|​Chainage from the active alignment, O for Offset from the active alignment, S for Space or " before and after literal characters. Optionally prefix a specific number of characters or decimal places to any field.

For example, the data order in the Geocomp 1-5 FLD export script is:

" 2 "5D"               "12.3E13.3N9.3Z

AutoCAD

Dialog
AutoCAD target file
.DWG and .DXF files are entity exchange files for CAD applications. Leave blank, for the script to browse to create .DWG with the option of creating .DXF. Include *.DXF or *.DWG to limit to that file extension. Include a path, to browse from that path. Enter a full path and name to export a specific file.
Conversion mapping file
Select a conversion mapping file (.ACF) to control the substitution of colours, fonts and linetypes of exported entities.
Create binary DXF
Binary .DXF files contain the same data as normal ASCII .DXF files, only they are compressed to a smaller file size. Not all applications that read ASCII .DXF files will also read binary .DXF files.
Save as version
Save as 2000 where possible because that format allows for spaces in layer names. Save as 10, 11, 13 or 14 only if required by the target application. Any version of CAD software that imports .DWG after can read 2000 format.
DTM surface options
Show this page to enable the export of a DTM surface as 3D faces when required.
Point options
If Export points with blocks is selected, each point will be exported with blocks displaying point numbers, elevations and names.
Select objects
Select "Make file 3D", unless you specifically want to export 2D data. Do not "Explode custom linetypes" to replace complex linetypes with straight segments unless the target application does not support symbols.

AutoCAD Conversion mapping files

AutoCAD Configuration files (.ACF) are used by scripts to substitute ("map") colours, fonts, linetypes and line widths when converting to and from .DWG and .DXF.

Scripts use the .ACF file specified on the target file page in the specified location, such as C:\TMCustom\, C:\TMCustom\​Geocomp or C:\Program Files (x86)\Trimble\​Shared\​Locale\​English. If no location is specified, the .ACF file is sought in the TSP.

To see the contents of the .ACF used by the script, click on Edit... To edit an .ACF, use a text editor. The format is described by comment lines.

Colours

Colour numbers in the exported .DXG or .DXF correspond to colour numbers in Terramodel, except that colour numbers can be substituted by the .ACF.

Geocomp AutoCAD scripts use "Geocomp_64 to AutoCAD_255.ACF". With this .ACF, if the Terramodel palette is Geocomp_64 and the AutoCAD palette has the default 255 colours, and the colourmap is one to one, entities are imported and exported with new colour numbers so that they display with similar colours.

Linetypes

Linetypes are defined in .LIN files for both Terramodel and .DWG / .DXF. The two formats are different so the .LIN files are not interchangeable and the linetypes can differ in appearence and behaviour between programs.

Names of linetypes in the exported .DWG or .DXF correspond to linetype names in Terramodel except that spaces are replaced by _, and names can be substituted by the .ACF.

Linetypes with names not recognised by the CAD program are substituted.

AutoCAD .LIN files in C:\Program Files (x86)\​Trimble\​Shared\​Fonts\​acad_files\ contain definitions similar to Terramodel linetypes. Many of these linetypes include symbols defined in symbol.shx.

Some linetypes with symbols, such as LEADER LINE, have no exact equi valent, so to keep the same appearance EXPLODE these into plines and text before exporting. Supply symbol.shx or further explode text into plines.

Fonts

Names of fonts in the exported .DWG or .DXF correspond to names of fonts in Terramodel. Substitute font names by .ACF because most CAD programs use fonts with different names.

Font names not recognised are substituted by the CAD program.

AutoCAD .SHP and .SHX files in C:\Program Files (x86)\​Trimble\​Shared\​Fonts\​acad_files contain font and symbol definitions similar to .FNT files in Terramodel format found in C:\Program Files (x86)\​Trimble\​Shared\​Fonts\. These ASCII .SHP files can be compiled into binary .SHX files using C:\Program Files (x86)\​Trimble\​Shared\​Fonts\fontc.exe.

Symbols in Terramodel are displayed using the symbol font. When exporting these to .DWG or .DXF, also supply symbol.shx to be loaded in the CAD program, or use blocks instead, or convert symbols to blocks using SYM2BLK.

Templates

.DWG and .DXF files exported from Terramodel are based on template files. SPSDEFAULT.DWG is used for projects in feet and inches. SPSDEFAULT_ISO.DWG is used for projects in metric units.

The files are sought in the TSP, or failing that in C:\Program Files (x86)\​Trimble\​Shared\​Locale\​English (or similar).

These files contain settings and entities such as title blocks, layers, linetypes, blocks and fonts. They must be edited in AutoCAD or equivalent CAD software and saved in 2004 .DWG format.

MicroStation V7

MicroStation target file
File
Leave blank.
Conversion mapping

Select a MicroStation conversion mapping file (.MCF).

Use the Layer, Colour, Font and Linetype map buttons to inspect the .MCF, not to edit. Do not use the Create button. Instead, create and edit .MCF files using a text editor. Use an existing file as an example.

Layer map...
Map MicroStation V7 level numbers from 0 to 63 to Terramodel layer names.
Colour map...
Map MicroStation V7 colours to Terramodel colours.
Font map...
Map MicroStation V7 font numbers to Terramodel font names.
Linetype map...
Map MicroStation line styles to Terramodel line types.
Seed file
Select a seed file.
Seed file

Selected objects are added to a copy of a seed file, which is a prototype .DGN created with MicroStation V7.

The only way to be sure that your seed file is compatable is to ask your client to send you a copy of theirs. The seed file must be 2D if the data are 2D, or 3D if the data are 3D. The limits of the seed file must be outside the extents of the selected data.

Standard seed files that can be selected from C:\Program files (x86)\​Trimble\​Shared\ are described in MicroStation Seed Files.PDF. GCARB3.DGN, a 3D seed file with an origin at 0,0,0, and GCAMG3.DGN, a 3D seed file with an origin to suit AMG and MGA coordinate systems, can be selected from C:\​TMCUSTOM\​Geocomp\.

Seed files can include standard objects like cells.

Export set points
Export set points, or not.
Export from view
Select the view from which to select objects.
Number of objects selected
Select objects when running the script.

SDMS

Survey Data Management System (SDMS) is a land surveying data standard developed and maintained by the American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO).

Export raw data from a Terramodel project to an SDMS project (*.prj) file, or a calculated data (*.cal) file, or export points to an SDMS control (*.ctl) file.

Terramodel uses C:\Program Files (x86)\Trimble\​Shared\​sdms.map to map specific raw data fields to SDMS data tags. Do not edit this mapping file. Use the following dialog boxes exporting to an SDMS project: SDMS target file Source data

See also

IMPORTSMGR
Import Script manager
Command dateGuideMenuSource 
12/03/09HELPTM File|​Export/​Upload|​Export script manager Field Data Module  
 EXPORTXS

Export cross section data in Terramodel .XSC format.

Export or list a selected surface from a roadway as cross sections in Terramodel .XSC file format with a chainage range.

Specify Segment 1, unless you are using chainage equations.

The report includes the offset and elevation of each point at each chainage.

See also XSECTIONMAN and IMPORTXS.

TML date  Source 
08/02/22     Secured  
 EXTEND

Extend a pline or set to boundaries or by a distance.

Extend a pline or set to boundaries or by a distance.

Dialog

To bdy
Extend to a boundary or to a specified distance
Distance
Extend by a specified distance.
Boundaries
Extend to the first the boundary, or lines projected from the ends of the boundary. The boundaries do not need to be closed.
Line
Specify a pline or set to be extended
Add Pt
Create a new segment between the end and the new location.
Move Pt
Move the end of the set or pline segment.

Spirals and vertical curves cannot be extended.

See also

GCEXTEND
Extend multiple plines to a single boundary
GC88
Extend or clip to a specified total distance.

Command dateGuideMenuSourceGC
12/03/09HELPTM Edit|​Extend Field Data Module 276
 F7

Function key F7

Toggle point number labels.

Label points with point numbers. Use F7 again to turn point numbers off.

Add or change point labels that show the point number, at a legible view scale, for all visible points. If the point number is currently displayed, F7 turns the point number off.

If point markers have already been turned on by F8, elevations by F9 or names by F11, a point label block is selected which continues to show them.

F7, F8, F9 and F11 uses point label styles 0, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15 or 16. Point labels with other styles must be edited with other commands such as LABELPOINT and EDIT. These styles are known as block labels in LABELPOINT and style indices in EDIT.

When F7 turns on point numbers, the height of the displayed labels can be adjusted by the view scale, or fixed by the view scale, according to the Point Label settings in EDITINI.

These point labels are intended for quick use while examining or editing your data. If you are drafting, or otherwise work with fixed view scales, or want control over colours or layers, use LABPT, BLOCK or AUTODRAFT to create text or blocks.

The point label has the same colour as the point.

Blocks and point symbols are unchanged.

To reassign function keys F7, F8, F9 and F11 to launch F7, F8, F9 and F11 commands, use EDITINI to import the [Function​Keys] section from C:\TMCustom\​Geocomp\​GEOCOMP_​AUST_​DEFAULTS_​TMODWIN.INI. Some keyboards also require you to Press Fn.

See also

GCREDRAW
Update the plan view scale to suit labels then redraw
LABELPOINT
Add or edit point labels
VIEWSET
Change the view scale
VIEWSCAL
Enter a plan view scale or change the plan view scale to suit point labels
LABPT
Label points with text instead

TML date MenuSourceGC
08/02/22   Draft|​Label points with numbers
Function key F7
Geocomp Update or $250 F7,136
 F8

Function key F8

Toggle symbol labels.

Label points with circle symbol labels. Run F8 again to turn symbol labels off.

Add or change point labels that show a circle (symbol 40), at a legible view scale, for all visible points. If the symbol label is currently displayed, F8 turns the symbol label off.

F7, F8, F9 and F11 uses point label styles 0, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15 or 16. Point labels with other styles must be edited with other commands such as LABELPOINT and EDIT. These styles are known as block labels in LABELPOINT and style indices in EDIT.

When F7 turns on point numbers, the height of the displayed labels can be adjusted by the view scale, or fixed by the view scale, according to the Point Label settings in EDITINI.

The circle label has the same colour as the point.

Blocks and point symbols are unchanged.

When F8 turns on circle labels, the height of the displayed labels is maintained by adjusting the view scale, if required, to suit the Point Label Height setting in EDITINI.

To label points with a user-defined symbol number and symbol height, see F8C.

These point labels are intended for quick use while examining or editing your data. If you are drafting, or otherwise work with fixed view scales, or want control over colours or layers, use LABPT, BLOCK or AUTODRAFT to create text or blocks.

To reassign function keys F7, F8, F9 and F11 to launch F7, F8, F9 and F11 commands, use EDITINI to import the [Function​Keys] section from C:\TMCustom\​Geocomp\​GEOCOMP_​AUST_​DEFAULTS_​TMODWIN.INI. Some keyboards also require you to Press Fn.

See also

F8T
Display temporary point markers
GCREDRAW
Update the plan view scale to suit labels then redraw
LABELPOINT
Add or edit point labels
VIEWSET
Change the view scale
VIEWSCAL
Enter a plan view scale or change the plan view scale to suit point labels
LABPT
Label points with text instead

TML date MenuSource 
08/02/22   Draft|​label points with circles
Function key F8
Geocomp Update or $250  
 F8C

Toggle preset symbol labels.

Label points with preset symbols. Run F8C again to turn preset symbols off.

Blocks, point labels and other symbols are unchanged.

To preset the symbol, use PROJECTV to create or set the Integer project variable "F8C:​Symbol_Number" to the desired symbol. The default symbol is 34 (+).

The symbol size is dependent on the current view scale at time of creation. To change the size, change the view scale with VIEWSET or VIEWSCAL then toggle off then on.

To preset the symbol size, use PROJECTV to create or set the Double project variable "F8C:​Symbol_Height" to the desired height in sheet units. The default height is 0.10.

The colour of the label is the same as the point colour.

The point labels are the same as those placed by LABELPOINT. These labels are intended for quick use while editing your data. If you are drafting, use LABPT, BLOCK or AUTODRAFT instead for control over colours, size, layers and so on.

To label with circle symbols at heights that adjust view scale for legibility, use F8. To configure the F8 function key to use F8C, ALIAS from F8C to F8 or use EDITINI to edit F8 in the function key section of TMODWIN.INI. To display temporary point markers, use F8T.

TML date  Source 
08/02/22     Geocomp Update or $250  
 F8T

Display temporary point markers.

Display temporary point markers on all points in visible layers.

The point marker size is dependent on the current view scale. The colour is the cursor colour.

Point markers are temporary and disappear after refresh. They are not objects or labels or vertex markers. Blocks, symbols and point labels are unchanged.

To display circle symbols at heights that adjust view scale for legibility, use F8. To configure the F8 function key to use F8T, ALIAS from F8C to F8 or use EDITINI to edit F8 in the function key section of TMODWIN.INI. To display point markers with a user-defined symbol, use F8C.

TML date  SourceGC
08/02/22   Reports|​Mark|​Points Geocomp Update or $250 F8,137
 F9

Function key F9

Toggle elevation labels.

Label points with elevations. F9 command again to turn elevation labels off.

Add or change point labels that show the elevation, at a legible view scale, for all visible points. If the point number is currently displayed, F9 turns the point number off.

F7, F8, F9 and F11 uses point label styles 0, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15 or 16. Point labels with other styles must be edited with other commands such as LABELPOINT and EDIT. These styles are known as block labels in LABELPOINT and style indices in EDIT.

When F7 turns on point numbers, the height of the displayed labels can be adjusted by the view scale, or fixed by the view scale, according to the Point Label settings in EDITINI.

The point label has the same colour as the point.

Blocks and point symbols are unchanged.

When F9 turns on elevation labels, the height of the displayed labels is maintained by adjusting the view scale, if required, to suit the Point Label Height setting in EDITINI.

These point labels are intended for quick use while examining or editing your data. If you are drafting, or otherwise work with fixed view scales, or want control over colours or layers, use LABPT, BLOCK or AUTODRAFT to create text or blocks.

To reassign function keys F7, F8, F9 and F11 to launch F7, F8, F9 and F11 commands, use EDITINI to import the [Function​Keys] section from C:\TMCustom\​Geocomp\​GEOCOMP_​AUST_​DEFAULTS_​TMODWIN.INI. Some keyboards also require you to Press Fn.

See also

GCREDRAW
Update the plan view scale to suit labels then redraw
LABELPOINT
Add or edit point labels
VIEWSET
Change the view scale
VIEWSCAL
Enter a plan view scale or change the plan view scale to suit point labels
LABPT
Label points with text instead

TML date MenuSourceGC
08/02/22   Draft|​Label points with elevations
Function key F9
Geocomp Update or $250 F9,138
 F11

Function key F11

Toggle point name labels.

Label points with names. F11 command again to turn point name labels off.

Add or change point labels that show the name, at a legible view scale, for all visible points. If the name is currently displayed, F11 turns the name off.

F7, F8, F9 and F11 uses point label styles 0, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15 or 16. Point labels with other styles must be edited with other commands such as LABELPOINT and EDIT. These styles are known as block labels in LABELPOINT and style indices in EDIT.

When F7 turns on point numbers, the height of the displayed labels can be adjusted by the view scale, or fixed by the view scale, according to the Point Label settings in EDITINI.

The point label has the same colour as the point.

Blocks and point symbols are unchanged.

When F11 turns on point name labels, the height of the displayed labels is maintained by adjusting the view scale, if required, to suit the Point Label Height setting in EDITINI.

These point labels are intended for quick use while examining or editing your data. If you are drafting, or otherwise work with fixed view scales, or want control over colours or layers, use LABPT, BLOCK or AUTODRAFT to create text or blocks.

To reassign function keys F7, F8, F9 and F11 to launch F7, F8, F9 and F11 commands, use EDITINI to import the [Function​Keys] section from C:\TMCustom\​Geocomp\​GEOCOMP_​AUST_​DEFAULTS_​TMODWIN.INI. Some keyboards also require you to Press Fn.

See also

GCREDRAW
Update the plan view scale to suit labels then redraw
LABELPOINT
Add or edit point labels
VIEWSET
Change the view scale
VIEWSCAL
Enter a plan view scale or change the plan view scale to suit point labels
LABPT
Label points with text instead

TML date MenuSourceGC
08/02/22   Draft|​Label points with names
Function key F11
Geocomp Update or $250 F10,110
 FAVORITES

Favourite commands.

Configure up to eight favourite commands.

Commands from this history are available by right-​clicking in the graphics area when applicable.

To configure, run FAVORITES then either

  • Enter a command name then Add that command to the list
  • Select a command from a menu, then Add that command to the list. The command must be on a menu in an original Terramodel installation.
  • Remove a command from the list
  • Move a command Up or Down the list
  • Enable command completion, or not.

Terramodel also remembers the names of up to 30 recently used commands. These commands, and the favourites, are available for selection at the command line using the up and down arrow keys on your keyboard.

When you need to select a command, as an alternative to manually entering the name, or selecting from a menu, toolbar or toolbox, right-click on the Terramodel graphics window to open a command menu. The top pane lists for selection up to eight commands configured in FAVORITES, and the bottom pane lists the ten most recently used commands.

If "Enable command completion" is on, as you type characters at the command line, if they match one of these commands, the remaining characters are automatically completed and highlighted. Continue to type, or press Enter to accept the predicted text.

Be careful with predictive text and commands with similar names. For example, if PLOTTERSET has been entered more recently than PLOT, as you type PLOT, PLOTTERSET is predicted and selectable by Enter. To enter PLOT instead, use the Delete key to delete the highlighted terset characters.

Turn off "Enable command completion" before creating or playing keystroke macros.

Command dateGuideMenuSourceGC
12/03/09HELPTM File|​System configuration|​Favorites Field Data Module 201
 FBLOCK

Import ASCII points by square regions in separate project files.

Import ASCII points into separate Terramodel project files for each square data region of the nominated size in project units. The input data format is assumed to be E N Z or E,N,Z. Blank lines and lines starting with '#' are ignored.

For example, if the region size is 1000m, all points with X between 0 and 1000 and also Y between 0 and 1000, are added to one Terramodel project, whereas those points with X between 0 and 1000 but Y between 1000 and 2000, would be added to a different Terramodel project file, and so on.

Project Variable MAX_​NUMBER_​OF_​FILES restricts the number of files open. The default is 100.

TML date  SourceGC
08/02/22     Secured  
 FCXOUT

Export Trimble feature code library (.FCX) from AutoDraft (.ADC).

Export Trimble feature code library (.FCX) from AutoDraft (.ADC) for uploading into a Trimble survey instrument.

Browse to select an AutoDraft Configuration file and a new location for an .FCX file.

Optionally, export global codes.

FCXOUT is an alias for Trimble FCX _e export script.

Alias date MenuSourceGC
23/11/21   File | Export/Upload | Trimble FCX _e Geocomp Update  
 FILLET

Create a curve by radius at the intersection of two set segments or two pline segments.

  1. Select the first segment using the Seg1 locate control.
  2. Select the second segment that intersects the first using the Seg1 locate control.
  3. Input the radius for the arc using the Radius distance control.
  4. Specify whether to trim the two selected line segments using the Trim check box. When the box is checked, the lines are trimmed to the point at which the fillet arc is added. If a radius of 0 is used, the lines will be trimmed to the point at which the lines intersect.
  5. Click OK to create the fillet.
Command dateGuideMenuSourceGC
12/03/09HELPTM Draw|​Arc|​Fillet Field Data Module 73
 FILTER

Filter vertices in plines.

Create plines made up of straight segments from selected plines within a filter "box".

The number of vertices is reduced along straights, such as contours, and can be increased for splines, arcs and spirals.

The initial filter box is of the specified length and width and is orientated to the first segment. The width is perpendicular to the segment.

FILTER checks for additional vertices contained within the limits of the filter box. Any vertices inside the box are discarded. The first vertex found outside the box is kept, and the last discarded vertex inside the box is added back to the pline. The tube is then reoriented based on the last two vertices, and the process is repeated.

Select the current colour and layer to see the difference between the new plines and the old.

See also BLFILTER, GCCHORD, GCFILTER and SETFILT.

Command dateGuideMenuSourceGC
12/03/09HELPTM Draw|​Pline|​Filter Secured DTM F
 FILT3DPT

Filter duplicate points within 3D tolerance.

Relayer any duplicate points within a specified 3D tolerance to layer 0 with the option to report.

TML date  Source 
08/02/22     Geocomp Update or $200  
 FIXCURVE

Move three-​point-​arc points onto tangents.

Fix non-tangential arcs by moving the end and centre points of three-​point-​arcs onto the line of adjacent straight segments.

In selected sets, for each pair of adjoining arc segments with equal radii, where the first and last surveyed points are approximately tangent points (TPs) and the adjoining set segments are straight, move each "TP" along the adjoining straight until both are exactly tangential and move the centre point so the radii remain equal.

Optionally, interpolate new elevations along the tangents.

Three-​point arcs are represented by pairs of adjoining arc segments with equal radii. To create a three-point arc, select three points using GC3PTARC, use a POC (point-on-curve) global code in AUTODRAFT or import Geocomp three-​point-​arc strings using GCIMPORT.

TML date  Source 
08/02/22     Geocomp Update or $200  
 FIXDTM

Fix breaklines connected to points in other layers.

For set segments on a DTM layer that join contourable points on other layers, "fix" them so they function as breaklines.

For each set on the DTM layer, wherever the set is connected to a 3D point on layer 0, and there is 2D point on the DTM layer at the same X and Y location, replace the 2D point in the set with the 3D point.

For any such points found, P3Pad reports the point numbers and "Swapping point number in set".

If the set is connected to a point on any other layer, and there is no point at the same location on the DTM layer, copy the point into the DTM layer and then insert the point into the set.

During DTM formation by any command, duplicate points on a DTM layer relayer to layer 0. Any connected to a set are usually replaced by one on the DTM layer and message scroll reports "Set Node Changed". If this doesn't happen, use FIXDTM or GC31.

See also EVALDTM and GCCOPY.

TML date  Source 
08/02/22     Geocomp Update or $200  
 FIXDYNA

Replace dynaviewed plotboxes with new plotbox records.

Create new closed plotbox plines to replace selected plotboxes.

For each selected pline, that has a dynaview,

  • Close the pline, if it is open
  • Create a new plotbox pline at the same locations
  • Change the parent of the dynaview to the new plotbox

Delete the old plotboxes or retain them as plines with no dynaviews

Delete any text or plines that referred to the old plotboxes or retain them as records with no parents.

Use FIXDYNA when you have many dynaviews, and visibility of objects in some dynaviews is incorrect because you have lost track of object referencing.

TML date  Source 
08/02/22     Geocomp Update or $200  
 FIXLAYERS

Fix layers.

Repair layers that cannot be used to compute end-area volumes.

Deleting multiple empty layers using LAYERSET in Terramodel 10.20 only, can corrupt a layer attribute in the project such that commands such as AVGEND, EARTHWRK and TEMPLATE report 0.00 volumes and, in road cross sections, materials are not shaded in colour.

Fix these layers in the current project by running FIXLAYERS at the Terramodel command line.

TML date  Source 
08/02/22     Field Data Module  
 FIXGCSPELL

Add dictionaries to GCSPELL.

The Spell Checker (GCSPELL), at first has no configured dictionaries. FIXGCSPELL is an alias that opens the Windows Registry file GCSpell.reg. Allow the Registry Editor to to add the initial dictionary files and paths from GCSpell.reg. Then try GCSPELL.

Alias date  Source 
08/02/22     GCSPELL  
 FIXRDE

Fix lost Raw Data Editor window.

The Raw data editor (RDE) window can be maximised, minimised and restored. If the window position is not visible, perhaps because a display has since been disconnected or turned off, the RDE window is not visible and RDE locks up, as do IMPORT scripts that open RDE.

Recovery is often as simple as re-attaching a removed external display or turning on a laptop display.

The default postion of the the window is stored in the Windows Registry. FIXRDE is an alias that opens the Windows Registry file RDE_window_and_colours.reg to position the window on the primary Windows display. Allow the Registry Editor to to reset the default window location, then restart Terramodel and try RDE again.

FIXRDE also configures the Raw Data Appearance in RDE Editor Settings to include "Data field emphasis" and "Smaller data tags".

Alias date  Source 
08/02/22     Geocomp Update or $200  
 FIXTVLITE

Fix lost 3D visualiser windows.

3D Visualiser (3DVISUALISER or TVLITE) windows can be maximised, minimised and restored. If the window position is not visible, perhaps because a display has since been disconnected or turned off, the window is not visible and 3D Visualizer appears to fail.

Recovery is often as simple as re-attaching a removed external display or turning on a laptop display.

The default postion of the the window is stored in the Windows Registry. FIXTVLITE is an alias that opens the Windows Registry file TVLite_window.reg to position the window on the primary Windows display. Allow the Registry Editor to to reset the default window location, then restart Terramodel and try 3D Visualiser again.

Alias date  Source 
08/02/22     Geocomp Update or $200  
 FLD2RDE

Import 12D Model .FLD field file.

Import 12D Model .FLD survey file for Raw Data Editor.

Procedure

  1. Use Import Script Manager (IMPORTSMGR) to turn on the "Geocomp Empty.RDE _i" import script supplied with Geocomp Updates.
  2. Copy an .RDE file that contains only comments, such as C:\TMCUSTOM\​Geocomp\​Docs\​EMPTY.RDE, to your survey files location with a new name and extension .RDE.
  3. Use the "Geocomp Empty.RDE _i" import script (IMPORT) to import the .RDE file with the new name.
  4. Raw Data Editor (RDE) creates a new survey job with the description "[new file name.RDE] imported at [time and date]".
  5. Exit RDE.
  6. Run FLD2RDE command.
  7. Browse to select a .FLD file created by a data collector with 12D Field software.
  8. Select OK to import the survey, convert the survey to .RDE format, display the survey in P3Pad and display the Procedure button "Copy All from P3pad report into RDE main screen".
  9. Click "Copy All from P3pad report into RDE main screen" to open RDE.
  10. Use Alt-Tab keys together to bring P3Pad editor to the current window.
  11. In P3Pad, use Control-A to Select All text.
  12. Alt-tab to RDE window.
  13. In RDE, use Control-C keys to paste text.
  14. Exit RDE to process the survey and create points.

See also

IMPORT with Geocomp 17-20 FLD_i import script
Import Geocomp or LisCAD coordinate data in Geocomp .FLD format with station identifier in characters 17 to 20 of the description
IMPORT with Geocomp 6-8 FLD_i import script
Import Geocomp or LisCAD coordinate data in Geocomp .FLD format with station identifier in characters 6 to 8 of the description (typically from Leica surveys)
GCIMPORT Data Collector Interface
Import survey observations, convert to Geocomp .FLD format, reduce to coordinates in .PTS|.STR format and import into RDE
DOS Geocomp
Import survey observations, convert to Geocomp .FLD format, reduce to coordinates in .PTS|.STR format and display for editing in Spatial Data System
GC12DIN
Import 12Model Archive .12DA data

TML date  Source 
08/02/22     Geocomp Update or $200  
 FLIPDOWN

Copy objects from an elevation view into a plan view.

Copy selected objects from an "Elevation" view such as Profile, XSect or View6 into a selected "Plan" view.

The objects are created at distances, elevations and offsets, along a reference line selected from the Plan view, equal to their X, Y and Z coordinates in the Elevation view.

The objects refer to the original object for labelling a point with the original point number or elevation using EAT codes.

See also FLIPUP, BGELEV and GC56.

TML date MenuSource 
08/02/22   Cogo|​Flip|​Flip down Geocomp Update or $200  
 FLIPUP

Copy objects from a plan view into an elevation view.

Copy selected objects from a plan view into an "Elevation" drawing in a selected view.

The chainage of the point along the selected baseline determines the x-coordinate, while the elevation of the point determines the y-coordinate position.

The objects maintain the layer, colour and linetype of the original points.

The name of the new object is the original name plus the baseline name and original point number, X, Y and Z.

The objects are referenced to the original object. This enables you to label a point with the original point number, elevation, etc. using EAT codes.

See also FLIPDOWN, BGELEV and GC56.

TML date MenuSource 
08/02/22   Cogo|​Flip|​Flip up Geocomp Update or $200  
 FONTCHNG

List or change fonts of selected text.

Report which fonts (typefaces) are used by selected text objects or change the font property of selected text objects to a specified font.

Use this to fix text with incorrect fonts.

The From list shows only fonts used by any of the selected text.

The To list lists alphabetically all fonts which have been loaded into Terramodel or listed in p3server.ini.

If Terramodel cannot find a corresponding FNT file for a specified font, the font property of the text is still changed, but the text is displayed with the default font instead, usually TMODELF.

To add a new font to the To List, place the FNT file into C:\Program files (x86)\​Trimble\​Shared\​Fonts, specify that font in TEXTMETRICS or STYLESET, then add the font name to the ini file when prompted.

See also LISTFONT and TEXTMETRICS.

TML date MenuSource 
08/02/22   Modify|​Text|​Font Geocomp Update or $200  
 FORESTRD

Design a forest road.

Select a registered HAL, check the settings and then press Enter. The result is a road fully designed in horizontal, including fitting of curves, templates, transitions, super­elevation and widening. In conjunction with VAL Editor, design a long road in minutes!

Keep any of your existing curves, superelevation, widening, xlines, and existing profile, or update them.

The settings include design speed, default cross slope, pavement and shoulder width and widening ratio.

Great for forest, haul and mountain roads where the same design criteria apply for most of the length.

Use WALK to get the initial alignment if based on constant grade, otherwise pick some IPs. Use RDVALEDIT to design the vertical alignment. Then modify your horizontal and vertical design to accommodate variations such as intersections.

FORESTRD and a prototype file are customised according to your requirements which could match those of any road authority. The default is setup for NSW RTA and Forestry Tasmania.

See also HAULROAD which also generates vertical and slope alignments, can allow you to edit your alignments and computes volumes.

See also FORESTTB.

TML date  Source 
Custom     POA  
 FORESTTB

Report offsets for a forest road

Use with FORESTRD.

TML date  Source 
Custom     POA  
 FRGOUT

Export Nikon FM 700 Full Road Geometry (.FRG) file.

Specify the centreline HAL of a road and records to set out and export this to an .FRG file. This file can then be used to store the full road geometry on Nikon DTM-800 series and Zeiss total stations running Fast Map 700 Road Engineer software. This can then be used for checking and setting out complex surfaces and alignments.

FM700 has built-in Quality Assurance. The default HAL is the active alignment, if set. If the VAL is picked, the elevations are the difference between the height of the object and the VAL, otherwise the elevations are from the points.

TML date  Source 
08/02/22     Geocomp Update or $200  
 FYATBEDIT

Edit feature attributes.

Copy feature attributes of a parent object onto selected objects.

If the parent object does not have feature attributes, enter feature attribute names and values using a dialog.

Feature attributes can be defined with a Name, Value and Date/Time.

See also DISPFEAT, FYATBEP, FYATBIN, FYATBOUT and CHECKATT.

The TML name is FY_ATBED. If FYATBEDIT does not run from the command line, create an alias from FYATBEDIT to FY_ATBED or enter FY_ATBED. This command requires FEATURES.ADF which is also supplied.

TML date  Source 
08/02/22     Feature Attribute TML bundle @ $400  
 FYATBEP

Export feature attributes to CSV.

Export feature attributes of selected objects to a comma-separate values (.CSV) file.

Feature attributes can be defined with a Name, Value and Date/Time.

See also DISPFEAT, FYATBEDIT, FYATBIN and FYATBOUT.

The TML name is FY_ATBEP. If FYATBEP does not run from the command line, create an alias from FYATBEP to FY_ATBEP or enter FY_ATBEP. This command requires FEATURES.ADF which is also supplied.

TML date  Source 
08/02/22     Feature Attribute TML bundle @ $400  
 FYATBIN

Import feature attributes from a survey file.

Import all feature Attribute codes from a selected Trimble .DC, Leica .TLF or .CSV points file.

These feature attributes can be collected in the field for Geographic Information Systems (GIS) purposes.

The steps are:

For Trimble surveys:
  1. Upload a feature code table that uses Feature Attributes to a suitable Trimble
  2. Conduct a feature survey using those field attributes
  3. Extract the Trimble survey data as a .DC.
  4. IMPORT the Trimble DC survey file using the import script "Trimble raw survey data (dc)".
  5. Run FYATBIN from the command line
  6. Browse
  7. Choose Trimble Raw Data Collector Files
  8. Select the same DC file as before
  9. Import attributes onto the corresponding points.

For Leica surveys:
  1. Upload a suitable format file that uses Attributes to a suitable Leica survey instrument
  2. Conduct a feature survey using those field attributes
  3. Extract the Leica Survey data as a .TLF with attributes.
  4. IMPORT the Leica TLF survey file using the import script "Geocomp Leica TLF _i".
  5. Run FYATBIN from the command line
  6. Browse
  7. Select Leica Data Collector Files
  8. Select the same TLF file as before
  9. Import attributes onto the corresponding points.

For spreadsheet data:
  1. Create, edit or import Terramodel objects with unique names
  2. Create a .CSV file
  3. Create the first column with the heading Name then the names of the objects onto which the feature attributes are to be imported
  4. Create the other columns with headings of the feature attribute names then feature attribute values corresponding to the object names
  5. Run FYATBIN from the command line
  6. Browse
  7. Select CSV Data Files
  8. Select the .CSV file
  9. Import attributes onto the corresponding objects.

Notes

Import the attributes immediately after importing the points, to be sure that the point numbers haven't changed.

The "Trimble raw survey data (dc)" import script reads the point name on "D9 Code" records and then "87 Feature Name" records. If both records exist for the same point, the "87" record is used. If the "D9" records are preferred because they are similar but are appended with additional data such as string numbers, use FYATBIN to replace the "87" point names with the "D9" point names.

See also DCEDIT, DISPFEAT, FYATBEDIT, FYATBEP and FYATBOUT.

The TML name is FY_ATBIN. If FYATBIN does not run from the command line, create an alias from FYATBIN to FY_ATBIN or enter FY_ATBIN.

FYATBIN requires FEATURES.ADF which is also supplied.

TML date  Source 
08/02/22     Feature Attribute TML bundle @ $400  
 FYATBOUT

Export feature attributes to MapInfo files.

Export feature attributes of objects on a selected layer list to Mapinfo MIF/MID files that match D-SPEC as-built drainage specification.

The attribute names are written to the .MIF file and the corresponding values are written to the .MID file. Elevations can be included.

If the Coordinate System selected by GCCOORD is MGA, AMG or ISG, the definition is includes in the header, otherwise the default "non earth" is specified. To add another coordinate system, please contact Geocomp Systems.

Feature attributes can be defined with a Name, Value and Date/Time.

See also DISPFEAT, FYATBEDIT, FYATBEP, FYATBIN and MAPIOUT.

The TML name is FY_ATBOU. If FYATBOUT does not run from the command line, create an alias from FYATBOUT to FY_ATBOU or enter FY_ATBOU. This command requires FEATURES.ADF which is also supplied.

TML date  Source 
08/02/22     Feature Attribute TML bundle @ $400  
 GARMININ

Import a Garmin GPS Waypoint (.wpt) file.

Import a Garmin GPS Waypoint (.wpt) file.

TML date  Source 
08/02/22     Geocomp Update or $250  
 GARMINOU

Export a Garmin GPS Waypoint (.wpt) file.

Export a Garmin GPS Waypoint (.wpt) file.

TML date  Source 
08/02/22     Geocomp Update or $250  
 GC01

Remove characters in a name by a range of character positions.

Nominate the start and end character positions. The range is inclusive.

To remove characters within the range, select Delete.

To retain only those characters within the range, do not select Delete.

The values are stored as project variables.

Note that for text objects, the name is the same as the text value.

The GC01 prompt uses a different font to other commands. If you have any problem with the font, see MICROSS.

See also SNR and CHNGNAME.

TML date MenuSourceGC
08/02/22   Modify|​More...|​Truncate name Geocomp Update or $250 rdes
 GC02

Modify point names to include chainage|​station and offset.

Modify the name of selected points to include chainage|​station and offset from HAL.

Dialog

CL HAL:
Select a centreline alignment pline or set
Pts
Select points
Include Sta.|Ch.
Include Sta.|Ch. and the value of station|chainage measured along the alignment
Include Offset
Include offset from selected HAL
Use EAT for Offsets
Configure offset to Offset EAT code format
Hal Pt Labels
If the point has the same chainage|​station as a significant HAL point, append the label such as IP, SC, CS or TP
Settings
Prefix Chainage|​Station
Enter any prefix to chainage|​station
Suffix Chainage|​Station
Enter any suffix to the chainage|​station
Prefix Offset
Enter any prefix to the offset
Suffix Offset
Enter any suffix to the offset
Append to point's name
Append to or replace existing point name
Prefix to point's name
Prefix to or replace existing point name
Create text
Also create text with the same characters as the point name
Text layer
Select layer for new text
Text style
Select style for any text
Text colour
Select a style for any text

Notes

GC02 refers to the full chainage or station label (such as Chainage or Station) and the short chainage or station label (such as Sta., Ch. or KP) as configured by STAORCHN. These labels are defined in the [Geocomp] section of TMODWIN.INI and are independent of the project file. The short label also prefixes the station or chainage value.

If "Use EAT for offsets" is selected, the format of the offset can include any characters and indicate direction such as L or - for left, R for right and CL or 0.000 for zero offset, as configured by Units Settings (UNITSSET) Labeling.

The order of the potential components of the new name is: Original name|​chainage prefix|​Short chainage label|​chainage value|​chainage suffix|​offset prefix|​Offset value with Off or EAT codes|​Offset suffix|​HAL point label|​Original name.

See also

NFS
Modify point name to chainage|​station only
LABELOFF
Label point with offset
GC03
Report offsets

TML date  SourceGC
08/02/22     Geocomp Update or $250 176
 GC03

Report chainage and offset from HAL and VAL.

Report Pt Number, Chainage, Offset, Elev and Name of selected points, relative to a horizontal and vertical alignment.

Optionally,

  • List Easting and Northing
  • List vertical differences to a specified Design DTM
  • Extend the alignment past the end of the HAL record

In Settings, specify

  • Text for headings (up to five)
  • Text for a footer
  • Whether to create a .CSV file in format Pt No, Ch, O|S, Elev, Val Diff,Name
  • Whether to include Easting and Northing
  • Whether to report coordinates before or after Name column
  • Whether change the Point Names to show the Point number, horizontal offset, and elevation difference.

The report includes any pline vertices.

If the HAL is a 3D set, and you do not select a VAL, the elevation differences will be to the set.

Chainages are measured horizontally. See GC14 to use sloping chainages.

See also GC03A to use a master HAL or GC03DRN for an as-built drain report.

TML date MenuSourceGC
08/02/22   Reports|​More...|​Chainage and offset
Reports|​More...|​Station and offset
Geocomp Update or $250 122
 GC03A

Report chainage and offset from master HAL.

Report Pt Number, Chainage, Offset, Elev, Val difference, Name and optionally, Coordinates, Vertical differences to a design DTM, up to five headings and a footer.

Specify points, a master HAL and a design Line.

In the Headings dialog, "Create CSV file" for use in spreadsheets

The report includes pline vertices.

If the HAL is a 3D set, and you do not select a VAL, the elevation differences will be to the set.

The HAL can be extended past the end of the HAL record. Chainages are measured horizontally.

See also GC03, GC14 for 3D chainages and GC03DRN for an as-built drain report.

TML date MenuSourceGC
08/02/22   Reports|​More...|​Chainage and offset Geocomp Update or $250 122
 GC03DRN

Report chainage and design offset As-Built report from HAL and VAL.

Report selected points showing Pt Number, Chainage, As-built Offset, Design Offset, As-built Height, Design Height, Height difference from VAL, Design Grade As-Built Grade, Easting, Northing and Name|​Description.

Select points, a HAL, and enter the design horizontal and vertical offsets and tolerances for Horizontal, Vertical and Grade.

Optionally, select a VAL, to List Coordinates and enter Headings. To also create a .CSV, select the option under headings. Coordinates are only listed to .CSV.

See also GC03.

TML date  SourceGC
08/02/22     Geocomp Update or $250 122
 GC03DUAL

Report chainage and offset from two HAL and VAL pairs.

Report Pt Number, Chainage, Offset, Elev, Val difference and Name from main Horizontal and Vertical alignments and Secondary Horizontal and Vertical alignments.

Optionally, list coordinates, extend past the end of the HAL record, and report vertical differences to a design DTM.

In the Secondary HAL/VAL and Settings dialog, enter up to five heading lines and footer for your reports, pick a secondary HAL and VAL and, optionally, create .CSV file for use in spreadsheets.

The report includes pline vertices.

If the HAL is a 3D set, and you do not select a VAL, the elevation differences will be to the set.

See also GC14 for 3D chainages and GC03DRN for an as-built drain report.

TML date  SourceGC
08/02/22     Geocomp Update or $250 122
 GC03RAKE

Report chainage, offset and rake from HAL and VAL.

Report Pt Number, Chainage, Offset, Elevation, Elevation difference, Rake in 1m and Name of selected points, relative to a horizontal and vertical alignment.

Optionally,

  • List Easting and Northing
  • Extend the alignment past the end of the HAL record

In Settings, specify

  • Text for headings (up to five)
  • Text for a footer

If the HAL is a 3D set, and you do not select a VAL, the elevation differences will be to the set.

Chainages are measured horizontally.

See also GC03 for a simple report, GC03A to use a master HAL, GC03DRN for an as-built drain report and GC03WALL for a wall report.

TML date     Source  
08/02/22     Geocomp Update or $250  
 GC03WALL

Report chainage, offset, lean and rake of a wall from HAL and VAL.

Report chainage, offset, as built elevation, height above design toe, direction of lean and rake from HAL and VAL.

Optionally,

  • Backfill to left or right
  • List Easting and Northing
  • Extend the alignment past the end of the HAL record
  • Specify tolerances
  • Specify
    • Text for headings (up to five)
    • Text for a footer

If the HAL is a 3D set, and you do not select a VAL, the elevation differences will be to the set.

Chainages are measured horizontally.

See also GC03 for a simple report, GC03A to use a master HAL, GC03DRN for an as-built drain report and GC03RAKE for a rake report.

TML date     Source  
08/02/22     Geocomp Update or $250  
 GC04

Create mid-points on short plines.

Where a single-segment pline is less than a minimum length, create a mid-point.

If the mid-point of the next pline is in the same location, omit the duplicate point.

A common use is to create a single point on each pair of crossing plines imported from CAD.

See also ILINE to intersect lines and GC31 to remove duplicate points, GC83 to select short plines or sets and DIVIDE to divide a pline or set.

TML date  SourceGC
08/02/22     Geocomp Update or $250 314
 GC05

Calculate the centre of mass between two DTMs.

Calculate the centre of mass between two DTMs and inside a boundary.

TML date  Source 
08/02/22     Geocomp Update or $200  
 GC06

Round elevations.

Round elevations of selected points to a specified number of decimal places.

Only use GC06 where rounding displayed values with EAT codes or precision settings is not suitable.

TML date  Source 
08/02/22     Geocomp Update or $250  
 GC07

Helmert transformation.

Compute shift, rotation and scale values that best fit selected pairs of points then transform the selected objects in 2D.

Dialog

Objects
Select the objects to be transformed, carefully.
Use Form
Control point
Select up to nine points in the new coordinate system by point number or mouse.
Data point
Select up to nine corresponding points in the old coordinate system.
Weight
Specify the number of times to use each control and data point pair.
Generate report
Report to P3Pad.
Fix scale factor to
Fix the scale factor (e.g. to 1.00) rather than use the computed factor.
Apply Elev shift to Transformed objects
Shift the elevations rather than leave the elevations unchanged.
Calculate.
From the control and data points, weights and scale factor, calculate the Residuals, Rotation, Scale, East shift and North Shift for a 2D Helmert transformation, and the average elevation difference for an elevation shift, and display the calculated values on the right-hand side.
Clear Form
Clear the input information for reentry.
Transform Objects
Immediately transform the selected objects in 2D from the old coordinate system to the new, and shift the elevations if specified.
Store Transformation Values
Store calculated values as project variables for later transformation of other data in the same project file with the same rotation, scale and shifts.
Store Transformation to hmt
Store calculated values to an external .HMT file for later transformation of data in other project files with the same rotation, scale and shifts.
Use Stored Values
If you have previously stored transformation values as project variables using the form, immediately transform the coordinates of the selected objects.
Use HMT file
Select a .HMT file containing transformation values previously stored using the form, and immedately transform the selected objects.
Wld
Read a .WLD file containing coordinate pairs previously created by Arcmap and then compute and report the transformation values.
Hel
Read a .HEL file containing coordinate pairs previously created by 12D Model and then compute and report the transformation values.
Read Control/Data points from a file
Read a .CSV file containing point pairs and weights and compute transformation values.
Transform Points
Transform points using the transformation values read from .WLD, .HEL or .CSV files.

Notes

Use Helmert transformation to transfer between two plane coordinate systems or a geodetic and a plane coordinate system.

If the computed residuals shown in the form are not acceptable, omit point pairs or correct the coordinates before you transform points.

Do not include your control points in your selected objects.

The .HMT file contains three pairs of parameters on one line. The first two combine to store rotation and scale, the second locates the data centroid and the third, locates the control centroid. If a HMT file contains two lines, the first line is a heading displayed in the message scroll and the second line contains the parameters.

.WLD and .HEL files contain pairs of coordinates. New points are created at these locations.

The .CSV format is either Control_Point_number, Data_Point_Number or Control_Point_number, Data_Point_Number, Weight. Use .CSV when you have more than nine point pairs or point pairs are supplied in a spreadsheet.

See also

GRIDPLAN
Transform from Grid to Ground or Ground to Grid
GC38
Affine transformation, which uses different scale factors in North and East
GC3DROT and GC3DADJ
3D transformation
MOVE, SCALE, GCSCALE, ROTATE and RTSCALE
Shift, rotate or scale around a single point
GC56, MIRROR and MIRRORDY
Mirror around an axis

TML date MenuSourceGC
08/02/22   Modify|​Transform|​Helmert Geocomp Update or $200 37
 GC09

Places blocks or symbols by group.

A mapping file (default = Geocomp.map) determines the block or symbol, the size and scaling behaviour. If the group =0, no symbol is placed.

Most import TMLs written by Geocomp Systems set a group for each object. If you import or create objects in other ways you will need to assign groups to use this function.

GCIMPORT enables this method during the import by selecting "Map Points and Circles with Blocks or Symbols". To place the blocks or symbols at a later stage, use GC09 after setting groups where required.

To replace circles with blocks by group (for example tree canopies), use GCIMPORT or GCINSBLK.

TML date  SourceGC
08/02/22     Geocomp Update or $250 90
 GC10

List and sum area, 2D length and 3D length.

For each selected pline or set, report the horizontal or slope length and the totals to P3Pad.

As objects are selected, the total distance is updated in message scroll.

Select "Compute closed areas", to report the closed areas and the lengths of unclosed areas.

The slope distance is computed in 3D for set segments connecting 3D points and also 2D distances for plines and set segments joining 2D points.

Use for estimating lengths and areas of kerbs, pipes, paving and so on.

Report to .CSV for use in spreadsheets.

TML date MenuSourceGC
08/02/22   Report|​More...|​Lengths + areas Geocomp Update or $200 275
 GC100

Report thickness between two DTMs at selected points.

Report the Point number, Easting, Northing, Thickness and Point Name of selected points.

The thickness is the interpolated elevation from the Upper DTM less the Lower DTM.

Where the thickness is expressed as a negative value, the Upper DTM is below the Lower DTM.

When there is a road job, the chainage | station and the offset from the main alignment are also reported.

Where a point is outside either DTM, the thickness is shown as *.

Points outside the selected Roadjob are marked "Outside Roadjob".

TML date  SourceGC
08/02/22     Geocomp Update or $200 224
 GC12DIN

Import 12D Model .12DA or .12DAZ file.

Import 2D, 3D, arc, text and alignment strings from a .12DA or .12DAZ archive file from 12D Model.

The 12D Model archive format is either an ASCII file with extension .12DA or a zipped .12DA with extension 12DAZ.

File selection

12D Archive file
Browse to select a .12DA to import or to first select a .12DAZ file then select the extracted .12DA file to import.
Colour mapping file
Specify a colour mapping files with extension .CNN, in this format:
12DA colour name, Terramodel colour number
Examples are installed in the C:\TMCUSTOM\​Geocomp folder.
Layer name mapping file
Specify a layer name mapping file with extension .LNM, in this format:
12DA model name, Terramodel layer number
Terramodel uses the first matching case in the file. If you select an .LNM file, any new model names in the .12DA file are added to the end of the file. To create a new .LMN with values suggested by the .12DA file, don't specify one.
Line style mapping file
Specify line style mapping .LSM file in this format:
12DA line style, Terramodel linetype
Any new line styles in the .12DA file are added to the end of the file. If you don't specify a .LSM, you are prompted to create a new one with values suggested by the .12DA file.

Options

All the following options are normally OFF by default.
Import hidden super alignment segments
Import super alignments with hidden segments as single sets with hidden segments or as multiple sets with the hidden segments removed.
Convert Contour Super strings to Points and Sets
2D super strings (such as boundaries and contours) are otherwise imported as plines.
Create sets around TIN edges
Create set boundaries along the edge of each imported TIN for use with EARTHWORK, RELAYER, GCCOPY, GCMERGE, GCGTRACE and so on. This can take a long time.
Ignore triangles with sides less than 1.5m long
Reduce the size of DTM surfaces by ignoring small triangles.
Prefix point name with super string name
Prefix points the from super strings with the name of the super string.
Import Trimesh_3D Edges
Import Trimesh Primitive_3D edges with Group 5475. See Trimesh note below.
Do not remove duplicate points from TIN models
Neither remove duplicate points nor adjust near-vertical walls to suit Terramodel DTM formation tolerance.
Import Vertex ID as Point number
Assign each new point number by Vertex ID ("point_data"). Otherwise, assign the next available integer point number.
Ignore all TINs
Do not any import TINs, Full_TINs or Super_Tins.
Ignore Models with "SECTIONS" in the name
Do not import models with "SECTIONS" anywhere in the model name. Such models can include points at each cross section.
Ignore all primitive_3d
Do not import trimeshes.

.12DA and .12DAZ files

  • .12DA files can be very large. Consider increasing the maximum number of objects in System Configuration (SYSTEM) or requesting more, smaller, data files.
  • .12DAZ files simply contain zipped .12DA files. Extract the files with any unzipping utility, or use GC12DIN to extract them.
  • After extracting all files from the .12DAZ file, GC12DIN presents any .12DA file that has the same name as the .12DAZ to be imported. If no .12DA has the same name, you are prompted to select another .12DA file. This may be due to 12D model export settings or renaming the .12DAZ file.
  • If you are supplied an archive containing multiple .12DA files, such as .mrarchive, rename the extension to .mrarchive.12DAZ so that GC12DIN can extract the files.
  • Creating subfolders for .12DAZ files can help keep track of extracted files.
  • If you are supplied .12DXMLZ files, please ask for .12DA or .12DAZ files instead.

TINs

  • A TIN (triangulated irregular network) is what 12D Model calls a DTM.
  • Each model is imported onto one Terramodel layer, even if it comprises more than one TIN.
  • Full_TINs consist of TIN triangles surrounded by null triangles. Both are imported. Null triangles are imported as dead regions in a different colour that are not included in DTMs. To delete null triangles, use DELNULTR.
  • Every triangle in a TIN has three unique points, which results in many points at common vertices. By default, GC12DIN removes all bar one point with common coordinates at each vertex, and points that are not duplicate but are within 1mm are moved apart so that near-vertical walls form DTMs correctly.
  • A Super Tin is a list of tins in a .12DA that 12D Model can process in sequence. While the list is not imported into Terramodel, the TINs are. To merge DTMs in sequence, use GCMERGE.

Alignments

  • Horizontal, vertical and slope alignments from super alignment strings are imported as plines and registered.
  • If the computed location of the end of an alignment differs from the location given in the file, the misclose is reported.
  • Alignments containing vertical curves are created in the Profile view.
  • Alignments containing arcs and no spirals are imported as straights and arcs. Arc not tangential to the adjacent straight are imported with a warning.
  • Alignments containing spirals are assumed to start and end tangential to straights.
  • Arc centres are hidden. They can be made visible afterwards by ARCENTRE.

Other notes

  • Layer names that are longer than 17 characters are automatically shortened to fit by substituting using common words with abbreviations, removing spaces and beginning characters (other than TIN).
  • To assign the new layer names yourself, use the layer mapping file.
  • Attributes are imported provided GC12.ADF is in the TSP and the attributes were exported to the .12DA file using GC12DOUT.
  • Trimeshes are networks of Primitive_3D triangles that define surfaces, like pipes, that are not TINs. Display imported trimeshes in 3D using TV with Set features turned on in Environment Visibility Settings. If you also import the trimesh edges as single set segments, separate them by group 5475 using SELECTGP, IGRP or ONGRP.
  • If the command creates a temporary .ASC file, update the command to the latest revision that directly and quickly reads 4-bit .12DA files created by 64-bit 12D Model.

See also

GC12DOUT
Export .12DA files
DISP12DA
Display 12 Model attributes
GCEDT12A
Edit 12 Model attributes
GC92
Check for other duplicate points and move points apart

TML date MenuSourceGC
15/02/22   File|​Misc. import|​12DA Geocomp Update or $250  
 GC12DOUT

Export 12D Archive file.

Export selected objects or DTM layers to a .12DA file for use with 12D Model software.

Export objects, or DTMs, or both to the same .12DA file.

Dialog

Objs:
Select any plines, sets or text
DTMs(Layer List):
To export one or more DTM layers as standard TIN (triangulated irregular network) models of visible triangles, select a layer list defined by LLISTSET. Triangles inside any dead regions defined by SETSMOOTH are not exported.
Browse
Select the output file name and path
Settings
Colour Map:
Map Terramodel colours to 12DA colours using a .CNN mapping file.
Layer Name Map:
Map Terramodel layers to 12DA model names using a .LNM file
Line Style Map:
Map Terramodel linetypes to 12DA line styles using a .LSM file
Prefix TM layer name to 12D record name
Prefix TM layer name to 12D record name
Export Terramodel attributes
Export attributes
Export Points as 12D Super String Points
Export Points as 12D Super String Points
Export
Export 12DModel Archive file (.12DA)

Notes

Use GC12DIN to import .12DA and .12DAZ files.

Use GC12DIN and a text editor to prepare the mapping files.

Names of layers, styles and colours in .12DA can have characters A to Z, a to z, 0 to 9 and space. Names of points, sets and plines exported to strings can be blank or have A to Z, a to z, 0 to 9, space, comma, ., +, -, (, ) and = characters. Other characters such as _ and / are invalid. Any invalid characters that remain after mapping are replaced with spaces.

Text objects are exported with "vertex_text_data" values from the text names, "model" and "name" values from the layer names and "text_colour" names corresponding to the geocomp_64 palette.

If a point is attached to a set, GC12DOUT exports the first 16 characters of the point number as ‘point_data’. If you specify “Export Points as 12D Super String Points” in Settings, or the point is not attached to a set, the point is exported as a super string with a name.

If "Export Terramodel Attributes" is selected, any "12DA" Attributes for selected objects are exported to the .12DA, otherwise "Feature" attributes are exported, if any. These require 12DA.ADF or FEATURES.ADF in the TSP. Use <a href=GCEDT12A to edit 12 Model attributes and DISP12DA to display them.

TML date MenuSource 
08/02/22   File|​Misc. export|​12DA Geocomp Update or $250  
 GC14

Report the chainage and offset of points measured along HAL and VAL.

Report selected objects showing Pt Number, Chainage, horizontal offset, RL, RL Diff, 3D Chainage, Actual offset, Distance travelled and Name.

The Chainage, horizontal offset, RL (=elevation) and RL Diff (=elevation difference to VAL) are from the point to the closest location on the horizontal alignment measured in 2D. The 3D Chainage and Actual offset are from the same point to the closest location measured in 3D, which will usually be different to the 2D location.

Select alignment by record or roadjob.

See also GC03.

TML date  Source 
19/01/22     Geocomp Update or $250  
 GC14R

Report chainage and offset in TMS ProFit XY format.

Report chainage and offset to a .DAT file used for processing tunnel as-built reports in TMS ProFit software by Amberg Technologies.

See also GC14.

TML date  Source 
08/02/22     POA  
 GC14S

Report the chainage and offset of points measured along HAL and VAL, sorted by chainage and offset.

The Chainage, horizontal offset, RL (=elevation) and RL Diff (=elevation difference to VAL) are from the point to the closest location on the horizontal alignment measured in 2D. The 3D Chainage and 3D Offset (=Horizontal component of the 3D actual offset), 3D RL Diff (=vertical component of the 3D Actual offset) are from the same point to the closest location measured in 3D, which will usually be different to the 2D location.

See also GC14.

TML date  Source 
08/02/22     Geocomp Update or $250  
 GC14SET

Report the chainage and offset of points measured along alignment set.

Report selected objects showing Pt Number, Chainage, Offset, Height, Height difference from set3D chainage, 3D offset, Distance travelled and Description/​name.

See also GC03.

TML date  Source 
08/02/22     Geocomp Update or $250  
 GC15

Delete selected plines and sets with total length inside a specified range.

Prompt for records, minimum and maximum total length.

Points will also be deleted with sets.

GC15 is useful for cleaning up lines of unwanted hatching or symbols from imported data.

TML date  Source 
08/02/22     Geocomp Update or $250  
 GC16

Modify colours and linetypes by group, name or layer.

Modify the line colour and linetype of selected objects by the group, name or layer in a .CLT mapping file.

Lines in the .CLT must be in one of the following three formats:

Group,Colour,Linetype
Name,Colour,Linetype
Layer,Colour,Linetype

See C:\TMCUSTOM\​Geocomp\GEOCOMP 2.CLT for an example.

Wild cards: * and ? can be used in the group, name or layer.

See also

GC16ADC
Modify line colours and linetypes to match AutoDraft
COLRLINE
Modify colours and linetypes by layer
LAYERMAP
Modify layers, colours and linetypes by mapping file
GCJOINPT
Join points and modify colours and linetypes by .CLT
GCIMPORT
Import Geocomp .PTS and .STR
GCCSVIN
Import .CSV

TML date  SourceGC
08/02/22     Geocomp Update or $250 90
 GC16ADC

Modify colour based upon AutoDraft report.

Modify the colours of selected objects by layer to match the colours they would have if set by AutoDraft.

GC16ADC requires the Full Report report file from AutoDraft (AUTODRAFT).

Block names are also changed to match.

See also GC16 and CSV2ADC.

TML date  Source 
08/02/22     Geocomp Update or $250  
 GC17

Project from points on a set to a DTM.

Create a set or pline joining the points created by projecting from points on a set at a specified bearing and slope.

See also SHADOW, GC23, SLICE, SIDESLOPE and DTMCONE.

TML date  Source 
08/02/22     Geocomp Update or $250  
 GC18

Report chainage and elevation along a VAL.

Report chainage and elevation along a VAL at an interval.

TML date  SourceGC
08/02/22     Geocomp Update or $250 412
 GC20

Compute the cut and fill volumes of selected boundaries.

Compute the cut and fill volumes within selected set or pline boundaries and report.

The report shows the volumes, and the horizontal and surface areas, of the cut and fill.

Enter a stripping depth in metres to lower the existing surface by that much.

Select Exclude dead regions to subtract the areas and volumes within dead region boundaries from the totals. Define any dead regions by SETSMOOTH.

Select Additional Surface Info to report the coordinate ranges of the DTMs.

GC20 can be slower than EARTHWORK which reports neither volumes within dead regions nor areas of cut and fill.

See also GCMULVOL and GCGRDVOL.

TML date  SourceGC
08/02/22     Geocomp Update or $500 DTM 3
 GC21

Change the default Callout Style.

Change or establish the current callout style recorded in tmodwin.ini.

For example, GC21 Date to set the current callout style to Date.

Use with an alias or toolbar.

See CALLOUT.

TML date  SourceGC
08/02/22     Geocomp Update or $250 90
 GC22

Check a DTM Edge boundary.

Report whether a set is suitable for use as a DTM Edge or DTM design boundary.

Select "Report only" to check whether

  • the selected set
    • is open (and, if so, locate the first and last points),
    • has any points with no elevations,
    • has any points that are not contourable,
    • has any points that are not on the same layer,
    • has any segments that are not used by the DTM, or
  • the layer of the set
    • has any DTM points outside the set.

Turn off "Report only", to also

  • Remove points from the set that are not in the DTM, and
  • Relayer DTM points outside the set to a specified layer such as INVALID.

TML date MenuSourceGC
08/02/22   DTM|​More...|​Check DTM edge Geocomp Update or $200 197
 GC23

Create a set where slopes from points intersect a DTM.

Create a set by projecting at a % slope on the left or right hand side of a set.

Optionally, create perpendicular sets between the sets.

See also DTMSHOT, SIDESLOPE and SLICE.

TML date  SourceGC
08/02/22     Geocomp Update or $200 DTM C
 GC24

Bowditch adjustment (compass rule) of a lot or traverse.

Adjust points in a set to distribute the closure error based on the proportion of the length of the segment to the length of the set.

Any elevations are also adjusted. The adjusted set is created on layer "ADJUSTED".

Optionally, specify a closing point.

The Compass Rule works well for simple traverses with few redundant measurements. For more complex adjustments, consider using RDE to adjust a traverse or network by the method of least squares.

TML date  SourceGC
08/02/22     Geocomp Update or $250 62
 GC25

Create isopachs at intersection of two DTMs.

Create a temporary isopach surface of the elevation difference between two DTMs then interpolate isopachs where the differences are equal to the nominated value.

Use the isopach elevation of 0.00 to create cut|fill lines. Cut|fill lines indicate where the DTMs intersect and thus the boundary between cut and fill areas.

Select whether to create a 2D pline or 3D set.

The name of the new pline or set is "Cut/Fill Line".

See also CONTOURATELEV.

TML date MenuSourceGC
08/02/22     Geocomp Update or $200 DTM C
 GC25MULT

Create multiple isopachs between two DTMs.

Create pline isopachs between two DTMs at a specified interval and range and inside specified boundaries.

TML date  Source 
08/02/22     Geocomp Update or $200  
 GC26

Test attribute records.

Create up to four new attribute records for an object: two alphanumeric names, one integer and one double precision real number and save them to the attribute definition file geocomp.adf.

Delete all attributes, or just new ones.

GC26 is mainly used to demonstrate attributes in Terramodel.

Contact Geocomp Systems if you need commands with user-definable attributes.

See also

CALLOUT and other EAT code functions
Label objects with the new attributes
DUMPATT
List all attributes of an object
RMGC
An example of a golf course tree database using attributes
DISFFEAT, FYATBEDIT, FYATBEP, FYATBIN and FYATBOUT
Feature attribute commands
GC26GIS
An example of creating attributes in an external database

TML date  Source 
08/02/22     Geocomp Update or $250  
 GC26GIS

Create attribute database records for an object.

Create attribute records in a MS Access database.

GC26GIS requires the attribute file TMGIS.ADF. Contact Geocomp Systems if you need to link Terramodel to a database.

TML date  Source 
08/02/22     POA  
 GC27

Place chainage labels on xlines.

Label all xlines with text on the current layer with chainage values parallel to the xlines.

All lines that refer to the alignment and are within the chainage range are labelled even when turned off or on invisible layers.

Xlines on exact metre chainages are shown with no decimal point and no trailing zeros. Other chainages are labelled to the number of decimal places in UNITSSET Precision.

To label with a block instead of text, first create your own block that contains EAT text and has the name GC27.

Dialog

HAL
Select an alignment with xlines.
Start Ch | End
Enter start and end chainages | stations, or leave blank to label all xlines on the alignment.
Left | Cln | Right
Create the labels on the left, the centreline or the right.
Style
Specify the text style for labels.
Delete old
Delete old chainage labels.
Include 'Ch'
Prefix the label with with "Ch ".
Use GC27 blk
Label with GC27 block instead of text. Only selectable if block GC27 can be found.
Label
Delete previous xline labels and create new labels.
Cancel
Cancel the command.

See also

GCXLINES
Create or replace xline labels for a roadway
LABELHAL
Label horizontal alignment intersection points
LABELPI
Label intersection points
GCLABIP
Label intersection points

TML date MenuSourceGC
08/02/22   Draft|​Label Xlines Geocomp Update or $250 93
 GC28

Create 3D points along HAL and VAL at 2D distances.

Create points in the plan view within a specified chainage range, at the nominated interval, HAL points, VAL points or Xlines.

Elevations are interpolated from the vertical alignment. If no VAL is selected, elevations are interpolated from the 3D horizontal alignment set. Point names are derived from a prefix followed by the chainage|​station value. Points are created at the start and end chainages.

Dialog

HAL
Specify a horizontal alignment.
VAL
Specify a vertical alignment or leave blank.
Start and End
Specify start and end chainages.
Int
Create points at 2D chainages evenly divisible by the nominated interval. Enter a space or * for no points at intervals.
Hal Pts
Create points at vertices and at beginnings and ends of arcs and spirals.
VAL Pts
Create points at vertices, sags and crests and at beginnings and ends of vertical curves.
Xlines
Create points at Xlines.
Create Set
Join the points with a set.
Prefix
Specify any prefix to the point names.

See also

GC283D
for 3D distances
3D and GC99
for offsets
GCDIVIDE
for minimum spacing

TML date MenuSourceGC
08/02/22   Draw|​Point|​Along HAL Geocomp Update or $250 77
 GC283D

Create 3D points along HAL and VAL at 3D distances.

Create points in the plan view within a specified chainage range and interval.

Dialog

HAL
Specify a horizontal alignment
VAL
Specify a vertical alignment
Start and End
Specify a 2D chainage range.
3D Distance
Create points separated by the 3D distance within the chainage range.
Prefix
Name the points with the cumulative 3D distance and any prefix.

Notes

See GC28 to create points at 2D distances and GCIN2SET to insert the points into the set.

The TML name is GC28_3D. If GC283D does not run from the command line, create an alias from GC283D to GC28_3D or enter GC28_3D.

TML date MenuSourceGC
08/02/22   Draw|​Point|​Along HAL Geocomp Update or $250 77
 GC29

Report distance and direction with 3D components to the message scroll.

Report distance, direction and X and Y differences between two locations. If both locations have elevations also report the vertical angle, slope distance, height difference and grade. If points at those locations are connected by an arc segment, also report the arc length and radius.

Dialog

Radial
After each measurement, the next measurement is from the first location
Traverse
After each measurement, the next measurement is from the second location
Points
Select locations by mouse or point numbers
Segment
Select locations by set segment
First Pt:
The first location
Second Pt:
The second location
Cancel
Close the command

Notes

The elevation at a location is the elevation of a point at that location, or else an elevation interpolated from the current DTM layer.

In the plan view, report the bearing and distance between two locations. In section views, report the horizontal distance, slope distance and grade.

Enter "GC29 segment" at the command line, to start in segment mode.

TAB and Shift+TAB keys can be used to quickly change the focus. For example, when in Traverse mode, Shift+TAB can return the focus to the first location, which is similar to Radial mode without selecting the Radial option.

See also

DISTANCE
Report bearing and horizontal distance only
GEOMINQ
Report bearing, horizontal distance, and zenith angle and arc properties where appropriate
DTMCH
Set the current DTM layer

TML date MenuSourceGC
08/02/22   Report|​Distance 3D Geocomp Update or $250 17
 GC29UTM

Compute and label ellipsoidal distance and direction.

Report the ellipsoidal distance, ground distance, slope distance, elevation difference, line scale factor, grid bearings (forward and back), grid convergances and arc-to-chord between two locations.

Dialog

Points | Segment
Select two points or a segment of a set or pline.
Central Meridian
Enter the longitude of the central meridian.
Avg N-value
Enter the average N-value
Settings
Labelling
Label the plane or spheroidal bearings and distances with specified layer, text style and colours.
N-Values
Interpolate N-values from a DTM layer with coordinates in Longitude and Latitude.
Create an Inverse report
Create an Inverse report.

Import a grid

Use AUSGEOID or NZGEOID to import a latitude and longitude grid of N-values, or import a .TMX of such a grid.

TML date  SourceGC
08/02/22     Geocomp Update or $200 UTM 10
 GC30A

Report coordinates and elevation difference measured vertically to DTM, with horizontal alignment and labels.

Report for each selected point, the Point number, Easting, Northing, Point elevation, DTM elevation, elevation Difference and Name.

The report includes the average vertical elevation difference and RMS.

Options and Settings

  • Chainage and Offset to HAL
  • Band width to group points at similar chainages
  • Subtract stripping
  • Sign convention for differences
  • Bandwidth for sorting by chainage
  • High and Low tolerance
  • Modify point names
  • Report to .CSV
  • Create difference text
  • Difference text layer, style, bearing and units
  • Point and text colours for cut, fill and tolerance

If project units are feet, all reports, tolerances and difference text labels are in decimal feet. If project units are metres, elevations and differences are reported in metres, tolerances are entered and reported in millimetres, and difference text is labelled in m or mm.

The number of decimal places of metres and feet in elevations and elevation differences is controlled by the Precison for Elevations in UNITSSET.

Define any dead regions by SETSMOOTH.

TML date  SourceGC
08/02/22   Reports|​More...|​Vertical differences Geocomp Update or $250 236
 GC30PERP

Report coordinates and elevation difference measured perpendicular to DTM.

Report for each selected point, the point number, easting, northing, point elevation, DTM elevation, elevation difference perpendicular to DTM and name.

The average elevation difference perpendicular to the DTM, and RMS, is included.

Choose a tolerance range, a stripping depth and the sign convention for the difference in elevation.

To create text and colour points, select "Use GC30A Settings". See GC30A.

Define any dead regions by SETSMOOTH.

GC42AB is usually preferred to report elevation differences and slopes of road batters.

TML date  Source 
10/02/22     Geocomp Update or $250  
 GC31

Remove duplicate points on a layer with tolerances.

Remove duplicate points on a layer within specified tolerances in Easting, Northing and Elevation.

Notes

  • At each location within tolerance, one point is retained and any duplicate points are moved to layer 0.
  • Optionally, generate a report.
  • Choose "Mean Pts", "Highest" or "Lowest".
  • If the Elevation tolerance is *, all points within the Easting and Northing tolerance are considered and duplicate points with no elevation are relayered to layer 0.
  • Alphanumeric point numbers are retained in preference to integer point numbers.
  • The name of the remaining point is appended with the names of any removed points, unless the names are duplicate or the resulting name exceeds 80 characters.

Duplicate points

  • When a cluster of 3D contourable points on a DTM layer are within a distance of approximately 1mm in both X and Y, DTM formation automatically removes to layer 0 all bar one of those points. This is much faster than GC31.
  • DTM formation occurs whenever a DTM is required by a commands such as CONTOUR and 3DVISUALISER.
  • Reserve Layer 0 for "junk" objects such as duplicate points that can be safely deleted.
  • CONVERT can take a long time to convert a lot of plines to sets, if "Dup pts ok" is OFF. It takes much less time to CONVERT with this ON, or use GCCONVRT, then use DTM formation or GC31 to remove duplicate points afterwards.
  • Duplicate points can be removed while importing DWG files by first creating a Terramodel layer called DXF_PT_CHK. This slows the import. Removing duplicate points later by DTM formation is much quicker overall.
  • If you use GC58 to remove duplicate sets, plines and text, consider carefully whether to remove duplicate points before or afterwards.
  • GC92 reports points within 1 mm with height differences, with an option to move them slightly apart. Use this to check imported data before forming any DTM.

See also

FILT3DPT
Remove or report selected duplicate points within a single 3D tolerance on any layers.

TML date MenuSourceGC
08/02/22   Edit|​More...|​Duplicate points Geocomp Update or $250 170
 GC32

Report visible layers in layerlists.

List the visibility status of each layer in each layerlist.

For each layer, report the line colour, point colour, linetype, number of objects, and whether objects on that layer are visible in each layerlist.

LLAYER is a similar report without the layer lists.

If there are too many layer lists to fit on the report, use LLRPT which reports in layer list order.

TML date  SourceGC
08/02/22     Geocomp Update or $250 86
 GC33

Create a DTM from the upper or lower regions of two DTMs.

Create a DTM on the selected Higher or Lower DTM layer from the higher or lower of all the regions of the two selected DTM layers.

The new DTM covers the extent of both DTMs; regions within only one DTM are included.

The new DTM can be limited to a boundary.

Points are omitted from the new layer within a narrow band the width of the entered "Clip Dist". A typical value of Clip Dist is 0.01 metres.

Breaklines interpolated by draping from the original surfaces are created in the new surface half way between the band edges and the cut|fill lines. The gap between the new breaklines is therefore half the clip distance.

GC33 is great for use with complex cut and fill volume estimation.

See also GCMATCH to match contours, JOIN to join matched contours, DTMMATCH to match the elevations of two DTMs, GC33MULT to create the highest or lowest of multiple overlapping surfaces, MERGE to create a surface from two overlapping surfaces, GCMERGE to replace a surface with multiple overlapping surfaces, GCCLIP to clip multiple surfaces from a single surface, GCSUBDTM to lower parts of surfaces to subgrade depths and GCCOPY to copy multiple objects into a single surface.

TML date MenuSourceGC
08/02/22   DTM|​More...|​Upper or lower of 2DTMs Geocomp Update or $200 240
 GC33MULT

Create a DTM from the upper (or lower) components of multiple DTMs.

Select a starting DTM, typically the largest, and a layer list of the other DTM layers.

Nominate the name of the final higher or lower DTM layer.

A new surface is created from the starting DTM and the first DTM in the layer list. That surface is then compared with the next DTM in the layer list, and so on in alphabetical order, which can be also date order in a suitable layer naming convention.

The new DTM covers the extent of all selected DTMs, with small gaps at the transitions to avoid overlaps. Points are omitted from the new layer within a narrow band the width of the entered "Clip Dist". A Clip Dist of 0.01 is suggested.

Breaklines interpolated by draping from the original surfaces are created in the new surface half way between the band edges and the cut|fill lines. The gap between the new breaklines is therefore half the clip distance.

GC33MULT is great for use with complex cut|fill volume estimation.

See also GCMATCH to match contours, JOIN to join matched contours, DTMMATCH to match the elevations of two DTMs, GC33 to create the highest or lowest of two surfaces, MERGE to create a surface from two overlapping surfaces, GCMERGE to replace a surface with multiple overlapping surfaces, GCCLIP to clip multiple surfaces from a single surface, GCSUBDTM to lower parts of surfaces to subgrade depths and GCCOPY to copy multiple objects into a single surface.

TML date  Source 
08/02/22     Geocomp Update or $200  
 GC34

Find and report a nominated point by number.

Type in or pick a point then either highlight with concentric circles, recentre the display or recentre the display and zoom by 10x.

The message scroll also reports the point number, easting, northing, elevation, name, layer, view, group, colour, contourability and set, and if the point is part if an arc, connected points, radii and any unequal legs.

The view scale is updated so point labels remain the same size.

See also RECENTER which recentres the display where you pick.

TML date MenuSourceGC
08/02/22   Reports|​Mark|​Find point Geocomp Update or $250 299
 GC35

Create points at centroids of plines and sets.

Create points at centroids of any closed plines or sets.

If the objects are circular, the new points are created at the centres of arc.

If the objects are plines, the new points have the same elevations as the plines.

If the objects are sets, the new points have elevations equal to the means of the elevations of the points in the sets.

TML date MenuSourceGC
08/02/22   Draw|​Point|​At centroids Geocomp Update or $250 181
 GC36

Move points onto a HAL or line.

Move selected points perpendicular to (or square off) the HAL or line so their offset is zero.

Points beyond the two points or the HAL are not moved.

Dialog

2 Points
Select two points to define a line onto which selected points are to be moved.
Hal
Select a pline or set onto which selected points are to be moved.
Points to move
Select points to be moved
Insert
If the HAL is a set, insert the moved points into the set
OK
Move the selected points
Cancel
Cancel the command without moving any points

See also

POINT
Create a point. The Right-Mouse-button menu has options to create by Perp and PerpHal.
GC86
Move points by a distance towards or away from an alignment.
GCIN2SET
Move nearby points into a set
ADD2SET
Add points into a set without moving the points.
GCNEARLN
Select point near an alignment.

TML date MenuSourceGC
08/02/22   Modify|​More...|​​Move points onto alignment Geocomp Update or $250 120
 GC37

Report and label cross section from strings.

Report and label cross sections at chainages and offsets where Xlines intersect selected sets and plines, without using a DTM.

Select the alignment and strings and control the output

CL HAL:
Nominate an alignment for the centreline.
Objs:
Select sets or plines for the intersecting strings. Only strings with elevations are used.
Create points
Create points on the current layer at the intersecting strings. The point name is derived from the string.
Create CES
Export the cross section as a Geocomp Cross section (.CES) file. This .CES file can be imported into Terramodel (see below), Geocomp Road Design or Geocomp Spatial Data System.
Sort offsets
Select "Sort offsets" to sort strings on offset from left to right, when you want to form a DTM such as a roadway surface. Do not sort on offsets, when you want sort on record number to allow for overlaps such as in a tunnel.
Report
Select Report to Report to P3Pad the Chainage, Offset, Elevation, (optionally) Grade and set and plines.
Show Grade
Select "Show grades" to report the grades between strings.
Label grade
Select "Label grades" to create text labels in the XSect view.

If you show or label grades, choose whether to label as percentage or as Run:Rise ratio.

Roadway

To create a roadway from strings:

  1. Import or create sets along string lines
  2. <Import or create centreline
  3. Create Xlines
  4. Use GC37 to create a .CES file
  5. Register a roadway alignment, create a roadjob, surfaces, and so on
  6. IMPORTXS the model into a roadway, specifying Geocomp Existing as the format

See also GC37CSV, GC94, GC75 and XSLABEL.

TML date MenuSourceGC
08/02/22   Roads|​Reports...|​Intersecting strings Geocomp Update or $250 80
 GC37CSV

Create cross sections in a .CSV file at strings intersecting xlines.

Create cross sections by intersecting selected sets and plines with xlines of a nominated alignment without reference to any DTM.

The sections are written to a comma-​separated .CSV file.

The file format is Chainage, Offset, Elevation, Grade, String Description, [all fields except the chainage are repeated on the same line for every intersecting string].

See also GC37.

TML date  Source 
08/02/22     Geocomp Update or $250  
 GC38

Affine Transformation.

Using up to 10 Control Point|Data Point pairs, compute a best fit of shift, rotation, north scale and east scale and then transform the selected data, and report the residuals.

Text and blocks are shifted, rotated and scaled, but not skewed with the rest of the data. To skew text or blocks too, explode first.

See also GC07 for Helmert transformation, which computes a single scale factor, and GC3DADJ, which transforms in X, Y and Z.

TML date MenuSourceGC
08/02/22   Modify|​Transform|​Affine Geocomp Update or $200 161
 GC39

Move intersection point and update Xlines in a roadjob.

Delete the Xlines on the main registered HAL of a roadway and place new Xlines at alignment points and at the nominated interval.

Pick the main registered hal to move the nearest intersection point to a new location.

The new Xlines will all have the left and right extents of the first of the original Xlines.

Use GCXLINES to create new xlines including hal points or to change offsets.

TML date MenuSourceGC
08/02/22   Roads|​More...|​Move IPs and update Xlines Geocomp Update or $200 84
 GC3D

Create a 3D set by vertical or perpendicular offsets.

Create a 3D set offset from horizontal and vertical alignments, with the elevation offset vertical or perpendicular to the VAL.

Create a set in the current layer connecting points at offsets from selected alignments.

Dialog

Hal Record:
Select a horizontal alignment pline or set. The default is the active HAL.
Val Record:
Select a vertical alignment pline or set. The default is a profile with the same name as the HAL, or a profile which refers to the HAL, if existing. If no record is selected, or the VAL is out of the HAL range, the the new points have no elevations.
Settings
Chainage
Begin:
Enter beginning chainage
End
Enter ending chainage
Incr:
Enter chainage increment
Use Xlines
Also create points at Xlines
Offset distance
Enter the horizontal offset
Delta elevation
Enter the elevation difference
Vertical
The chainage of the new point is the same
Prep to Val
The chainage of the new point is adjusted to be perpendicular to the VAL
Name
Enter the name of the new set
OK
Accept the new settings
Cancel
Retain the old settings
OK
Create points and set
Cancel
Cancel without creating new points or set

See also

3D
Create a 3D set offset from horizontal and vertical alignments
GC28
Create points along horizontal and vertical alignments
GC283D
Create points along horizontal and vertical alignments at 3D distances
TML date MenuSourceGC
08/02/22   Cogo|​Streets|​3D Geocomp Update or $200 77
 GC3DADJ

3D Conformal adjustment.

Transform selected points, text and blocks in 3D, maintaining the shape but applying 3D scaling, rotation and shift.

Use up to nine pairs of control and data points.

To keep the points at the current 3D distances, fix the scale factor to 1.0.

Check the report for Sigma Zero value and other potential problems before completing the transformation.

2D points can be transformed using a default elevation. Plines are not transformed.

Possible uses

  • Adjust heights along long straight traverses.
  • Confirm that a beam will fit between abutments with fixed scale factor of 1.0.

Dialog

Pts, Text and Blocks
Select objects to be transformed.
Settings
Control Pt:
Enter by point number or select from three to nine Control Points.
Data Pt:
Enter by point number or select the same number of corresponding Data Points.
Generate report
Report transformations to P3Pad
Transform 2d co-ords using default Elev:
Enter an elevation, otherwise consider elevations on control and data points.
Fix Scale Factor to:
Enter a scale factor, otherwise use the computed scale factor.
Calculate
From the control and data points, weights and scale factor, calculate the Residuals, Rotation, Scale, Shifts for a 3D conformal adjustment transformation and Sigma Zero, and display the calculated values, and save the values as project variables.
Transform 3D objects
Immediately transform the selected objects in 3D from the old coordinate system to the new.
Cancel
Close the input dialog without further transformation.
Store Transformation to File
Store calculated values to a .3DADJ file for later transformation of data in other project files with the same rotations, scales and shifts.
Use Stored Values
If you have calculated and stored values as project variables, immediately transform the coordinates of the selected objects.
Read Values From File
Read values from a .3DADJ file and update project variables.
Cancel
Close the dialog without further transformation.

See also

GC3DROT
Rotate in 3D around a centroid in steps
GC07
Transform in 2D by Helmert transformation, which transforms using a single computed scale factor
ROT3D
Transform objects in 3D space using exactly 3 pairs of control and data points.

TML date MenuSource 
08/02/22   Modify|​Transform|​3D conformal Geocomp Update or $200  
 GC3DROT

Rotate points, text or blocks in 3D by steps.

Select points, text or blocks and then rotate them in X, Y or Z around their centroid in small steps or by 90 degrees.

Once you select the objects, rotate them, use other commands such as ZOOM, PAN, DELETE or SET, or restore their original locations.

GC3DROT can also be used to present data in isometric views.

To retain objects in both the original and rotated coordinates, copy objects into View 6 with GCREVIEW.

New objects created after the attributes have been assigned cannot be "restored" with the other objects unless they are sets, blocks or labels that are attached to the selected objects.

Dialog

Select Pts, Text and Blocks to Rotate
Select objects to be rotated. If this prompt does not appear, you have previously selected some objects.
Next
Assign attributes to the selected objects that include their original locations and whether they are on or off, turn all other objects off and then Zoom All.
Rotate Dynamically
Rotate the objects towards the entered location by one small step. Use mouse clicks to rotate graphically through multiple successive locations.
Rotate about X, Y or Z axes
Rotate About X or Y
Click buttons to rotate about X or Y axes by small steps or by 90 degrees.
Rotate About Z
Click buttons to rotate clockwise or anticlockwise about Z axis by small steps or by 90 degrees.
Rotate About Point
Enter X, Y and Z coordinates of the origin about which to rotate. The default origin is the centroid of the selected objects.
Close
Close the buttons
Rotate by steps of [ ] degrees
Enter the increment for small steps
Restore Co-Ords
Restore each selected object to its original location, on or off status and attributes, and then Zoom All.
Close
Close and keep the new coordinates.

See also

ROT3D
Rotate by three named pairs of points.
GC3DADJ
Compute and transform points by multiple pairs of points.

TML date  Source 
08/03/22     Geocomp Update or $200  
 GC3DSETS

Find the closest or perpendicular 3D distance.

Report closest or perpendicular 3D distance between a set and a point or another set, and create the corresponding points and set.

Dialog

3D Set:
Select a set of straight segments joining 3D points
3D Set or Point
Select another set of straight segments joining 3D points or a single 3D point
Closest
Report the closest 3D distance between a set and a point or between two sets
Perpendicular
Report the shortest perpendicular 3D distance between a set and a point or between two sets, extended in the directions of the end segments.
Create Line in Layer
Create two points and a connecting set on a specified layer
OK
Report the distance to message scroll and create the points and set if specified.

Notes

The closest distance considers only the selected point and sets. The perpendicular distance also considers the extension of end segments beyond the end points. If both the new points are within the extents of the sets, the closest distance is also the perpendicular distance.

GC3DSETS is useful for determining whether points or sets meet minimum 3D distance requirements. See GCOFFELV or similar to define any parallel strings for pipes, trenches or shafts first. See GC75 to report instantaneous horizontal distances perpendicular to an alignment.

TML date MenuSource 
08/02/22   Reports|​More...|​Closest 3D distance Geocomp Update or $200  
 GC3PTARC

Create a set through three points.

Create a set consisting of two arcs connecting three points in order.

Replaces THREEPC which does not connect to the middle point. The difference is especially noticeable when all three points have elevations, the mid-point is lowest and you interpolate elevations along kerb sets using a command such as ARCBREAK or GC50.

See also FIXCURVE, BFITCURV and GCARC.

TML date MenuSourceGC
08/02/22   Cogo|​Curves|​3 points Geocomp Update or $125 46
 GC40

Compare points in two layers by coordinates.

Compare points in two nominated layers and list the differences in easting, northing and elevation.

Settings include minimum distance for comparison and point comparison tolerances (in x, y and z).

The standard report is in the format:

Point Point Bearing Distance DEast DNorth DElev Name_Pt1 Name_Pt2

The Expanded report format is:

Point East North Elev Name Point East North Elev Name DEast DNorth

See also GC40A and GC40M.

Points which are reported as "No match" become the current selection set so they can be readily selected by another command with right-​mouse-​button Previous.

TML date MenuSourceGC
08/02/22   Reports|​More...|​Compare layers Geocomp Update or $250 182
 GC40A

Compare points in two layers by coordinates using search ranges.

Compare points in two nominated layers using search ranges and list the differences in easting, northing and elevation.

Settings include minimum distance for comparison, point comparison search ranges (in x, y and z) and point tolerances in plan and elevation.

The Basic report format is:

Point Point Bearing Distance DEast DNorth DElev Name_Pt1 Name_Pt2

The Expanded report format is:

Point East North Elev Name Point East North Elev Name DEast DNorth DElev

Select "Create CSV file", to export the report as a .CSV file.

See also GC40 and GC40M.

TML date  SourceGC
08/02/22     Geocomp Update or $250 182
 GC40M

Compare points in two layers by coordinates using alignment.

Compare points in two nominated layers and list the elevations and differences and the easting and northing or the chainage and offset.

Settings include horizontal alignment, point comparison search ranges (in x, y and z) and whether to report as comma separated values.

The Basic report format is:

Elev1, Elev2, DElev, Name1

The "Show Eastings/Northings" report format is:

Point number1, Easting1, Northing1, Elev1, DElev, Name1

The HAL report format is

Chainage, Offset, Elev1, Elev2, DElev, Name1

See also GC40 and GC40A

TML date  Source 
08/02/22     Geocomp Update or $250  
 GC40PILE

Report pile differences

Report differences between pairs of points representing the design and as-built locations of piles.

Typically these points will both be on the top of the pile.

Dialog

Design:
Select a layer of design points for each pile
AsBuilt
Select a layer of as-built points for each pile
Show Chn and Offset
Report chainage and offset from the active alignment for each point in both layers; otherwise report Easting and Northing
Report vector
Include horizontal bearing and distance between each pair of points
Headings
Enter text for report headings and footer
Settings
Enter point comparison search ranges and tolerances, and whether to report to .CSV
OK
For each point on the design layer, look for one point on the as-built layer within the search ranges and report the differences in coordinates or chainages and offsets between the design and as-built points

TML date  Source 
10/02/22     Geocomp Update or $250  
 GC40RAKE

Report pile rakes

Report rakes between pairs of points on piles.

Within the search ranges of each design point, report the rake between a pair of as-built points near the bottom and top of the pile.

<if

The report shows, for each design point, the point number, easting, northing, elevation and point name, and for a corresponding pair of as-built points, the lower point number, the higher point number, the bearing from the lower to the higher and the rake expressed as a horizontal distance per metre of elevation difference.

Dialog

Design:
Select a layer of design pile points
AsBuilt
Select a layer of as-built pile points
Headings
Enter text for report headings and footer
Settings
Enter point comparison search ranges and tolerances
OK
For each point on the design layer, report the rake between two nearby points on the as-built layer.
Cancel
Cancel the command

TML date  Source 
08/02/22     Geocomp Update or $250  
 GC40TEXT

Label points in two layers with differences.

Label points in two layers with differences in easting, northing and elevation or offsets and elevation.

Compare points in two nominated layers and list the differences.

The differences are of Eastings, Northings and Elevations, unless you select a HAL, in which case the differences are of Offsets and Elevations,

Settings include

  • Standard or Expanded report
  • Minimum distance for comparison
  • Point comparison tolerances (in x, y and z)
  • Number of decimal places for reports
  • Text style
  • Display text or vectors
  • Option to report 2D distance only
  • Option to show alignment direction

Each point is labelled with the Name, "East" Diff, "North" Diff and "Elev" Diff in a single multi-line text object. The "East", "North" and "Elev" titles are derived from View settings.

Points which are reported as "No match" become the current selection set so they can be readily selected by another command with right-​mouse-​button Previous.

See also GC40 and GC40A

TML date  SourceGC
08/02/22     Geocomp Update or $250 332
 GC41

Show obstructions in profile view.

Label a horizontal alignment where selected objects cross, or selected points are nearby, with concentric circles or vertical lines in the profile view and points in the plan view.

Dialog

HAL:
Specify a horizontal alignment
Obstructions
Select points, sets or plines in the plan view that represent obstructions such as pipes or limits such as boundaries
Max Pts OS
Consider only points within this offset from the HAL
Obs Ht
Enter a height for the obstruction labels, such as the outside diameter of pipes
Obvert
Select Obvert to place the top of the circle at the elevation of the point or set
Invert
Select Invert to place the bottom of the circle at the elevation of the point or set
Add text
Also label the obtruction with elevation text
Add Plan Pts
Also create points at the obstructions in the Plan view on CLASH POINTS layer

Circles are displayed and plotted as ellipses if the vertical exaggeration is greater than 1.0.

Selected "obstructions" that have no elevations, such as lot boundaries and xlines, are indicated by tall vertical plines at 0.00 elevations or elevations derived from the HAL.

See also

DRAPE
Interpolate elevations from a DTM at plines
XSLABEL
Add obstructions to cross section plots
SET2PRFL
Draw pipes in Profile
PIPEOBST
Label with chainage and elevation
OVERWALL
Create points and blocks at XLines in XSect view
TP41
Label with instructions from a layerlist

TML date MenuSource 
08/02/22   Cogo|​Streets|​Profile obstructions Geocomp Update or $250  
 GC42

Report point elevation minus roadway elevation.

Report elevations of selected points minus the design elevation a roadway.

The design elevations are calculated from the roadway designed by templates or a finish surface DTM.

Where the elevation difference cannot be determined, or the points are outside the default xline offsets, the points are marked with *.

The basic report shows the chainage, offset, elevation difference and point name.

The extended report shows the point number, chainage, offset, elevation, design elevation, elevation difference and point name.

TML date MenuSourceGC
08/02/22   Roads|​Reports|​Compare points Geocomp Update or $200 429
 GC42AB

As-built roadway report.

Compare points from an as-built roadway survey with the roadway design.

The design elevations are calculated from the roadway designed by templates or a finish surface DTM.

Nominate a roadway, horizontal offset, depth and whether to compare with the design pavement or batter.

The horizontal offset and depth are adjusted by values you enter.

Settings control tolerances, text, colours and reports.

Reports

The report headings show the roadway name and description and the desired depth of material (default = 0). The P3Pad reports also show desired tolerances above and below that depth.

The Pavement report shows point number, chainage, horizontal offset, design elevation, surveyed elevation, difference (mm), High or Low, * if out of tolerance and point name. The pavement difference is the surveyed elevation minus design elevation measured vertically.

The Batter report shows point number, chainage, offset, design elevation, surveyed elevation, difference, an indication when out of tolerance, point name, and prompts whether to include the horizontal offset to the batter. The batter difference is the surveyed elevation minus design elevation in mm measured perpendicular to the design at depth.

List Coordinates to include easting and northing coordinates in the Pavement and Batter reports, where there is room in the P3Pad report. The .CSV always includes coordinates.

List Slopes report includes Des Slp (the instantaneous slope of the design surface), ASB Slp (the slope from the previous As-Built point at that chainage) and Diff Slp (the difference between the two slopes), at the location of each selected point.

CSV report reports to a .CSV file: Point Number, Chainage, Offset, Easting, Northing, Design Ht, Survey Ht, Diff (mm) and Pt Name.

The end of each report shows the number of points, mean of differences, mean of positive differences, mean of negative differences and standard deviation.

Tolerances

In Settings, specify Band Width, High Tolerance, Low Tolerance and Slope Tolerance.

If the Band width is positive, the results are sorted by offset within chainage bands. If zero or negative, they are sorted by chainage only. If *, they are not sorted.

By default, the difference is checked for tolerance before rounding to the nearest mm for the report. Points between 0.5mm out of tolerance and 0.5mm in tolerance have the same reported difference as the tolerance.

To check for tolerance only after rounding to the mm, so that points up to 0.5mm out of tolerance are shown as in tolerance and match the rounded differences, use PROJECTV to define project variable GC42AB:ROUNDTOL.

Differences

Optionally, change the point name to include the difference.

Optionally, Create Difference Text, with specified layer, style and bearing and units (m or mm).

Specify new colours for points in fill, in cut and within tolerance.

Extents

Where the point is outside the extents of the roadway, the elevations and differences are marked with *.

For a point to be within the roadway, it must be within all of these extents:

  • The whole main horizontal alignment
  • Any road design template specified in TEMPLATE Manager,
  • Any Finish Surface specified in SURFACE Manager,
  • Any existing surface specified in SURFACE Manager, and
  • The default left and right xline extents specified in XLINE.

To check whether a point is within the roadway, use ROADSPOT.

If the default extents set by XLINE are less than 100m, GC42AB prompts to increase the extent to 1000m.

Only points that you select are considered! Xlines are not considered!

TML date MenuSourceGC
08/02/22   Roads|​Reports|​Compare as-built Geocomp Update or $200 435
 GC42ABS

Select as-built points within tolerance of roadway design.

Selects points within tolerance of roadway for use in another command.

Nominate roadway, depth, tolerances, and whether to compare against the design pavement or batter.

Once you have selected the points, run the next command that Use Previous to reselect the points in another command.

TML date  Source 
08/02/22     Geocomp Update or $200  
 GC42DTM

Compare DTM triangles within tolerance of roadway design.

Compares DTM points, triangle centroids and link midpoints to a roadway.

Nominate roadway, DTM layer, depth, tolerances, and whether to compare against the design pavement or batter.

Where the elevation difference cannot be determined, or the points are outside the default xline offsets, the points are marked with *.

See also DESIGNELEV, GC42, GC42AB and XLINES.

TML date MenuSource 
08/02/22   Roads|​Reports|​Compare DTM Geocomp Update or $200  
 GC42HAL

Compare as-built points with HAL in selected Roadway.

Compare as-built points with the horizontal alignment in a selected roadjob.

TML date  Source 
08/02/22     Geocomp Update or $200  
 GC42KB

Compare as-built points with HAL and design kerb set.

Compare surveyed points with a design set, such as a kerb, to report whether offsets are within tolerance.

Dialog

CL HAL
Select a HAL for centreline chainages and offsets. To compute chainages and offsets from the design set, select the same set for CL and design.
Design set
Select a design set, such as a lip or back of kerb.
Offset
Add a horizontal offset to design set.
Depth
Enter a depth offset to design set.
Inside
Consider points to the left of the design set to be Inside. Consider points to the right Outside.
Outside
Consider points to the left of the design set to be Outside. Consider points to the right Inside.
As Built Points
Select surveyed points to compare with the design set.
Settings
Inside Tol | Outside Tol
Select maximum horizontal tolerance Inside or Outside of design set (in mm).
RL High Tol | RL Low Tol
Select maximum vertical tolerance Low or High from design set (in mm).
Limit points by chainage range
Report only points within a specified chainage range.
OK
Report to P3Pad.

Report

Report properties and computed values for each selected As-Built point.

Point Number
Point number.
Chainage
Distance in m along CL HAL.
C/L Offset
Horizontal offset in m from CL.
As Built Offset
Horizontal offset in m to CL minus offset in m from design set to CL.
Diff Offset
Horizontal offset in mm from design set (adjusted by entered Offset in m).
* In
Diff Offset is out of tolerance Inside of design set.
* Out
Diff Offset is out of tolerance Outside design set.
Diff Height
Difference in elevation in mm from design set (adjusted by entered Depth in m).
# Low
Diff Height is out of tolerance below design set.
# High
Diff Height is out of tolerance above design set.
Easting
Easting.
Northing
Northing.
Height
Elevation.
Design Height
Elevation of design set where point is perpendicular.
Name
Point name.

Notes

Negative offsets are to the left. Chainages and CL offsets are computed along the CL. As Built offsets and design height where the point is perpendicular to the set.

Offsets are reported in project units to the number of decimal places in UNITSSET Precision for Distances. Offset differences are reported in mm to one decimal place.

Use SHOWDIRN to show the direction and reverse if needed.

TML date  Source 
08/02/22     Geocomp Update or $200  
 GC42VAL

Compare as-built points with VAL in selected Roadway.

Compare as-built points with the vertical alignment in a selected roadjob.

TML date  Source 
08/02/22     Geocomp Update or $200  
 GC43

Report surface or horizontal areas of shapes in a roadjob.

Estimate approximate areas quickly.

This report is presented in chainage ranges. The length of shape is reported for each chainage.

Assumptions

  • Shapes are used only once in a subgrade. If a shape is used more than once, the calculated areas include the shape each time. This could overestimate the area of a shape.
  • The roadway is straight. Because no curve correction is applied, this may over or underestimate the area.

See also GC43S and GC43CSV

TML date MenuSourceGC
08/02/22   Roads|​Reports|​Surface area of shapes Geocomp Update or $250 475
 GC43CSV

Report surface or horizontal areas of shapes in a roadjob based on chainages, to a comma-​delimited file.

Report surface or horizontal areas of shapes in a roadjob based on chainages, to a comma-​delimited file.

Assumptions

  • Shapes are used only once in a subgrade. If a shape is used more than once, the calculated areas include the shape each time. This could overestimate the area of a shape.
  • The roadway is straight. Because no curve correction is applied, this may over or underestimate the area.

See also GC43 and GC43SCSV.

TML date  Source 
08/02/22     Geocomp Update or $275  
 GC43MCSV

Report surface or horizontal areas of shapes in a roadjob based on chainages, for multiple surfaces, to a comma-​delimited file.

Report surface or horizontal areas of shapes in a roadjob based on chainages, for multiple surfaces, to a comma-​delimited file.

Assumptions

  • Shapes are used only once in a subgrade. If a shape is used more than once, the calculated areas include the shape each time. This could overestimate the area of a shape.
  • The roadway is straight. Because no curve correction is applied, this may over or underestimate the area.

See also GC43CSV.

TML date  Source 
08/02/22     Geocomp Update or $275  
 GC43S

Report surface or horizontal areas of shapes in a roadjob based on chainages, within surface materials.

Compute areas within a selected surface material.

Assumptions

  • Shapes are used only once in a subgrade. If a shape is used more than once, the calculated areas include the shape each time. This could overestimate the area of a shape.
  • The roadway is straight. Because no curve correction is applied, this may over or underestimate the area.
TML date  Source 
08/02/22     Geocomp Update or $275  
 GC43SCSV

Report surface or horizontal areas of shapes in a roadjob based on chainages, within surface materials to a CSV.

Compute areas within a selected surface material.

Assumptions

  • Shapes are used only once in a subgrade. If a shape is used more than once, the calculated areas include the shape each time. This could overestimate the area of a shape.
  • The roadway is straight. Because no curve correction is applied, this may over or underestimate the area.
TML date  Source 
08/02/22     Geocomp Update or $275  
 GC44

Report surface or horizontal areas of a DTM based on chainages.

Sum the areas of triangles with centroids within specified surface, chainage, boundary, offsets, slope and cut or fill limits.

By using centroids, and not precisely clipping triangles, this command is ideal for fast estimation of pavement areas and batter areas on large jobs.

Method

  • Use a Roadjob and Design DTM layer to define the surface
  • Use the maximum slope of the triangle or the crossfall at right angles to the HAL.
  • Select only triangles with centroids within specified
    • slope direction
    • cut or fill condition
    • chainages
    • boundaries
    • offsets
    and exclude those within
    • dead regions
    • plines in a layer list
  • Create points in the current layer at matching centroids.
  • Enter a report heading.
  • Report horizontal or surface areas.
  • Report within Slope ranges.

Slope table

Slope ranges are derived from [SlopeTable] Section of TMODWIN.INI. For example:

[SlopeTable]
TableSize=3
0=200.0
1=100.0
2=50.0

See EDITINI to import a slope table.

Dead regions

Define any dead regions by SETSMOOTH.

See also SHADESLP, GC44S and GC44CSV.

TML date MenuSourceGC
08/02/22   Roads|​Reports|​Surface areas by chainage
Roads|​Reports|​Surface areas by station
Geocomp Update or $250 117
 GC44CSV

Report surface areas of a DTM by slope and chainage to .CSV.

Report surface or horizontal areas of a DTM based on chainages to a comma-separated (.CSV) file.

Sum the areas of triangles with centroids within specified surface, chainage, boundary, offsets, slope and cut or fill limits.

By using centroids, and not precisely clipping triangles, this command is ideal for fast estimation of areas on large jobs.

Method

  • Use a Roadjob and Design DTM layer to define the surface
  • Use the maximum slope of the triangle or the crossfall at right angles to the HAL.
  • Select only triangles with centroids within specified
    • slope direction
    • Slope ranges
    • cut or fill condition
    • chainages
    • boundaries
    • offsets
    and exclude those within
    • dead regions
    • plines in a layer list
  • Create points in the current layer at matching centroids.
  • Enter a report heading.
  • Report horizontal or surface areas.
  • Report within Slope ranges.

Slope table

Slope ranges are derived from [SlopeTable] Section of TMODWIN.INI. For example:

[SlopeTable]
TableSize=3
0=200.0
1=100.0
2=50.0

See EDITINI to import a slope table.

Dead regions

Define any dead regions by SETSMOOTH.

TML date  SourceGC
08/02/22     Geocomp Update or $275 117
 GC44S

Report surface or horizontal areas of a DTM within a surface material.

Sum the areas of triangles with centroids within specified surface, chainage, boundary, offset and surface material limits.

Using centroids to select whole triangles means fast estimation of areas on large jobs at the expense of overestimation or underestimation. Any triangle that overlaps the specified limits is wholly included if the centroid is inside and wholly excluded if the centroid is outside.

Method

  • Use a Roadjob and Design DTM layer to define the surface
  • Use the maximum slope of the triangle or the crossfall at right angles to the HAL.
  • Select only triangles with centroids within specified
    • surface material
    • chainages
    • boundaries
    • offsets
    and exclude those within
    • dead regions
    • plines in a layer list
  • Create points in the current layer at matching centroids
  • Enter a report heading.
  • Report surface or horizontal areas

Define any dead regions by SETSMOOTH.

TML date  Source 
08/02/22     Geocomp Update or $275  
 GC45

Create points along a HAL or VAL at incremental distances.

Create points along a pline or set a nominated interval.

In the profile view, the distances are measured along on the pline.

TML date MenuSourceGC
08/02/22   Draw|​Point|​Along HAL Geocomp Update or $250 28
 GC46

Compute cut volumes between surfaces within boundaries.

Compute excavation volumes in pits, mines and quarries, where there are large numbers of layers of material. Triangles are used which are more accurate than grids.

Set up the surfaces using Surface Manager (SURFACE). The Finish Surface, which represents the design limit of excavation, needs to cover the extent of the other surfaces. Select multiple boundaries in plan (="blocks"), an elevation range, and a report style. If a .CSV report style is selected, the resulting comma-​separated variable (.CSV) file can be imported into a spreadsheet application for further computation.

If a depth surface is nominated an elevation surface is created then deleted.

TML date  SourceGC
08/02/22     Geocomp Update or $200 247
 GC47

Create road resheet design profiles.

Create profiles to guide you when drafting road resheet design profiles.

Compare selected points against the centreline and templates in a roadjob to create a proposed profile which maintains the nominated minimum cover, and two other profiles which allow for variations in crossfall.

For example:

  1. Create a roadjob with templates, a horizontal alignment and a vertical alignment.
  2. Run GC47
  3. Select the roadjob
  4. Select points on the existing road surface under the proposed road pavement
  5. Enter a desired minimum depth of cover (e.g. 0.2)
  6. Enter Min% and Max% for the crossfalls
  7. Click OK.
  8. At the chainage of each selected point, GC47 creates a vertex in a profile pline with design elevation = point elevation + (crossfall x offset) + minimum cover
  9. The values are also reported to P3Pad
  10. Re-run GC47 with non-zero tolerance values for Min% and Max% to create two additional profiles
  11. Use these three profiles as guides when you create your final design profile

If your design profile remains below all three profiles then the minimum cover will be satisfied at the selected existing surface points.

TML date  SourceGC
08/02/22     Geocomp Update or $200 118
 GC48

Create profiles from shapes in a roadway.

Select a roadway, chainage range and interval, and selected shapes.

The created profiles are ideal for checking grades on kerblines, edge of pavement, and so on.

TML date  SourceGC
08/02/22     Geocomp Update or $200 253,450
 GC49

Create a point on a line at an elevation.

Create a point on the line between two points, at a location such that the new point has the specified elevation.

TML date MenuSourceGC
08/02/22   Draw|​Point|​On line at elevation Geocomp Update or $250 260
 GC50

Grade a set from points with known elevations.

Interpolate or extrapolate elevations onto 2D points from elevations of 3D points in the same set.

See also INT3DSET, INTERP3D, GCCONCHK, GCRIVER and GCNOELEV.

TML date MenuSourceGC
08/02/22   Modify|​Elevation|​From points in sets Geocomp Update or $250 185
 GC51

Intersection Design.

Design vertical alignments in intersections. A limit of nine alignments allows for four kerb returns, four splitter islands and a roundabout.

This simplifies a process which would otherwise require repeated use of commands for profile editing, creating 3D points (3D), DTM creation, and so on.

Before running this function, design the intersection in 2D and tile plan and profile views so the updated intersection contours can be seen as the vertical profiles are edited.

To use this function:

  • Select Settings to nominate up to nine HAL/VAL pairs.
  • Select Recompute to create 3D points along the alignments (on the nominated layer using the 3D settings), regenerate a DTM of the intersection and show updated quick contours.
  • Selecting the radio button for a pair, makes that alignment active, highlights the alignment and its direction in the plan view, and fits the profile view showing only referenced profiles.
  • To edit profiles, make the desired alignment active with the radio button, exit the Settings dialog, pick the design profile then locate the point in the profile to edit.
TML date MenuSourceGC
08/02/22   Cogo|​Streets|​Intersection design Geocomp Update or $200 492+77+254
 GC52

Change the group of selected objects.

Change the group number of selected objects.

See also SGRP which has a dialog for keeping track of used groups and SETGRP which sets to the next group.

TML date MenuSourceGC
08/02/22   Modify|​Group Geocomp Update or $250 40
 GC53

Modify, list or highlight contourable or non-​contourable points.

Modify, list or highlight and select the contourablity of selected points.

To be included in a DTM, a point must have 3D coordinates, be on the DTM layer and be contourable. GC53 lists, displays or modifies the contourability.

Options

Points:
Select those points to be considered
Contourable | Non-​Contourable
List, select or make Contourable or Non-​Contourable
Re-Form DTMs
Reform all DTMs afterwards
List
Of the selected points, list those points that are Contourable or those that are Non-​Contourable
Highlight and Select
Of the selected points, highlight with temporary circles those that are Contourable, or those that are Non-​Contourable, and make those selectable by Previous in subsequent commands
Include Points into DTM
Make all selected points Contourable
Exclude Points from DTM
Make all selected points Non-​Contourable
Cancel
Cancel the command

See also

EDIT
Edit the contourability of a single point by the "Include point in DTM" check box
AUTODRAFT
Modify contourability during survey
GCDTMALL
Refresh all DTMs
LINKSET
Display links or quick contours
TMXIN, CVDIMPT, GC12DIN
Commands which can import points that are Contourable or Non-​Contourable
3DFILTER
Filter points from a DTM by making them Non-​Contourable

TML date MenuSourceGC
08/02/22   DTM|​More...|​Include or exclude points Geocomp Update or $250 257
 GC54

Transform ellipsoidal elevations to geoidal elevations.

Transform to elevations relative to an ellipsoid to elevations relative to a geoid using differences interpolated from a layer of N-values.

For example, to transform elevations of MGA points from ellipsoidal heights to elevations relative to Australian Height Datum (AHD) using differences from AUSGeoid09:

  1. Use AUSGEOID create a .TMX of AUSGeoid09 N-values on a grid of coordinates transformed to an MGA94 zone.
  2. Use TMXIN to import the N-values.
  3. Use GC54 to select a layer of "Ellipse height points" and subtract N-values interpolated from the "N-Geoid heights" layer to derive elevations on AHD.

If transforming elevations from AHD to AUSGeoid, GCCOPY the N-values to a new layer with a suitable name and then SCALEELV to multiply the Z values by -1.

For more information and more files of N-values, see Geoscience Australia.

The same method can be used for Geoid-​Spheroid differences.

TML date  Source 
08/02/22     Geocomp Update or $200  
 GC55

Modify elevations by grade between two sets.

Extrapolate or interpolate heights from two 3D sets onto points in a 2D set using grades along perpendicular bisectors.

For each point on the 2D set, the new elevation is on the grade between the 3D sets, along the perpendicular bisector.

Construction plines on the current layer can show where the grades were measured.

If one of the sets is a DTM edge, and the other draped onto the DTM parallel to and inside the edge, GC55 can be used to extend a DTM outwards at approximately the same grade.

See also

GC90
Extend a DTM to a point.
GC91
Extend a DTM to a distance.
GC55HAL
Modify elevations by grade perpendicular to a HAL.

TML date  SourceGC
08/02/22     Geocomp Update or $250 81
 GC55HAL

Modify elevations by grade between two sets perpendicular to HAL.

Extrapolate or interpolate heights from two 3D sets onto points in a 2D set using grades perpendicular to HAL.

For each point on the 2D set, the new elevation is on the grade between 3D sets, perpendicular to the selected HAL.

Construction plines on the current layer can show where the grades were measured.

See also

GC90
Extend a DTM to a point.
GC91
Extend a DTM to a distance.
GC55
Modify elevations by grade on bisector.

TML date MenuSourceGC
08/02/22   Modify|​Elevation|​From two sets Geocomp Update or $250 81
 GC56

Swap in X,Y or Z.

Swap either X with Y, X with Z or Y with Z.

Alternatively, mirror around X or Y axes.

Adjust for coordinates the wrong way around, contour walls using terrestrial photogrammetry, move or rotate structures in 3D, etc.

Handles points, plines, blocks and text.

Functions that might be useful in conjunction include SCALE, GCSCALE, MIRROR, MIRRORDY, GC07 and GC38.

See also ROT3D, GC3DROT, BGELEV and FLIPUP.

TML date MenuSource 
08/02/22   Modify|​Transform|​Swap X Y Z Geocomp Update or $250  
 GC57

Create 3D points from cross sections.

Create 3D points on the current layer in Plan view corresponding to selected objects in the XSect view, relative to the active alignment.

The selected objects may include points.

Include all surfaces, or the lowest.

TML date  SourceGC
08/02/22     Geocomp Update or $250 157
 GC58

Remove duplicate sets, plines and text from a layer.

Compare objects in a layer or layer list and move duplicates to layer 0.

Use GC58 to remove redundant objects, for example objects that have been imported multiple times. You might want to check for duplicate points first with GC92 or remove them with GC31 or DTM formation.

Duplicate sets join identical point numbers in the same or reversed order.

Duplicate plines have the same (or reversed) vertex coordinates, elevation, colour and spline type.

Duplicate text has the same insertion point coordinates (within a tolerance), characters, layer, colour, slant, height, rotation, aspect, font, orientation, horizontal justification and vertical justification.

Compares objects in the current view only. To compare objects in all views, close all views first.

See also DUPLTRIS to remove duplicate triangle sides and GC58S to remove duplicates from selected objects.

TML date MenuSourceGC
08/02/22   Edit|​More...|​Duplicate sets and plines Geocomp Update or $250 154
 GC58S

Remove selected duplicate sets, plines and text.

Compare selected objects (on any layers) and move duplicates to layer 0.

Use GC58S to remove redundant objects that have been imported multiple times. You might want to remove duplicate points first. See GC31 and GC92.

Duplicate sets must join identical point numbers and have identical layer names but can be reversed.

Duplicate plines must have all identical layer names, vertices, elevation, colour, spline type, etc. but can be reversed.

Duplicate text must have the same layer name, insertion point coordinates, characters, layer, colour, slant, height, rotation, aspect, font, orientation, horizontal justification and vertical justification.

See also GC58 which selects by layer or layer list.

TML date  SourceGC
08/02/22     Geocomp Update or $250 154
 GC59

Report Quality Assurance from Geodimeter as-built survey.

Read a Geodimeter job file from an as-built survey, compare with a HAL and report. The job file must include the setout points and the corresponding picked-up points.

The report includes Design Chainage, Design Offset, Design Elevation, Setout Chainage, Setout Offset, Setout Elevation, Chainage Difference, Offset Difference and Elevation Difference.

TML date  Source 
08/02/22     Geocomp Update or $250  
 GC60

Report radial setout.

Report bearings and distances from instrument stations to setout points.

Use this report in the field to set out points by theodolite or level, where you do not have the ability to upload the station and setout points into a total station.

Dialog

Inst Stn layer
Select a layer of instrument station points.
Setout Pts
Select points to be set out.
Max radial distance
Specify a limiting radial distance.
Horz Dist
Report horizontal distances.
Slope Dist
Report slope distances.
Round bearings
Round bearings.
OK
From each instrument station, to each selected point, report the instrument point, setout point, bearing, horizontal distance, elevation difference and name.
Cancel
Cancel creating the report.

See also

LPTSRAD
List points with bearings and distances from an instrument.
STAKE
Report angles coordinates and distances from an instrument.
STAKED
Report differences in locations of staked (set-out) points.
PSTATION
Create points from an instrument.

TML date MenuSourceGC
08/02/22   Reports|​More...|​Radial setout Geocomp Update or $250 41
 GC61

Create a point at a distance along a line between two points.

Nominate two points or a set segment, and a horizontal or slope distance along the line from the first point to the second point.

Once the first point is created, the default distance is the last distance entered. The message scroll keeps track of the total distance entered.

Choose whether to measure the distance from previous point or the first point.

To extrapolate, enter a negative distance or a total distance greater than the distance between the points.

If the points have elevations, the new elevation is interpolated.

TML date MenuSourceGC
08/02/22   Draw|​Point|​On line at distance Geocomp Update or $250 28
 GC63

Intersect a batter defined by two sets with a DTM.

Intersect a batter defined by two sets with a DTM at each Xline.

Dialog

HAL
Select the horizontal alignment
DTM
Select the DTM.
Batter 1 | Batter 2
Select two batter set segments that join 3D points.
Ver Off
Enter any vertical offset or perpendicular offset (+ve for up, -ve for down).
Name
Enter any name for the created points and set.
Vertical | Perpendicular to batter
Specify whether any vertical offset is vertical or perpendicular to the batter.
OK
For each Xline, extend the grade between the two sets to intersect the DTM, create points, and join the points with a set.
Cancel
Cancel the command.

TML date  Source 
08/02/22     Geocomp Update or $250  
 GC64

Intersect two slopes each defined by two sets.

Create points on the slope between two sets where it meets the slope between another two sets.

The created points are placed at each xline of the selected HAL. The xline must extend past the intersection. The points are then joined to create a set at the intersection of the two slopes.

One pair of sets is the "design" and the other is the "batter".

For example, the "design" sets may be on the bottom of subgrade and the "batter" sets may be on a batter. Use this to find the low point of a median strip with the "design" being the right batter of a left carriageway and the "batter" being the left batter of a right carriageway.

Vertical or perpendicular offsets (negative for down) can be applied to both slopes.

See also GCXTIE.

TML date  Source 
08/02/22     Geocomp Update or $250  
 GC64BIT

Fix initialisation to suit 64-bit or 32-bit Windows.

Correct the TSP, macro, menu and callout folders in a TMODWIN.INI file copied from another computer to suit the current version of Windows 64-bit or 32-bit Windows and add C:\TMCUSTOM\GEOCOMP to the Terramodel Search Path (TSP).

Terramodel is installed into C:\Program files (x86)\​Trimble\​Terramodel\ on 32-bit computers and C:\Program files\​Trimble\​Terramodel\ on 64-bit computers. The TMODWIN.INI file contains user-interface settings. If you copy sections from a TMODWIN.INI from a computer with 32-bit Windows into one with 64-bit Windows, or vice versa, the path for the macro, menu and loaded callout styles will be incorrect. This can result in user-interface problems like grey buttons on the toolbar, changed menus and "GC*" commands not being found.

Use EDITINI to import sections from TMODWIN.INI files into the current TMODWIN.INI.

See also GCHELP and TSP.

TML date  Source 
08/02/22     Geocomp Update  
 GC65

Create points by manually entering station | chainage, offset and elevation.

Dialog

HAL:
Select the horizontal alignment
VAL:
To enter differences in elevation, select the vertical alignment. To enter absolute elevations, leave blank.
Ch: (or Sta: or KP:)
Enter the distance along the HAL (chainage or station)
Off:
Enter the horizontal offset. Enter 0.00 to create the point on the HAL.
Elev:
Enter the elevation. For no elevation, leave blank.
Diff Elev:
Enter the difference in elevation to the selected VAL.
Grp:
Enter a group, or leave blank for group 0.
Name:
Enter the point name, or leave blank.

Station or Chainage

The dialog uses the full chainage or station label (such as Chainage or Station) and the short chainage or station label (such as Sta., Ch. or KP) as configured by STAORCHN. These are configured in the [Geocomp] section of TMODWIN.INI for the computer and are independant of the project file. The short label also prefixes the station or chainage value.

See also

PSTATION Ground
A similar command
GC65FILE
Import chainage, offset and elevation from a file
EDITINI
Import sections from TMODWIN.INI

TML date MenuSourceGC
08/02/22   Draw​|Point|​By Ch+Offset+Elev
Draw​|Point|​By Stn+Offset+Elev
Geocomp Update or $250 344
 GC65FILE

Import points by chainage, offset and elevation.

Create points relative to a selected HAL from values in a CSV with each line containing chainage, offset, elevation, name or point number.

Fields

The distance along the alignment is imported from the first field. This can be a distance along the HAL (2D) or along the VAL (3D).

The horizontal offset is imported from the second field. If the second field is empty, the offset is 0.000.

The elevation, elevation difference or perpendicular distance from the VAL is imported from the third field. If the third field is empty, the new point has no elevation.

The point name is imported from the fourth field. If the fourth field is empty, the point name is blank.

The point number is imported from the fifth field. If the fifth field is empty or duplicated, the number of the new point is the next integer point number.

Dialog

HAL:
Select a horizontal alignment.
2D
Import the chainage along the HAL.
3D
Import the 3D distance along any selected VAL.
Extend HAL
Extrapolate beyond the extents of the HAL.
VAL:
To import differences in elevation, select the vertical alignment. To import absolute elevations, leave blank.
Vertical
Import differences in elevation and add the elevation of the VAL.
Perp to Val
Import a distance and create the new point at that perpendicular distance from the VAL.
Create set
Join the imported points with a set.

Chainage or station

The dialog uses the full chainage or station label (such as Chainage or Station) and the short chainage or station label (such as Sta., Ch. or KP). These labels are configured by STAORCHN and stored in the [Geocomp] section of TMODWIN.INI and are thus dependant on the computer and independant of the project file. The short label also prefixes the station or chainage value in some commands. Station values can include + characters.

See also

GC65
to type in the values
GCCHRLIN
to import chainage and elevation into a profile
IMPORTXS
to import cross sections into a roadway
ALIGNIMP
to import alignments only
ALIGNOFF
to import alignment offsets
XLINPTS
to create xlines at the imported points

TML date MenuSource 
08/02/22   Roads​|​More...|​​Import chainage offset elevation
Roads​|More...|​Import station offset elevation
Geocomp Update or $250  
 GC66

Create breaklines at changes of grade, valleys or ridges.

Create breaklines along DTM triangle sides at Changes of Grade (where both triangles slope the same way and the difference in grade is greater than a specified value), Valleys (where both triangles slope up) or Ridges (where both triangles slope down).

Gc66 is useful for interpreting and refining DTMs made up from point data.

The breaklines are created in the nominated colour on the DTM layer.

You have the option of ignoring existing breaklines or creating new breaklines only where there isn't already a breakline.

See also GCFOLLOW and GCFALL.

TML date MenuSource 
08/02/22   DTM|More...|​Create ridges and valleys Geocomp Update or $250  
 GC67

Move points onto nearest perpendicular Xlines.

For each Xline in turn, find the chainage where the xline crosses the HAL, then find all points within both the specified "Chainage tolerance" distance value and the extent of the Xline, then move each point to the chainage of the Xline while maintaining the offset from the hal.

If the Xlines are perpendicular to the hal, and the chainage tolerance is less than half the spacing between the Xlines, this has the same effect as moving points onto the nearest Xline.

If "Create XSects" is ticked, the 3D points within the Ch Tol. are used to create cross sections in the XSect view. Cross sections are not sorted on offset.

GC67 is useful when working with surveyed cross section point data.

TML date  SourceGC
08/02/22     Geocomp Update or $250 66
 GC67A

Move points onto nearest skewed Xlines.

For each Xline in turn, find all points within the specified "Sect Tol." distance perpendicular to the xline then move each point to the nearest location on the Xline.

If "Create XSects" is ticked, 3D points within the Sect Tol. of the chainage where the Xline crosses the alignment are used to create cross sections in the XSect view. The cross sections are not sorted on offset and do not follow skewed cross sections.

TML date  Source 
08/02/22     Geocomp Update or $250  
 GC682SET

Add points into sets with connecting breaklines.

Add points into one or two sets, to achieve a minimum number of segments and connect with breaklines.

For each selected set, insert new points where the segment length is greater than the set length divided by the minimum number of segments.

If both the start and end points of the original segment are 3D, elevations are interpolated onto the new points.

"Connect Pts" to create breaklines linking pairs of new points in the new sets.

Enter any name for the new points.

Use GC682SET to create extra breaklines for a smooth transition surface between sets or to divide a set into a fixed number of segments.

See also GCDIVIDE and GCPTDIST.

TML date  Source 
08/02/22     Geocomp Update or $250  
 GC69

Modify zero elevations (Z = 0.00) to no elevation (Z = *).

Modify zero elevations (Z = 0.00) to no elevation (Z = *).

2D points are often stored in .DWG and .DXF files as 3D points with elevations equal to zero. Because these elevations are retained when imported into Terramodel, they interfere with DTM formation.

Be careful, as there are cases where zero elevations are correct, especially on arbitrary datums or near coastlines.

See also GCNOELEV to select all 2D points, GC53 to retain elevations but exclude them from DTMs and ELEVATION or GCELEV to modify elevations.

TML date MenuSourceGC
08/02/22   Modify|​Elevation|​0.00 to * Geocomp Update or $250 333
 GC70

Combine elevation of point and DTM.

Compares the elevation of each point with the elevation interpolated from the DTM layer and changes the elevation. The options are: DTM, DTM - Z, DTM + Z, Z - DTM, -Z - DTM, DTM * Z and DTM / Z.

For example, use this to convert drill hole depths to absolute elevations.

Select "* Outside DTM" to remove the elevations of points outside the extent of the DTM or not, to leave the elevations of those points unchanged.

See also DTMPTS which modifies the elevations of 2D points only.

See also DTMMATH and ELEVOBJS.

TML date MenuSource 
08/02/22   Modify|​Elevation|​Combine with DTM Geocomp Update or $250  
 GC71

Solid hatch along lines.

Create parallel plines on either side of each selected pline or set, close the ends then solid hatch each closed pline.

Parallel lines are offset by half the nominated width in plan units. The pline and hatch are created in the specified layer. To create dashed solid lines, specify a gap and length.

One application is to show line marking.

The hatch is SOLID pattern with spacing = 1. Chose a suitable hatch scale so that you appear to have solid thick lines, independent of view scale and smooth around bends without using a complex linetype.

The line will be plotted wider on paper by the width of the pen assigned to its colour, so use a thin pen.

If the plines to be selected include splines, despline or FILTER a copy first.

GC71 can also be used to create boundaries of corridors that follow alignments for use with volumes and dynaimages.

See also SETAREA.

TML date MenuSourceGC
08/02/22   Draw|​Hatch|​Along lines Geocomp Update or $250 510
 GC72

Report satellite horizon curtain.

Compute the vertical angle from selected points to visible sky at a nominated bearing interval.

Loc:
Select a location.
DTM
Select the DTM layer for the existing surface including obstructions such as buildings and terrain.
Ant Ht
Enter the antenna height.
OK
Report the Easting, Northing, and elevation interpolated from the DTM, the Antenna height and, at 5 degree intervals, the lowest angle from the horizon unobstructed by the DTM at that bearing.

Enter these values into GPS satellite visibility software.

TML date  Source 
08/02/22     Geocomp Update or $200  
 GC73

Interpolate elevation from VAL.

For each selected point, find the chainage along a HAL, interpolate the elevation from a VAL at that chainage, and modify the elevation of the point.

TML date MenuSourceGC
08/02/22   Modify|​Elevation|​From VAL Geocomp Update or $250 77
 GC74

Select start station | chainage for multiple selected HALs.

Select the same start stations | chainages for multiple HALs.

See also SETSTA and CHAINAGE |​STATION.

TML date  SourceGC
08/02/22     Geocomp Update or $250 252
 GC75

Show distance and grade between sets or plines at cursor.

Display the chainage, horizontal difference, vertical difference and grade between the sets or plines, perpendicular to the selected HAL, in the message scroll area.

The HAL may be one of the sets or plines.

See also GC37, GC94 and GC3DSETS.

TML date MenuSource 
08/02/22   Reports|​More...|​Distance between sets Geocomp Update or $200  
 GC76

Report on Geodimeter .JOB file.

Report on a survey in Geodimeter .JOB file format.

TML date  Source 
08/02/22     Geocomp Update or $250  
 GC77

Change elevation of text to match subject.

Modify elevations of selected text objects to the elevations of their subject points.

Text objects are created with no elevation by default. If the text is created by labelling 3D points with text (LABPT), and then exported to .DWG or .DXF (EXPORT), objects with no elevation will be assigned elevations of 0.00. In a rotated or perspective view, the text and points will appear to be separated because the elevations of the points are (usually) not 0.00.

Use GC77 to modify the elevations of the text. Then, when you export those points and text to CAD, the points and text will always appear next to points.

See also SYM2BLK which replaces symbols (that display with symbol font) with similar blocks that have the elevations of the points.

TML date MenuSourceGC
08/02/22   Modify|​Elevation|​From subject Geocomp Update or $250 92
 GC79

Renumber points to match their point names.

Renumber points to match their point names.

Remove blanks or force alphabetic characters to upper case.

Points are not renumbered if the point number is already in use.

If the names are alphanumeric, use System Configuration (SYSTEM) to set Max Alpha Points high enough.

See also PTS2NAME.

TML date  Source 
08/02/22     Geocomp Update or $250  
 GC80

Report areas of lots and compare the sum against a boundary.

Report the area of each selected set, and compare the area of the largest set against the sum of all the others.

In a subdivision, the area of the external boundary should equal the sum of the areas of all the other lots, including roads and reserves. If the difference is the size of a lot, look for omitted or duplicated lots of that size. If the difference is smaller, look for incorrectly drawn lots.

TML date  SourceGC
08/02/22     Geocomp Update or $200 75
 GC81

Report horizontal alignment.

Report coordinates and curves along an alignment.

Report curve details and coordinates along a selected alignment at a nominated interval.

The curve summary lists the hal record, radius, tangent length, arc length, deflection angle and coordinates of the intersection point, start, centre and end.

At the nominated interval, report the chainage, bearing, easting and northing.

The coordinates of the start and end chainage are also listed.

See also HAL and Alignment reports (REPORTS).

TML date  Source 
08/02/22     Geocomp Update or $250  
 GC82

Report DTM areas.

Report the planimetric and surface of a DTM within boundaries or slope ranges.

The planimetric, or horizontal, areas are the areas as measured from a plan. The surface area is larger because it takes into account the slopes. The areas could be from any DTM including lot areas, pavement areas or batter areas.

Dialog

DTM:
Select a DTM from the list.
Bdys:
Select no boundary for the whole DTM or select boundaries to limit areas.
Exclude dead regions
Subtract areas of any dead regions defined by SETSMOOTH.
Report of Slope Ranges
Include areas and percentages of defined slope ranges in the report.

The default layer is the current DTM layer. To set the current DTM layer, see DTMCH.

Slope ranges

The slope ranges are defined by decreasing percentage slope in the [SlopeTable] section of TMODWIN.INI. Use EDITINI to import a new SlopeTable.

See also

DTMAREA
Report areas within slope ranges for a whole DTM.
SHADESLP
Create hatching, a report and a legend of slope ranges and define, save slope ranges in an .SSR file.
SLOPE
Create boundaries for a single slope range
GC20
Report volumes and slope ranges
GC44
Report slope areas within chainage ranges
LINKSET
Control link settings
GOLFAREA
Report areas of golf course boundaries

TML date MenuSource 
08/02/22   DTM|​DTM areas
DTM|​DTM area
Geocomp Update or $200  
 GC83

Select objects less than or greater than specified length.

Select objects with length less than or greater than a nominated Max Length, from selected sets, plines and text.

Objects equal to the length are also selected.

The selected objects can then be selected by the next command using Right-​mouse-​button Previous.

For example, to delete all short plines less than or equal to 10.0m, first use GC83 to select objects less than or equal to 10.0m long from within a selection of objects of Type Pline. Then DELETE the selected objects using Right-​mouse-​button and Previous.

TML date  Source 
08/02/22     Geocomp Update or $200  
 GC84

Join multiple plines or sets.

Join multiple consecutive plines or sets where the locations of the ends match.

See also JOIN and DISJOIN.

TML date  Source 
08/02/22     Geocomp Update or $250  
 GC86

Move objects relative to an alignment or point.

Move points, blocks or text towards or away from an alignment or point by a nominated amount.

If the entered offset is positive, selected objects will be moved away from the alignment or point. If negative, towards. Points closer to the alignment than the negative offset will be moved across the alignment. Points exactly on the alignment, will be moved slightly to the right of the alignment.

Dialog

Points, Text or Blocks
Select points, text or blocks to be moved.
HAL or Point
Select a set or pline for a horizontal alignment or a reference point.
Offset Distance
Enter a horizontal offset distance.

Usage

Use GC86 to move part of a vertical wall by at least 2mm so the DTM forms correctly. See also GC92.

Use GC86 to offset HAL-point labels created by LABELHAL.

Use GC86 to offset a set without copying, by selecting the points by Ofline and the HAL by the set.

Use GC86 to adjust a distance by a prism constant which can't be adjusted in the instrument or in RDE.

To move points exactly onto the alignment, use GC36 instead.

TML date  Source 
08/02/22     Geocomp Update or $250  
 GC87

Create an elevation DTM from another elevation DTM and a difference DTM.

Select and existing surface DTM layer, a depth layer and the DTM layer for the new elevations.

See also ADDISO, GC54 and EARTHWORK.

TML date  Source 
08/02/22     Geocomp Update or $250  
 GC88

Clip or extend a pline to a defined length.

Clip or extend a pline to a defined length.

See also CLIP, EXTEND and GCEXTEND.

TML date  Source 
08/02/22     Geocomp Update or $250  
 GC89

Create a DTM layer at points offset from another DTM.

Create points on a new DTM at a specified 3D distance perpendicular to points on a selected DTM.

The directions and distance are perpendicular to the mean of the slopes of the triangles on each point.

TML date  Source 
08/02/22     Geocomp Update or $250  
 GC90

Extend DTM to point.

Create a new point on a DTM layer with elevation extrapolated along the slope of the closest DTM triangle.

See also GC91.

TML date  Source 
08/02/2